29 

State Agency, political sub-division, or other governments to share joint authority (authority 

possessed by both parties) are authorized by A.R.S. 11-951 through 11-952. 

In the event that a governmental agreement scope of work would include environmentally related 

measurements or data generation, the ADEQ QA/QC Steering Committee’s role would be 

substantially the same as it is for the General Laboratory Services Contract. Procurement’s role 

would include coordination with the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Manager or his or her designee, the 

ADEQ Project/Case Manager, and the outside political subdivision, and then final negotiation of 

the governmental agreement. 

 4.5.1 ADHS and State Laboratory Services (SLS) 

The ADHS provides support for ADEQ as necessary for laboratory services, method 

development, risk assessments, development of some regulatory limits, and expert testimony. 
30 

CHAPTER 5 DOCUMENTATION AND RECORDS 

MANAGEMENT 

Maintaining important quality assurance (QA) documents and records is a continuous process at 

ADEQ. This process serves as a vehicle for identifying quality-related documents and records 

requiring management control. Moreover, this process serves to assure that QA documents and 

records are accessible, and protected from damage and deterioration during storage. Finally, 

ADEQ’s Records Management Process ensures compliance with all statutory and contractual 

requirements for records involving environmental Programs. ADEQ Records Management 

System also provides adequate preservation of key records necessary to support the mission of 

ADEQ. 

5.1 DEFINITION OF PUBLIC RECORDS 

"Records" as defined in ARS § 41-1350, “means all books, papers, maps, photographs or other 

documentary materials, regardless of physical form or characteristics, including prints or copies 

of such items produced or reproduced on film or electronic media, made or received by any 

governmental agency in pursuance of law or in connection with the transaction of public 

business and preserved or appropriate for preservation by the agency or its legitimate successor 

as evidence of the organization, functions, policies, decisions, procedures, operations or other 

activities of the government, or because of the informational and historical value of data 

contained therein. Library or museum material made or acquired solely for reference or 

exhibition purposes, extra copies of documents preserved only for convenience of reference and 

stocks of publications or documents intended for sale or distribution to interested persons are not 

included within the definition of records as used in this chapter.” 

5.2 EXCLUSIONS FROM THE DEFINITION OF PUBLIC RECORDS 

ARS § 49-205 indicates that: 

A. Any records, reports or information obtained from any person under this chapter, including 

records, reports or information obtained or prepared by the Director or a department employee, 

shall be available to the public, except that: 

1. Income tax returns are confidential; 

2. Drinking water system security vulnerability assessments that are submitted to the 

United States Environmental Protection Agency, pursuant to Public Law 107-188, 

are exempt from disclosure under this chapter and Title 39, Chapter 1; 

3. Other information, or a particular part of the information, shall be considered 

confidential on either: 

 (a) A showing, satisfactory to the Director, by any person that the information, or a particular 

part of the information, if made public, would divulge the trade secrets of the person. 
31 

(b) A determination by the Attorney General that disclosure of the information or a particular 

part of the information would be detrimental to an ongoing criminal investigation or to an 

ongoing or contemplated civil enforcement action under this chapter in superior court. 

B. Notwithstanding subsection A of this section, the following information shall be available to 

the public: 

1. The name and address of any permit applicant or permittee; 

2. The chemical constituents, concentrations and amounts of any pollutant 

discharge; 

3. The existence or level of a concentration of a pollutant in drinking water or in the 

environment. 

C. Notwithstanding subsection A of this section, and in addition to the information prescribed by 

subsection B of this section, the following information that is obtained by the department and 

that relates to discharges authorized by a permit issued under the Program adopted pursuant to 

section 49-203, subsection A, paragraph 2 shall be made available to the public by the 

department: 

1. Information required to be submitted in a permit application; 

2. The frequency of the discharge; 

3. The temperature and pH level of the discharge; 

4. Other water quality characteristics that are required to be reported under the 

permit. 

D. Notwithstanding subsection A of this section, the Director may disclose any records, reports 

or information obtained from any person under this chapter, including records, reports or 

information obtained by the Director or department employees, to: 

1. Other state employees concerned with administering this chapter or if the records, 

reports or information is relevant to any administrative or judicial proceeding 

under this chapter; 

2. Employees of the United States Environmental Protection Agency if such 

information is necessary or required to administer and implement or comply with 

the Clean Water Act, the Safe Drinking Water Act, Comprehensive 

Environmental Response Compensation and Liability Act (CERCLA) or 

provisions and regulations relating to those acts. 
32 

Materials excluded from the definition of public records include reference material, extra copies 

of articles, periodicals, reports, documents, blank forms, extra copies of documents preserved for 

convenience of reference, studies, vendor catalogs, and similar materials that are needed for 

convenience or reference, but are not part of the official file. Such items should be destroyed as 

soon as they are no longer needed and according to an approved retention schedule. 

Other materials excluded from the definition of public records, but maintained in confidential 

files, include draft documents, such as electronic and marked up copy drafts. 

5.3 CONFIDENTIAL DOCUMENTS 

Some documents collected, received, or generated may, by nature and content, be documents 

which require special handling procedures. Documents of this category may be, but are not 

limited to, enforcement sensitive/enforcement confidential, attorney client, or confidential 

business information (CBI). Confidential documents are handled in accordance with state law 

and ADEQ policy. Only ADEQ staff are allowed to see documents classified as enforcement 

confidential. Confidential documents shall be maintained separately from other QA documents. 

Only those ADEQ staff, and others, who have been trained and authorized can access CBI files. 

In most cases criminal sanctions exist for unauthorized disclosure of CBI. Nothing in the 

requirements put forward in this QMP shall be construed to supersede any existing requirements 

for handling enforcement sensitive or confidential documents. 

5.4 ROUTINE QUALITY ASSURANCE AND RECORDS MANAGEMENT 

The ADEQ Records Management Process addresses the system employed by the Agency for 

handling documents. This plan outlines the roles and responsibilities for management and staff 

concerning chain of custody procedures and records management. 

ADEQ document control procedures require that documents generated, or obtained, by Agency 

personnel be accounted for when a project is completed. ADEQ’s Records Management System 

dictates the procedures for checking-in and checking-out files for ADEQ staff, external clients, 

and the public. 

For reasons of file integrity, the files must be reviewed in the presence of the Custodian of 

Records or his or her designee. No file can be certified as an original copy if it is reviewed by 

anyone without a staff member from the Custodian of Records being present. The chain of 

custody for all Agency files must be carefully guarded in order to have the greatest degree of 

integrity regarding Agency files. 

ADEQ creates and maintains a unique identification code for each investigation or project. 

ADEQ Records Center is able to use the identification codes, and their cross referencing 

capabilities, to identify the contents and location of the investigation/project files. All custody 

tags, custody records, field notes, or analytical records are labeled with ADEQ generated 

identification codes. Each file is required to have an identification code, date, the Agency 

Project/Case Manager’s initials or signature, and where appropriate the ADEQ Index and PCA to 

indicate the source of the funding for the project. Data packages generated by laboratories which 
33 

are requested by Project/Case Managers, and submitted to the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, 

will be maintained by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit. 

The QA/QC Unit is responsible for maintaining a directory of QA/QC documents within the 

Agency, this includes the QMP, QAPrPs, QAPjPs, FSPs, SAPs, SOPs, and other related QA/QC 

documents. Duplicates of many of these documents are stored electronically within the QA/QC 

Unit. Original QA documents are organized by project or site. These documents, along with 

other records generated, are stored in the applicable Program offices within ADEQ or in the 

Central Records Management Office. The records will be centrally managed via the records 

management system, but physically may reside in the Program files, project file, or in the records 

review area. Regardless of physical location of a file, records and documents associated with a 

given project are the responsibility of the Division Program that has primary responsibility for 

that project. Hard copies of site or project specific information such as sample field sheets, chain 

of custody records, laboratory notes, and instrument/equipment readings shall be maintained in 

the official project file. The ADEQ Project/Case Manager is responsible for assuring that all 

field and analytical identification codes referencing the project are maintained in the project file. 

Correspondence that is material to the project and is generated on the network shall be printed 

and maintained in the applicable project file. 

The ADEQ Director represents the final custodian of that information. Projects involving the 

generation of environmental data shall include, at a minimum, the Quality Assurance Project 

Plan (QAPjPs) and final laboratory reports. For projects not funded by EPA some project 

planning documents other than a QAPjP may be acceptable providing that the objectives are 

clear and the documentation is likely to produce data of known quality and appropriate for its 

intended use. QAPjPs submitted to ADEQ are peer reviewed by the respective Project/Case 

Manager, and approved by designated Program staff. The approval process is based upon 

guidelines set forth by the QA Steering Committee. The process for QAPjP review is spelled out 

in corresponding QA Program Plans. Approved copies, with the approving signatures, are 

retained by the Program’s Project/Case Manager and the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, or his 

or her designee. The QAPjP and the final analytical reports will be stored together, thereby 

allowing a subsequent analyzer (the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor or designated Program 

staff), or investigator, to understand the full context of the data produced and the conclusions 

reached. 

The ADEQ QA/QC Steering Committee, in conjunction with EPA Region IX where appropriate, 

ensures that all Quality Management Plans and Quality Assurance Project Plans are current. 

Should one of these documents become outdated, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor and EPA 

Region IX, in conjunction with the ADEQ Project/Case Manager, shall determine the status of 

the plan and initiate appropriate action. The Division Program and the ADEQ QA/QC Unit 

Supervisor shall be responsible for maintaining copies of ADEQ revised/approved QAPrPs and 

QAPjPs for five years after completion of the project. 

ADEQ management will assure that the objectives of the Records Management Process are 

achieved. These objectives include the following: 

 Prevent the creation of unnecessary records in any media; 
34 

 Promote the continuous development of filing systems and structures that allow 

for the efficient organization, maintenance, and retrieval of records; 

 Ensure that records of continuing value are preserved, but that valueless or noncurrent information is disposed of or transferred to storage in a timely manner in 

accordance with ADEQ and/or ADHS records retention requirements; 

 Ensure that the acquisition and use of all direct paper to microform systems and 

equipment, or electronic digital imaging, are technically feasible, cost-effective, 

and most importantly, satisfy Program needs; 

 Preserve and protect information that is vital to the essential functions or mission 

of the organization. Preserve and protect information that is essential to the legal 

rights and interests of individual citizens and the government. 

 5.5 IN-HOUSE QUALITY ASSURANCE GUIDANCE DOCUMENTS 

Quality guidance documents developed in-house are peer reviewed by ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit and 

the appropriate Divisional Program. Most of the in-house quality guidance documents are 

formatted as SOPs covering specific environmental monitoring activities such as field inspection, 

sample collection/handling, analytical protocols, and data evaluation as mentioned in section 

2.2.6. Also, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit maintains on ADEQ’s website, SOPs for the collection of 

water samples from Arizona public water systems that will be submitted to ADHS certified 

laboratories for analysis of volatile organic compounds (VOCs), synthetic organic compounds 

(SOCs), and inorganic compounds (IOCs). These SOPs have been peer reviewed and approved 

by EPA, and the ADHS State Laboratory, for ADEQ use. 

Other in-house quality assurance guidance documents include policies. The ADEQ QA/QC 

Steering Committee drafts quality assurance and analytical policies to express the Agency’s 

position when interpreting analytical data generated by laboratories using EPA methods which 

may have multiple procedural interpretations. One such Agency wide policy is ADEQ Policy # 

0154.000 Addressing Spikes and matrix effects. 

5.5.1 Requirements for Field Documentation 

Documentation of field activities establishes procedures, identifies written records, enhances and 

facilitates sample tracking, standardizes data entries, and identifies and establishes authenticity 

of the sample data collected. Proper documentation helps to ensure that all essential and required 

information is consistently acquired and preserved. Timely, correct, and complete 

documentation establishes the chain-of-custody, a requirement for data intended to provide 

evidence in court proceedings. Exact procedures vary from Program to Program and are detailed 

within individual Program documents. 

Field records shall be generated and stored as specified in project specific QAPjPs, SOPs, or 

guidance for handling field records. 

5.6 MAINTAINING DOCUMENT INTEGRITY 
35 

Following all required ADEQ documented policies and actions regarding Records Management, 

the file clerk, and all other ADEQ staff, with access to potentially sensitive documents and 

records (i.e., audit reports and performance evaluation reports) will take special care to preserve 

the integrity of these documents. If sensitive documents are to be used at a work station, due 

care will be used in order to maintain the integrity of the data. 
36 

CHAPTER 6 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) AND DATA 

MANAGEMENT 

Data management serves a critical function in both preserving information and making that 

information available. Data management necessarily encompasses a variety of activities related 

to planning environmental monitoring, collecting samples from different media, laboratory and 

in-situ analysis of samples, organizing and storing resulting data, analyzing and interpreting data, 

disseminating data, and communicating the monitoring results and knowledge gained. 

The way ADEQ manages data has evolved substantially in the past decade primarily due to 

Internet availability (e.g., opportunities in electronic government), increased emphasis on 

enterprise architecture, and the need for better security of environmental data. Also, ADEQ 

strives to comply with all EPA standards and regulations, as appropriate, pertaining to hardware, 

software, database system development, and data reporting. 

This section summarizes the department’s information management practices and related 

information technology topics. Additional aspects of project management, such as planning, 

data gathering, and evaluation by ADEQ Programs, are addressed in the QAPrPs or other project 

planning documents as appropriate. 

6.1 MANAGEMENT PRACTICES FOR ENVIRONMENTAL DATA 

An important Agency goal is to continue to improve the way data are generated, compiled, 

stored, and disseminated across each of the ADEQ Divisions (Air, Waste, Water, and 

Administrative Services). The manner data are managed is governed by the Agency mission, 

Program business needs (e.g., permitting, compliance, assessments), and specific data collection 

project/Program objectives. Additional activities that influence data management approaches 

include EPA reporting requirements, quality assurance, cost control, and security. 

Information management systems are typically evaluated for return on investment, risk 

management, and total cost of ownership. This has led ADEQ to adopt an Oracle-based 

enterprise architecture that offers common services and consolidated purchases as a foundation 

for all our major database applications that include, but are not limited to, AZURITE (the 

Agency’s enterprise database application for managing data related to the functions of 

licensing/permitting, inspections, compliance, and remediation), Air Assessment Ambient 

Database (AAAD),Water Quality Database, Safe Drinking Water Information System (SDWIS), 

Surface Water Quality System, Groundwater Quality System, Drywell System, Water Permits 

and Certifications System, Engineering Review System, and Global Positioning System Data 

Post-processing. 

6.1.1 Database Development: 

Data models are employed when developing database systems to serve as a bridge between those 

collecting the data and the information processing systems that support those using the data. 

Data models are basically conceptual schemas that map data relationships, focusing on those 

relations that matter most to the business. ADEQ utilizes a standard System Development 

Lifecycle Methodology for information projects, and a rapid application development method, as 
37 

appropriate. Generally, the methods used include an analysis and documentation of user 

requirements, followed by system design specifications. ADEQ uses the Oracle Designer tool to 

document requirements and system design. ADEQ coding standards are published and 

implemented, ensuring consistency and maintainability of source code. A project team approach 

is utilized, which includes end user involvement throughout the project lifecycle. User 

documentation, including on-line help, is provided with each database system as resources 

permit. 

6.1.1.2 Systems development planning 

The State of Arizona utilizes a standard Information Technology (IT) project planning and 

justification process. The Government Information Technology Agency (GITA) reviews and 

approves Project Investment Justifications (PIJs) for IT projects with a combined developmental 

and infrastructure cost greater than $25,000. PIJ approval must be received before budget 

monies can be allocated to an IT project. The central IT organization works in unison with the 

Program IT specialists to plan, prioritize, and implement Agency IT projects. 

6.1.2 Data Quality and Data Integrity: 

Data integrity and data quality are related in the fact that both are needed to ensure that the data 

are sufficient for their intended use. For the purpose of this document data quality relates to the 

process used to collect, analyze, verify, and validate environmental results. Data integrity relates 

to the input, storage, maintenance, and retrieval of those results. 

6.1.2.1 Data Quality: 

Before environmental data are entered into any database, and released for production, producers 

of the data shall use a standard Quality Assurance procedure to verify that they meet the 

requirements of their intended use. QAPrPs will describe the level of QA/QC necessary for their 

Programs and should include references to how data quality is determined with regards to 

precision, accuracy, representativeness, comparability, completeness and sensitivity. 

Regardless of the data entry method, manual entry or electronic file transfer, data entry personnel 

should verify that the data meet the above criteria prior to input into the database. Questionable 

data may be entered and maintained in a database if they are appropriately documented, 

qualified, or flagged. 

6.1.2.2 Data Integrity: 

The data integrity process begins once the data are ready for input into the databases. Data 

integrity addresses the vulnerability of the system to unauthorized access, data manipulation, 

theft, and environmental damage. 

 

These threats are mitigated by implementing a strong internal database QA/QC process. This 

includes a security process, further detailed in Section 6.8, that recognizes database users through 

logons and assigned database roles. The process begins through ADEQ’s AZURITE database 

that maintains ADEQ’s centralized core data such as: 
38 

 PERSON (Individual users of the database, including tracking information); 

 PLACE (The sites and facilities that ADEQ regulates or tracks); 

 CUSTOMER (individuals, organizations, and businesses that ADEQ regulates or 

interacts with); 

 LTF (Licensing Time Frames). 

 

Daily verification is performed on PLACE, CUSTOMER, and LTF core data to assure that data 

entry standards are followed, that location information is provided, and that a duplicate record 

does not exist before validating a new record as part of ADEQ core data. Any record that is not 

complete, or does not meet data entry standards, will be returned to the originating Program for 

correction, and the use of that data will be restricted until corrected. 

Presenting data in an understandable and useful format is a key component in ensuring data 

integrity. Agency projects will be presented in a way that is suitable for the intended audience. 

The following guidelines are implemented by ADEQ, to the extent applicable, useful, and 

possible in designing effective approaches to Agency projects: 

1. Establish a context for presenting data using one or many of the following 

techniques: displaying data in a geographic context, combining the new data 

source with existing collections of monitored data, or aggregating the data 

collected to demonstrate a trend or ongoing view of the environmental conditions. 

ADEQ will present the data in ways that make that data relevant and useful; 

2. Format data for easy interpretation so data are portrayed with the intended 

message and not misused. ADEQ will make every effort to ensure that data will 

always be presented in a format that is easy to understand and not subject to 

misinterpretation. This includes not separating data from corresponding 

documentation, qualifiers, or flags that may indicate the usability of the data; 

3. Be responsive to the users of the data by staying abreast of changing user needs, 

Agency IT projects are designed to include ways for users to provide feedback on 

the projects. 

Metadata are additional information related to the primary results that are being presented, 

commonly known as data about the data. This supporting information can significantly impact 

the usability of the primary data and should always be considered. Specifically, metadata include 

positional/location data, field measurements, temperatures, quality control data, data qualifiers, 

meteorological data, facility information, and site conditions. The storage of metadata is specific 

to each of the databases maintained at ADEQ. Each database, and the Programs associated with 

the database, are delineated in relevant Program documents and detailed in the Program’s 

QAPrP. It is important to note that metadata often provide substantial information relating to 

environmental results and should not be separated from those results if it changes the meaning, 

or usability, of the data in any way. 
39 

Audits and Testing are required for all databases and systems. All IT projects involving 

development of systems for tracking of environmental data will be thoroughly tested to ensure 

that they meet the requirements in the written functional specifications. Independent audits of 

these systems will be conducted by the QA/QC Unit. The central IT organization has a test 

server environment that is in place, and is utilized regularly to test Agency applications prior to 

being released into production. 

6.1.3 Establishing back up and archiving procedures: 

Department Programs will coordinate with the Office of Information and Technology to establish 

standard procedures for data backup and archiving, system failure, and recovery. Data sets will 

be archived to provide a historical record of data over the lifetime of the project. Current 

procedures involve daily full or incremental backups of all critical Agency data that are stored on 

site at ADEQ. Weekly and monthly back up of all critical data are kept in perpetuity and stored 

off site at ADEQ’s Disaster Recovery location in Tucson. Should a catastrophic event occur that 

renders our Phoenix computer equipment unusable; ADEQ will be able to operate using the 

equipment and data located in Tucson. 

6.2 INFORMATION MANAGEMENT PLAN 

ADEQ has an information management plan that documents its approach to data collection, 

storage, retrieval, delivery, and communication. ADEQ also has procedures for data quality 

control and security, which may be incorporated, as appropriate, into QAPrPs. 

The information management plan includes the following elements: 

 Data Owners Data are owned by the Programs. This information plan 

provides the primary contact information of the individual and Program that has 

overall information management responsibility and authority for Agency IT 

projects; 

 Description of the Data Flow Process The plan explains the key points in the 

information data flow and collection process. This can be illustrated by a flow 

chart, or diagram, depicting key information components; 

 Description of the Data Collection Methods The plan summarizes data 

measurement and collection methods. It also describes any emerging 

measurement technologies used, and/or how existing systems of environmental 

monitoring will be augmented/up-graded to provide the proposed data; 

 Description of the Data Storage and Retrieval System ADEQ’s standard 

relational database platform is Oracle. ADEQ utilizes Oracle tools, including 

Designer and Developer, for application development. ADEQ also uses 

Microsoft Project for planning and tracking projects to completion. The plan 

describes the hardware and software technologies that will be used for data 

management and processing systems. It specifies the components of the project 

architecture and also describes the archival components or storage requirements. 

The plan addresses data management responsibilities among stakeholders and 
40 

contractors to ensure data documentation and data standardization. 

6.3 ELECTRONIC DATA INTERCHANGE (EDI) AND NODE 

Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) collects and manages compliance, 

measurement, and statistical data for a number of environmental Programs within the State of 

Arizona. The data are managed and reported both internally and externally to other state and 

federal agencies. Typically, the electronic data interchange (EDI) is performed using rigid data 

formats that are difficult to maintain and managed using proprietary methods. The rigidity and 

closed nature of the interchange make it very difficult to add new data formats, communicate 

with new data partners, or improve the overall process. The purpose of ADEQ’s Node is to 

eliminate the proprietary exchange formats and more easily facilitate the exchange of 

information between the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), and other participating 

organizations, by developing a Web Service based gateway that supports the EPA XML message 

formats. ADEQ currently has a fully compliant production Node, and has successfully 

exchanged data with EPA's Facility Registry System. Additional data flows are planned to 

exchange data with EPA's RCRA Info and AQS systems. In addition, the Node can be used 

internally and for non-EPA partner exchanges. 

6.4 LEVELS OF DOCUMENTATION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL PROJECTS 

Documentation is important because it helps users make informed decisions regarding the use of 

environmental data, provides consistency and IT project memory over time, and allows the data 

to be shared and used for a variety of purposes and in a variety of computing environments. 

ADEQ has developed the following four kinds of documentation requirements for environmental 

IT project data systems: 

1. Data System Documentation: Documents critical information about the IT 

project, including project purpose and scope, user requirements, IT PIJ, and the 

IT project plan; 

2. Data Set Documentation: Provides clear information about what data are 

collected and how to access and use them; 

3. Data Element Documentation: Provides full definitions and specifications for 

each element collected and maintained in a data set; 

4. Database System Documentation: Describes electronic and hard copy 

documentation of system design and implementation. 

6.5 COMPUTER HARDWARE/SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 

ADEQ managers and staff will comply with all ADEQ hardware and software standards, which 

are maintained by the Office of Information and Technology. These standards address 

compatibility, hardware, operating systems, communication, database management, user and 

printer interface, application development, and applications. 
41 

ADEQ will procure hardware and software that conforms to Agency wide and EPA information 

management architecture. In some cases, ADEQ will procure and configure hardware, or 

develop application software through vendors that are not on the statewide contract. All such 

purchases will be evaluated to ensure that they comply with ADEQ standards as outlined in the 

Agency’s software and hardware standards. Prior to any purchases, ADEQ’s Chief Information 

Officer, or designee, will evaluate software and hardware to determine their performance 

capabilities, impact of implementation upon ADEQ, and its compatibility with EPA reporting 

requirements. 

6.6 SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT 

All ADEQ system development, enhancement, and modernization efforts will comply with 

Agency standards. The standards include a systematic and comprehensive dialogue between the 

data providers, data/system users, and system developers. The majority of the dialogue occurs 

prior to the design of the system in order to ensure extensive and successful user participation, 

and a systematic approach to the design. Systems will be designed and built to integrate with 

core Agency data in such a manner that re-use of code, and its associated cost savings, is 

maximized. 

All software systems shall be operated and maintained in accordance with written specifications 

and/or the owner’s manual. All software systems will be subjected to acceptance testing by end 

users prior to being placed into a production environment. 

For the proper implementation and maintenance of the technology infrastructure, ADEQ’s Office 

of Information and Technology: 

 Maintains an inventory of the computer system(s) hardware and written operating 

procedures for routine maintenance operations; 

 Documents data management systems in use, including functional and design 

specifications and requirements; 

 Maintains Standard Operating Procedures which describe routine operation, 

maintenance, and testing to ensure that both the hardware and software in use are 

accurately performing their intended functions. 

These documents will be readily available in the areas where these procedures will be performed. 

Changes in any part of the operating procedures shall be properly authorized, reviewed, and 

accepted in writing by the designated responsible person. 

6.7 DATA STANDARDS 

To take full advantage of both ADEQ’s and EPA’s growing technology, data standards, and 

resources, there must be an increased emphasis on improving the compatibility of data among 

computer systems. In addition to the policies and standards contained in the CFR, federal data 

policies and standards that are currently followed, including those which ADEQ is attempting to 

implement, include: 
42 

 Chemical Abstract Service Registry Number Data Standard, EPA Order 2180.1, 

June 26, 1987; 

 Data Standards for the Electronic Transmission of Laboratory Measurement 

Results, EPA Order 2180.2, December 10, 1987; 

 The Minimum Set of Data Elements for Ground Water Quality, Policy Order 

74500.IA, September 11, 1989; 

 Facility Identification Data Standard, U.S. EPA Office of Administration and 

Resources Management, Information Management and Services Division, April 9, 

1990. 

 Policy on Electronic Reporting, U.S. EPA Office of Administration and 

Resources Management, July 30, 1990; 

 Site Location Identification Policy and Responsibilities, Region III, Order 5361.5, 

September 14, 1988; 

 ADEQ Locational Data Policy, 0034.001 (see Appendix J); 

 Locational Data Policy, IRM Policy Manual, Chapter 13, April 1991; and 

 Locational Data Policy Implementation Guidance- Guide to the Policy, U.S. EPA 

Office of Information and Resources Management, March, 1992. 

 Cross Media Electronic Reporting, Final Rule, October 13, 2005. 

6.8 INFORMATION SECURITY 

It is important that ADEQ information resources are protected from potential loss and misuse 

from a variety of accidental and deliberate causes. Failure to adequately protect database 

systems can affect the integrity of data, privacy of data sources, availability of data for use (e.g., 

for legal and enforcement purposes), and the very existence of data. ADEQ utilizes the 

following security procedures and protocols: 

 Network Operating Systems use log-in and password controls; 

 Internal rights to Agency data are granted by local management for their 

employees; 

 Maintaining a “chain-of-custody” for any data value created or changed in a 

database; 

 A firewall security system for Internet usage; 

 Remote access controls for employees and third parties include the use of log-in 

and password protection; 

 All UNIX, NetWare, and Remote Access Operating Systems comply with DOD 

C2 security standards; 

 The main computer room is physically secured to limit access to only critical IT 

personnel. 
43 

CHAPTER 7 PLANNING 

A primary goal of ADEQ’s Quality Management System is to promote effective planning for the 

collection, analyses, and processing of environmental data. Quality planning must occur at three 

levels to ensure that such data meet ADEQ’s programmatic quality goals. The three levels are: 

 Agency wide Requirements; 

 Program Specific Requirements; 

 Project Level Requirements. 

7.1 AGENCYWIDE PLANNING 

7.1.1 Internal Strategic Planning 

The ADEQ Strategic Plan is the foundation upon which all Programmatic priorities, and 

corresponding environmentally related data collection and use activities, are based. Using the 

projected annual budget for ADEQ from the various funding sources including EPA and the 

State of Arizona, ADEQ’s Director and senior managers meet each fiscal year to discuss and set 

ADEQ priorities. These priorities are then reflected in ADEQ’s Strategic Planning process, 

which establishes overall goals, direction, resource utilization, policies, and budget allocations. 

Yearly action plans, developed by each ADEQ Division, are tied to ADEQ’s Strategic Plan and 

budget allocation process. Action plans further specify the types of environmentally-related data 

generation activities that will occur. The yearly action plans also delineate what decisions they 

are designed to support and the corresponding requirements for quality assurance and quality 

control procedures. 

7.1.2 Eternal Strategic Planning 

Close coordination and planning across organizations is essential to ensure that data are of 

sufficient quality to support decision-makers, or otherwise meet their intended use. Data Quality 

Objectives (DQOs) and other planning tools can be shared across Programs sites and 

governmental agencies, and private organizations, where appropriate. 

7.1.3 External Data Coordination 

Once the data have been collected, ADEQ must also coordinate the use of environmentally 

related data across numerous government agencies, academic, and private organizations. ADEQ 

encourages data sharing whenever possible. However, data sharing is only done when adequate 

data quality indicators (DQIs) are available so that the quality of data is sufficiently known to 

support the applicable decision(s). 
44 

7.2 PROGRAM-SPECIFIC PLANNING 

ADEQ Programs are functional areas of work authorized by Statutory reference (e.g., National 

Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS)or Drinking Water Program) or by Agency direction 

(e.g. the Voluntary Remediation Program). Any of ADEQ’s environmental Programs which 

generate environmental data are covered by the QMP, though it is acknowledged that not every 

Program or project requires the same level of quality assurance. Generally, Program managers 

(their grades and titles vary by Division) are responsible for Program level planning, which 

includes the responsibility to ensure that there is agreement between the customer and the data 

supplier as to expected data quality. 

Establishing Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) when initiating a new project, or incorporating 

major statutory changes, is a mandatory component of the ADEQ Quality Management System. 

The EPA Quality Assurance Division guidance document, Guidance for the Data Quality 

Objectives Process, EPA QA/G-4 is available to assist users in developing these objectives, as 

are other resources within the ADEQ QA/QC Unit when the formal DQO processes is necessary. 

Predetermined DQO’s based on regulatory criteria and action levels within similar Programs are 

often available, and thus a formal DQO process is not necessary. DQOs at the project level may 

address sources of error (i.e., sampling design and site variability) that will accumulate and affect 

the interpretation of data for status and trends. Program-level DQOs have the ability to meet 

Division Program objectives. Data Quality Objectives are also used as performance criteria for 

assessments of data quality for their adequacy in determining status and trends. 

It is critical to consider the QMP during the planning process when modifying existing, or 

designing new, Programs. Although the QMP outlines the minimum QA requirements for 

ADEQ, it is likely that most of the Programs covered by the QMP will need more QA specificity 

when implementing their Programs. In these cases, supplemental QA components and 

procedures are developed and described by the Program. If requested, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit 

will serve as technical advisors in the development of these components and procedures. All 

Programs covered by the QMP should review their programmatic requirements each year to 

determine if the QMP adequately covers their QA needs, and if not, incorporate supplemental 

procedures into the Program Plans 

7.3 PROJECT-LEVEL PLANNING 

A project is an organized set of activities within a Program. The Quality Assurance Project Plan 

(QAPjP) is the primary vehicle for ensuring that there is adequate data quality at the project level 

(see Chapter 2, Section 2.2 for a more complete discussion of the QAPjP development and 

review process.) The ADEQ QMP refers to QA activities as a well-defined component of any 

project plan involving the collection or use of environmental data. 

The key to good quality planning at this level is to link the data collection, or analyses, to be 

performed directly to the environmental decision to be made. This is essential so that ADEQ 

does not collect mounds of data for which there is no purpose. Achieving this key component 

requires dialogue between the decision maker, contractor, and the data supplier. Again, the EPA 
45 

Quality Assurance Division (QAD) document EPA QA/G-4, Guidance for the Data Quality 

Objective Process March, 2006, as well as resources within the ADEQ QA/QC Unit, can be 

invaluable in establishing the desired data certainty requirements based on the decision to be 

made. The use of statistical methods to quantify data acceptability measures is highly 

recommended. Members of the QA Team in EPA Region IX can provide assistance with 

statistical applications. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit can assist ADEQ Programs by providing the 

appropriate references. 

Planning documentation identifies ADEQ’s personnel responsible for ensuring that all 

components of a QAPjP are addressed appropriately. Project/Case Managers will normally be 

responsible for the development of these QA components, which will adhere to the requirements 

of EPA QA/R-5, EPA Requirements for QA Project Plans. March, 2001. QAPjPs are reviewed 

to ensure that all the required EPA and ADEQ elements are appropriately addressed. The review 

process is conducted by the Division QA Representative, or appropriate designee, and must be 

approved by appropriate delegated autonomous Division personnel or by the QA/QC Unit. 

When initiating a site-specific project, a preliminary plan is developed for accomplishing the 

required work. Through this process, specific individuals are made accountable for different 

aspects of the investigation. 

The ADEQ planning process considerations include:

 Identifying the regulations involved; 

 Defining the forensic requirements of the regulations; 

 Defining DQOs 

 Defining MQOs 

 Structuring communication between all the parties involved in the project; 

 Defining the scope of the project to meet enforcement objectives; 

 Identifying and scheduling activities; 

 Identifying resources needed; 

 Identifying health and safety issues; 

 Questioning the validity of scientific models and methods proposed for use. 

7.3.1 On-Site Monitoring 

The determination to use on-site monitoring, and the specific type of monitoring to be conducted, 

is based upon the project objectives as defined by the QAPjP. Field screening information, 

combined with statistics, can be used to define the number and type of samples needed to meet 

the project objectives. 

Monitoring for personal protection may include using a specific instrument to screen the work 

area to determine the appropriate level of personal protection needed. These instruments can 

also be used for continuous monitoring while work is being performed. 
46 

Quality control indicators used in on-site monitoring depend on the applicable regulations, the 

type of equipment, the nature of the materials monitored, and the monitoring objectives. Quality 

control parameters such as blanks, blank spikes, matrix spikes, field duplicates, surrogates, and 

calibration curve data (all QC parameters as they apply) shall be documented. 

7.3.2 Sampling Events 

The sampling activity shall be focused toward meeting the regulatory, technical, and analytical 

requirements defined during the planning phase. ADEQ sample collection activities are 

designed to answer questions such as: 

 How do the media compare to a regulatory threshold? 

 How do the media compare to other site media? 

 Is a specific component or condition present? 

 Are there trends or hot spots? 

The sampling activity requires: 

 Coordinating field activities with laboratory activities; 

 Maintaining sample integrity; 

 Focusing on regulatory and Agency defined data quality requirements. 

7.3.2.1 Sample Scheduling 

Communication with the laboratory prior to sampling is critical in achieving the stated Data 

Quality Objectives. Some sample events are unique and one time events, while others are 

routine and ongoing. Regardless, all laboratory sample scheduling events need to be coordinated 

with the laboratories, at a minimum, several days prior to sampling. Communications should 

include, time frames, methods, matrix types, required detection limits, and where appropriate, the 

purpose for testing to ensure the requirements of Federal or State statutes under which ADEQ 

intends to regulate are fulfilled. The QA/QC Unit can facilitate finding appropriate laboratories, 

ensuring that DQOs and MQOs can be met, and that the laboratory meet minimum ADEQ 

Quality Control requirements. 

7.4 ANALYTICAL REQUIREMENTS 

Analysis involves the characterization of samples based on chemical and/or physical properties. 

Analyses result in generating raw data from either instrumental analysis, chemical analysis, or 

physical testing. The analytical methods used will be specific, sensitive enough to answer the 

question posed by the Program objectives, and meet the data quality goals associated with those 

objectives. 
47 

Measurement Quality Objectives (MQOs) are the project or program QC criteria defined for 

various Data Quality Indicators (DQIs). During the planning phase, these set pre-determined 

limits on the acceptability of the data in regards to accuracy /bias, and precision, completeness 

and sensitivity. 

ADEQ Project/Case Managers may consult with the ADEQ QA/QC Unit, or research a variety 

of published or written materials, to aid them in selecting or developing measurement 

technologies. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit shall maintain a file of in-house procedures and practices 

used in the measurement process. Data Quality Objectives (DQOs), and ADEQ QA/QC Unit’s 

professional knowledge, are used to identify appropriate analytical procedures. 

DQI’s, as defined by EPA involve precision, accuracy, representativeness, completeness, 

comparability, and sensitivity, also known as “PARCC” parameters. It is expected that these 

indicators be used in data evaluation, but in general, the criteria by which DQIs are evaluated are 

based on project data quality needs, ie, the MQOs.. The extent to which theses indicators will be 

utilized should be provided in a Program’s QAPrP. The extent to which program or project QC 

results meets MQOs determines whether data are acceptable for the intended use. 

7.5 DATA TRANSLATION 

Data translation involves translating raw data into useable information which can include 

qualitative identifications, quantitative determinations, and/or statements of condition. This 

process can include arithmetic calculations, and/or statistical evaluations, of results from a 

sample or collection of samples. 

7.6 DATA INTERPRETATION 

The ADEQ Project/Case Manager will attempt to use sample data to form an opinion about the 

characteristics of a data set. The ADEQ Project/Case Manager will use quality control 

information to support conclusions or to identify limitations of the data. The ADEQ QA/QC 

Unit will be available to assist the ADEQ Project/Case Manager in assessing QC data when 

actions have regulatory implications. For compliance testing, the acceptable data (ie, data that 

meets the MQOs) will define the characteristics of the data set that will then be compared to 

regulatory requirements to determine compliance. 

7.7 HEALTH AND SAFETY 

Health and safety are an integral part of the ADEQ Quality Management System, because the 

management philosophy is that a safe workplace is essential for the long term success of the 

Quality Management System. ADEQ Management, with the assistance of the ADEQ Health and 

Safety Committee, has developed policies and procedures focused toward a safe working 

environment, and developed a Program that is adequate to protect the health and safety of ADEQ 

staff. The ADEQ Health and Safety procedures implement applicable EPA and Office of Safety 

and Health Administration regulations. The ADEQ Safety Committee conducts or contracts for 

specialized training Programs to meet the safety needs of ADEQ measurement activities. 
48 

The ADEQ Health and Safety Environmental Management Program is the mechanism which 

ensures that appropriate issues are considered prior to the initiation of measurement activities. 

The ADEQ Health and Safety Environmental Management Program includes the following three 

key elements: 

1. Training - Includes field and laboratory safety, first aid and CPR, supervisory 

safety, hazardous waste, and other pertinent training; 

2. Audits, Inspections, Investigations, and Hazard Control - Includes planning 

reviews, associated reporting, and record keeping to identify, prevent, and/or 

abate health and safety problems; 

3. Occupational Medical Monitoring - Includes medical monitoring of staff who 

may be exposed to chemical, biological, radiological, or other agents, or who may 

experience physical stress during their work. 
49 

CHAPTER 8 IMPLEMENTATION OF QUALITY ASSURANCE 

WORK PROCESSES 

This Chapter of the QMP describes the processes used at ADEQ for facilitating the effective 

implementation of QA plans and procedures which comprise ADEQ’s Quality System. Any 

changes to the QMP will be documented in revisions and will receive, at least, Agency Director 

level approval. As with the QA planning described in Chapter 7, implementation of QA 

procedures takes place at the Agency, Program, and project levels. 

8.1 AGENCYWIDE IMPLEMENTATION 

ADEQ utilizes a tiered approach to ensure that environmental data are of sufficient quantity, and 

quality, for their intended purpose. Any revisions to the QMP will be processed in the same 

manner as was the original document. QMP revisions will be drafted by the ADEQ QA/QC 

Unit, and submitted to the QA/QC Steering Committee for comment, with final approval by 

ADEQ’s Leadership Team. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, teamed with the QA/QC 

Steering Committee, will provide general oversight of implementation of the ADEQ Quality 

Management System and identify needs for revisions to the QMP. The ADEQ Programs will 

provide technical oversight for implementing environmental data operations through the 

development of Quality Assurance Program Plans (QAPrPs). 

8.1.1 Divisional Quality Assurance Program Plans

QAPrPs will be developed within the individual Programs. When requested, ADEQ’s QA/QC 

Unit will assist in development and implementation of environmental data operations according 

to approved planning documents. Additionally, each QAPrP needs to identify those specific 

activities that will ensure the generation of quality data by: 

 Defining commonalities in operations, methods, and procedures used throughout 

the Program; 

 Covering elements of Program management, data generation and acquisition, 

assessment and oversight, and data validation and usability; 

 Describing the level or degree of the Program quality system, and the different 

types of QA documents used by the Program, focusing on those elements that are 

not time or site specific; 

 Identifying those responsible and describing the procedures for Program QA 

document preparation, review, and approval; 

 Discussing data quality objectives including the identification of Program wide 

technical or regulatory criteria; 

 Attaching reference and supporting documents used throughout the Program, such 

as SOPs and regulatory lists. 

Each ADEQ QAPrP should be reviewed on an annual basis, and at minimum, revised every five 

years or when significant changes in the business operation occur, to ensure that the plans 
50 

accurately reflect how business within the Program is conducted. It is essential that the 

workflow outlined in the QAPrP is consistent with actual business conducted. The Programs 

will provide a copy of their QAPrP to the QA/QC Unit and also to EPA Region IX for EPA 

Funded programs, for approval, general oversight, and management of the Agency wide Quality 

System. 

8.2 PROGRAM LEVEL IMPLEMENTATION 

8.2.1 Operating Policies and Procedures 

Any ADEQ Program which generates, or uses, environmental data will document its QA policies 

and procedures, and will develop and/or use appropriate policy and procedure manuals for its 

Programs. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit will provide support and oversight in the generation of such 

documents. The EPA Quality Staff issues documents to provide information on satisfying 

Federal Regulations, for example, Guidance for Preparing Standard Operating Procedures, 

March, 2001 (QA-G6), this document should be referenced by ADEQ Programs when 

developing procedure manuals for administrative and technical QA operations. Implementation 

of these procedures will enable Program personnel to gain and document procedural knowledge 

about their operations, and will also serve as a training guide for new staff members. 

The ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor will work with the ADEQ Programs to ensure that 

operational QA policies and procedures developed by the Programs are consistent with the 

ADEQ QMP. This responsibility includes defining procedures for appropriate routine, 

standardized, special, or critical operations, including the policies and procedures that address, 

but are not limited to: 

 The identification of operations needing standardized procedures; 

 The process for preparation of procedures, including form, content, and 

applicability; 

 Determination of SOP adequacy, and consequent review and approval. 

Any QA procedure manuals developed by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit will be made available to all 

personnel involved in Program implementation. If implementation of the Program is delegated 

or outsourced, these QA procedural manuals will be referenced in the Task/Work Assignment, 

Task/Delivery Order, or similar document consistent with the ADEQ Procurement process. A 

Program using data generated by external sources must develop criteria and a process by which 

to evaluate the acceptability of the data supplied. The data quality assessment process described 

in Chapter 9.4 can be useful here. 

8.3 PROJECT LEVEL IMPLEMENTATION 

8.3.1 Quality Assurance Project Plan Implementation 

All environmental data operations will be implemented in accordance with an approved QAPjP 

or QAPrP. The ADEQ Project/Case Manager should include identifiable QA milestones, and 
51 

target dates, in the project timeline so that progress and completion of QA and QC activities can 

be effectively tracked. Any changes to the QAPjP will be documented as soon as possible in 

writing with an amendment to the QAPjP. Amendments will be reviewed and approved by the 

ADEQ Project/Case Manager. It is critical to have a quick and efficient system for any QAPjP 

changes so the plan can be accurately used for its intended purpose, as a reference and guide 

throughout the project. 

8.3.2 Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs) 

Many repetitive procedures that are routinely used can be standardized and documented in 

writing as SOPs. SOPs can be prepared for routinely conducted sampling, analytical, and quality 

control procedures. Once established, the SOPs can be cited in the QAPjPs, contract proposals, 

grant agreements, and other similar documents, thus saving time and paper by avoiding the need 

to write out the specific procedures in each document. ADEQ SOPs relating to QA shall be 

maintained by the appropriate Program office with technical support provided by the QA/QC 

Unit, as appropriate. SOPs common to Programs can be found as attachments with URLs to their 

corresponding QAPrP. Tasks or functions that may be effectively addressed within a SOP 

include: 

 Sampling network design; 

 Sampling site selection; 

 Sampling and analytical procedures; 

 Sample collection methods and devices, containers, preservatives, holding times, 

handling and transportation methods; 

 Documentation and chain-of-custody procedures; 

 Calibration and maintenance of instruments and equipment; 

 Quality control procedures; 

 Data review, reduction, and validation; 

 Safety procedures; 

 Inspection and audit procedures. 

ADEQ has established the following policies, procedures, and/or guidance for sample collection 

and analytical techniques. These procedures, where relevant, apply to all analytical data being 

generated for use by ADEQ. These procedures should be followed unless special exceptions 

have been requested and approved, and/or deviations are outlined in a Program’s QAPrP. These 

documents can be found in their entirety as attachments to this QMP. 

 ADEQ Temperature/Preservation Guidance Policy; 

 Substantive Policy 0154 Addressing Spike And Surrogate Recovery As They 

Relate To Matrix Effects In Water, Air, Sludge And Soil Matrices Policy; 

 Substantive Policy 0170 Implementation Of EPA Method 5035 - Soil Preparation 

For EPA Method 8015B, 8021B and 8260B; 
52 

 Arizona Data Qualifiers. 

The Arizona Data Qualifiers are revised periodically with the consensus of the Arizona 

Environmental Laboratory Advisory Committee (ELAC). The most up to date version should be 

used when applying qualifiers to data and can be found on the ADHS and ADEQ websites. 
53 

CHAPTER 9 QUALITY ASSESSMENT AND RESPONSE 

This Chapter of the QMP describes how ADEQ will assess the effectiveness of its Quality 

Management System. ADEQ will use a variety of internal management and technical reviews, 

performance evaluations, and QA audits to ensure that the procedures in this QMP are 

implemented successfully. ADEQ will also utilize, as needed, independent reviews of the 

systems and procedures described in ADEQ’s QMP by personnel from the EPA Region IX 

Quality Assurance Office. This chapter will also describe ADEQ’s commitment to using the 

results of these evaluations to make any necessary operational adjustments to ADEQ’s data 

collection and analytical procedures, as well as to other aspects of the Quality Management 

System. 

9.1 ANNUAL REVIEW OF THE QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLAN 

The QA practices and procedures described in the QMP will be assessed annually, and revised or 

updated by October 1 of each year by the ADEQ QA Steering Committee. As an integral part of 

the QA Steering Committee, ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit Supervisor is responsible for coordinating 

this assessment, arranging meetings of the QA Steering Committee to assist with the review, and 

for incorporating any recommended changes into the QMP. Minor changes in the QMP 

proposed by the ADEQ Programs should be submitted in writing to the ADEQ QA/QC Unit 

Supervisor by June 30th of each year. After approval by the QA/QC Steering committee, the 

QMP will be turned over to the Leadership Team for updated signatures. A copy, for record 

keeping, will be sent to EPA Region IX. 

A major rewrite will take place every five years with approvals needed by ADEQ’s QA/QC 

Steering Committee, ADEQ’s Leadership Team, and final approval by EPA Region IX. 

9.2 QUALITY AUDITS 

ADEQ employs several QA assessment tools designed to provide a better understanding of the 

components of, and basis for improving, the ADEQ Quality Management System. Internal 

(programmatic) and External QA audits are one of the principal tools for determining the 

effectiveness of the ADEQ QA/QC components. QA audit frequency and scheduling will vary 

with the type of review conducted. Specifics of frequency and type of review will be outlined in 

the individual Program QAPrPs. The following is a description of some of the evaluation tools: 

9.2.1 Management System Reviews (MSRs) 

An MSR is an independent assessment of a Program’s QA management practices and data 

collection procedures, and is generally performed by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit with oversight 

privileges from the QA Steering Committee. The MSR will qualitatively assess a Program to 

determine if the ADEQ Quality Management System is adequate to ensure the quality of the 

Program’s data. MSRs address the effectiveness of management controls in achieving and 

assuring data quality, the adequacy of resources and personnel devoted to QA functions, the 

effectiveness of training and assessments, and the applicability of data quality requirements. 
54 

While MSRs can identify significant QA concerns and areas of needed improvement, they also 

point out noteworthy accomplishments. 

ADEQ Program MSRs are generally conducted by an external party (typically the ADEQ 

QA/QC Unit) and focus on the Program's adherence to the approved Agency QMP, its Quality 

Assurance Program Plan, as well as the implementation of QA practices within a single Program 

area. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit will attempt to conduct an MSR for every major Agency Program 

(including the Northern and Southern Regional Offices) once every four years. The ADEQ 

QA/QC Unit’s MSRs focus on the overall structure and procedures for accomplishing the QA 

Program. 

Most MSRs will examine the following elements: 

 An assessment of the overall effectiveness of the QA management system, as 

measured by its adherence to the approved QMP; 

 Procedures for developing Data Quality Objectives (DQOs); 

 Procedures for developing and approving QAPrPs and QAPjPs; 

 The effectiveness of existing QAPrP guidance and QAPjPs; 

 Procedures for developing and approving SOPs; 

 Procedures, criteria, and schedules for conducting QA audits; 

 Tracking systems for assuring that the QA Program is operating effectively, and 

that corrective actions disclosed by QA audits have been taken; 

 Responsibilities and authorities of various line managers, and QA personnel, for 

implementing the QA Program; 

 The degree of management support; 

 The level of financial and other resources committed to implementing the QA 

Program. 

MSRs performed or arranged by the ADEQ QA/QC Unit will be conducted in accordance with 

the Guidance on Assessing Quality Systems, March, 2003, EPA QA/G-3. ADEQ may also make 

occasional use of independent, outside reviews of its quality assurance practices. When electing 

to use an outside source, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit Supervisor, in consultation with the QA 

Steering Committee and Division Director, will make arrangements for such a review by 

selecting an appropriate team of qualified reviewers (e.g. EPA Region IX). The goals and 

objectives of this type of review will be the same as if the assessment were conducted internally. 

EPA QA Office has the authority and may, from time to time, audit ADEQ’s Quality System as 

part of its oversight responsibilities. 

All MSRs will result in the production of a written report. A draft of this report is due within 30 

days of the completion of the observation phase of the audit. The draft will be sent for 

comments to the Program’s senior management. Comments must be supplied by the Program’s 
55 

senior management within 30 days of the receipt of the draft. Final reports are to be completed 

within 30 days of receipt of comments by the Program’s senior management 

9.2.1.1 Review ADEQ Quality Assurance Programs 

ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit, with oversight privileges from the QA Steering Committee, will conduct 

internal assessments of the individual ADEQ Quality Assurance Programs as described in the 

Agency QMP. All major data generating Programs within ADEQ will be reviewed every four 

years. These Programs include those listed in Chapter 1 of this document. These reviews will be 

authorized by the ADEQ Director and the results of the evaluations will be transmitted to the 

ADEQ Division Director, in a written memorandum, from the ADEQ QA Steering Committee. 

The reviews are intended to accomplish the following objectives: 

 Identify any data quality problems; 

 Identify benchmark practices that could be used in other Agency Programs; 

 Propose recommendations for resolving quality problems; 

 Confirm implementation and effectiveness of any recommended corrective 

actions. 

The reviewed Program will have 30 days to prepare a written response to the reviewer’s 

memorandum. If the evaluation report recommends corrective actions, the reviewed Program 

should address these recommendations and include a schedule for making any appropriate 

changes in its quality assurance procedures. These reviews will be used by the ADEQ 

Leadership team to gauge the effectiveness of the Agency QMP and of the Programs’ approaches 

to data quality management. 

9.2.2 Technical Systems Audits (TSAs) 

A Technical Systems Audit is conducted to assess the sampling and analytical quality control 

procedures used to generate environmental data. The ADEQ QA/QC Unit with oversight 

privileges from the QA Steering Committee will use TSAs to evaluate laboratory and field 

procedures used by EPA, state personnel, and contractors. TSAs entail a comprehensive, on-site 

evaluation of the field equipment; sampling and analyses procedures; documentation; data 

validation; and training procedures for collecting or processing environmental data. 

TSAs may be routinely planned by ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit, specifically requested by ADEQ’s 

Project/Case Manager, or result from the findings of another audit or review. ADEQ’s QA/QC 

Unit Supervisor is responsible for assembling the audit team. Results will be reported to the 

audited organization in the form of a written report within 14 calendar days of the completion of 

the audit, or a mutually agreed upon alternative. Written comments by ADEQ’s Project/Case 

Manager must be supplied to ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit within 14 calendar days of receipt of the 

audit findings, or a mutually agreed upon alternative. Copies of the TSA Audit Final Report will 

be stored in the project file and also with the ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit. Additional copies will be 

distributed as appropriate. 

Both laboratory and field TSAs may be performed. 
56 

9.2.2.1 Laboratory TSAs 

TSAs will be conducted on the Arizona Department of Health Services State Laboratory, ADEQ 

contract laboratories, and contract laboratories of consultants and contractors who submit 

analytical data to ADEQ. TSAs may be conducted on other Federal agency laboratories that 

perform sample analysis under Interagency Agreements with ADEQ. The primary goals of 

TSAs will be to review the laboratory organization, operation, and capabilities; determine the 

reliability of data; and note corrective action for any apparent deficiencies. Auditors for TSAs 

will be selected by the ADEQ QA Steering Committee based on their technical proficiency in the 

subject area. The designated auditors will be responsible for planning and conducting the audit, 

and reporting the findings to the laboratory manager and to the ADEQ QA Steering Committee. 

9.2.2.2 Field TSAs 

Oversight of field operations is an important part of the quality assurance process, and the ADEQ 

QA/QC Unit, with oversight privileges from the QA Steering Committee, will conduct QA 

audits of field sampling activities, both for its own field operations, and on those contractors and 

other federal agencies that collect samples for Programs sponsored by EPA. ADEQ will specify 

frequency and procedures for conducting field TSAs within specific Program areas. When 

QAPjPs are reviewed, and also during any MSRs or other QA audits, the ADEQ QA/QC Unit 

Supervisor will determine the necessity of field TSAs. 

9.3 PERFORMANCE EVALUATIONS 

Performance Evaluations (PEs) Samples are used to assess the ability of a laboratory, or field 

measurement system, to provide reliable data. PEs samples will be considered for laboratories 

providing analytical services, directly or indirectly, for ADEQ and will be traceable, whenever 

possible, through the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). The evaluation 

consists of providing a reference, "blind" or “double blind” sample, to the laboratory for analysis. 

A PE sample contains known concentrations of chemical constituents, or pollutants, of interest 

and will normally be in the appropriate media (e.g., soil, water, air). The analytical results 

obtained by the laboratory are compared to the known concentrations of the chemical 

constituents contained in the PE sample(s), as a means of determining if the laboratory 

demonstrated its ability to properly identify, and quantify, pollutants within established, or 

calculated, control limits. 

PE samples will be scheduled at a frequency specified by Program requirements, or on an asneeded basis depending on the laboratory and Program involved. Some national Programs, such 

as the Public Water Supply Supervision (PWSS) and National Pollutant Discharge Elimination 

System (NPDES) Programs, have regularly-scheduled PE studies in which participation is 

mandatory for designated laboratories. For the PWSS Program, PE evaluations are required 

twice a year for all laboratories who wish to be certified for drinking water analysis. In addition, 

PE samples of specific parameters may be obtained from the appropriate EPA Office of Research 

Development laboratory or prepared commercially. 
57 

All PE studies performed for ADEQ, whether required on a regular basis or performed on a one 

time basis, will be coordinated through or requested from the ADEQ QA/QC Unit or designee. 

For external projects requiring PEs, the Task/Work Assignment, Task/Delivery Order, or similar 

document needs to outline the specific details of the Performance Evaluation so the associated 

costs can be included in the contractor proposal. The results of PEs provide a means for 

assessing overall data integrity, and may be used as criteria for selecting candidates for on-site 

evaluations. 

9.4 DATA QUALITY EVALUATIONS 

Data quality requirements and evaluation methods are addressed in the ADEQ QMP and also in 

specific QAPjPs. The QMP describes the methods by which data quality evaluations will be 

conducted and utilized, and how these evaluations relate to Data Quality Objectives. 

9.4.1 Data Quality Assessments (DQAs) 

A Data Quality Assessment (DQA) refers to the process used to determine whether the quality of 

a given data set is adequate for its intended use. DQAs can be performed on all, or selected 

projects and/or data generation processes. The purpose of this type of evaluation is to determine 

whether the data collected are acceptable to the decision-maker or end user. Assessments 

generally take place at one of two points in the data generation process. First, as data are 

generated, aspects of the project such as surveillance of field and laboratory operations, 

consistency of the data with MQOs, successfully completing performance evaluation sample 

studies, and so forth, can be used to arrive as an assessment of whether the data are valid and 

acceptable. Rejected or questionable data cannot be used by ADEQ in its decision making, 

except in limited circumstances, such as a rough site screening. 

Once data have been examined and assessed, and they are found to be of known and acceptable 

quality, then the results can be evaluated in the context of the Data Quality Objectives for the 

project. In some, but all, cases, this may involve a statistical evaluation such as null hypothesis 

testing. In others in may involve a comparison to regulatory action levels. An assessment must 

also be made as to whether there is a sufficient quantity of data to support program or project 

decisions, and whether the original sampling design was appropriate. In some cases, the data 

may suggest that additional data are required to achieve a higher statistical confidence level. 

This could be because too many data points were invalidated, that samples were not collected 

over a long enough time period, or that a vital sampling area not previously considered 

important, was missed. In other cases, an assessment might show that data of a different type are 

required, or that the sensitivity of the instrument used in the measurement was not adequate to 

meet project objectives. Thus, both types of assessments are vital to the successful completion 

of a project. 

If necessary, ADEQ’s QA/QC Unit can review data generated by the ADHS State Laboratory, 

and by contract laboratories, for the various ADEQ Programs. These data review activities use 

checklists, standard operating procedures, and standardized qualification codes to indicate data 

quality. The use of checklists and SOPs help standardize the data review process. The extent 
58 

and level of verification for individual data sets should clearly be defined in the Program’s 

QAPrP and/or QAPjP. 

9.4.2 Data Quality Audits 

A related evaluation tool involving data review and assessment is the data quality audit which is 

used to evaluate the documentation of the quality of data generated for a given project. This 

assessment primarily involves an evaluation of the completeness of the documentation of field 

and analytical procedures and quality control results, and usually involves tracing the paper trail 

accompanying the data from sample collection and custody to analytical results and entry into a 

database. This technique is commonly used to verify the process involved in entering data 

residing in large regulatory databases. 

Results of both DQAs and data quality audits can be used in a number of ways. First, they can 

be used in making recommendations for changes in the design and performance of data 

collection efforts, and in the use and documentation of QC procedures. Secondly, they can be 

used as a guide for the planning and acquisition of supplemental data for the project and 

potentially for other related projects. Problems identified through DQAs may trigger the need 

for an MSR to determine management deficiencies, or a TSA to identify technical problems. 
59 

CHAPTER 10 QUALITY IMPROVEMENT 

The ADEQ Leadership Team actively supports quality improvement by encouraging the ADEQ 

staff to: 

 Continually evaluate the effectiveness of current policies, procedures, and 

practices via discussions of the QA/QC Steering committee and subsequent 

leadership review; 

 Apply innovative approaches while maintaining integrity and accuracy. Conduct 

regular management reviews to define and celebrate success while recognizing 

and eliminating undesirable processes or results. 

The above goals are achieved by continually committing resources to the Agency’s quality 

management efforts. Peer review and performance audits will enable the constant evaluation of 

ADEQ Programs, projects, and individual staff performance. The ADEQ Quality Management 

System is designed to identify opportunities for improving the measurement process. 

Improvement can take the form of preventing quality problems from occurring by adjusting 

current work processes, or by seeking out better ways to do the work. The ADEQ Integrated 

Quality Management process seeks to prevent quality problems from occurring, recognize 

challenges early, and celebrate success. 

Continual improvement is achieved through consistent evaluations of Program, project, and 

individual performances. Regular oversight allows ADEQ to reshape Program protocols to 

reflect changing methods or procedures. 

10.1 PROGRAM REVIEWS 

It is the responsibility of line management to assure staff participation in all Program reviews 

and to review annually all QA activities of their staff, to determine that SOPs are in place and to 

revise them if necessary, to ensure that QAPrPs are written and approved in advance of project 

start-up, and to ensure that data quality assessments are made. All deviations and discrepancies 

noted during any independent or self-assessment review will be corrected promptly. 

Recommendations for modifications to the QMP will be forwarded in writing to the ADEQ 

QA/QC Steering Committee for implementation and inclusion during regular review sessions, as 

described in section 9.2.1. 
60 

10.2 PROJECT REVIEWS 

It is the responsibility of Project/Case Managers to request project reviews and/or QA audits and 

to identify where improvements can be made. This process is started during the determination of 

data quality objectives and is finalized during the assessment of data quality. All corrective 

actions required during the life cycle of the project are to be filed in the official project file or 

with the project’s final report. Project team debriefing is a regular component of project closeout. 

All data collection and testing procedures are to be scrutinized for consistency within industry 

best practices. 

The evaluation can include the findings resulting from scientific scrutiny (new technologies) or 

analytical measurements. The team will prepare a written report of its findings, for Division 

Management and the Agency Leadership Team, along with recommendations for improvement. 

The Leadership Team may choose to solicit other recommendations for improvement from 

persons not directly involved with the project. The ADEQ Leadership Team will decide which 

recommendations to implement in future projects. 
61 

TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 

Acceptable Quality Level - a limit above which quality is considered satisfactory and below 

which it is not. In sampling inspection, the maximum percentage of defects or failures that can be 

considered satisfactory as an average. 

Accuracy - the degree of agreement between an observed value and an accepted reference value; 

a data quality indicator. 

Activity - an all-inclusive term describing a specific set of operations or related tasks to be 

performed, either serially or in parallel (e.g., research and development, field sampling, 

analytical operations, equipment fabrication), that in total result in a product or service. 

Assessment - the evaluation process used to measure the performance or effectiveness of a 

system and its elements. In this document, assessment is an all-inclusive term used to denote any 

of the following: audit, performance evaluation, management systems review, peer review, 

inspection or surveillance. 

Audit - a planned and documented investigative evaluation of an item or process to determine 

the adequacy and effectiveness, as well as compliance with established procedures, instructions, 

drawings, quality assurance project plans, and other applicable documents. 

Audit of Data Quality - a qualitative and quantitative evaluation of the documentation and 

procedures associated with environmental measurements to verify that the resulting data are of 

acceptable quality. 

Bias - the systematic or persistent distortion of a measurement process which causes errors in 

one direction; a data quality indicator. 

Characteristic - any property or attribute of a datum, item, process, or service that is distinct, 

describable, and measurable. 

Comparability - the degree to which different methods, data sets and/or decisions agree or can 

be represented as similar; a data quality indicator 

Completeness - the amount of valid data obtained compared to the planned amount, and usually 

expressed as a percentage; a data quality indicator. 

Computer Program - a sequence of instructions suitable for processing by a computer. 

Processing may include the use of an assembler, a compiler, an interpreter, or a translator to 

prepare the program for execution. A computer program may be stored on magnetic media, and 

be referred to as "software", or may be stored permanently on computer chips, and be referred to 

as "firmware". Computer programs covered by this document are those used for design analysis, 
62 

data acquisition, data reduction, data storage (data bases), operation or control, and data base or 

document control registers when used as the controlled source of quality information. 

Contractor - any organization or individual that contracts to furnish services or items or 

perform work. 

Corrective Action - measures taken to rectify conditions adverse to quality and, where 

necessary, to preclude their recurrence. 

Criteria - a standard on which judgment is based. 

Customer - any individual or organization for whom items or services are furnished or work 

performed in response to defined requirements and expectations. 

Data - facts or figures from which conclusions can be inferred. 

Data Base - a collection of integrated data that can be used for a variety of applications. 

Data of Known Quality - data are of known quality when the qualitative and quantitative 

components associated with their derivation are documented appropriately for their intended use 

and such documentation is verifiable and defensible. 

Data Quality Assessment (DQA) - a process for performing statistical analysis to determine 

whether the quality of a data set is adequate for its intended use. 

Data Quality Indicators - qualitative statistics and quantitative descriptors that are used to 

interpret the degree of acceptability or utility of data to the user. The principal data quality 

indicators are bias, precision, accuracy, comparability, completeness, representativeness, and 

sensitivity. 

Data Quality Objectives (DQOs) - qualitative and quantitative statements of the overall level of 

uncertainty that a decision-maker is willing to accept in results or decisions derived from 

environmental data. DQOs provide the statistical framework for planning and managing 

environmental data operations consistent with the data user's needs. 

Data Usability - the process of ensuring or determining whether the quality of the data produced 

meets the intended use of the data. 

Defensible - the ability to withstand any reasonable challenge related to the veracity of integrity 

of laboratory documents and derived data. 

Design Review - a documented evaluation by a team, including personnel other than the original 

designers, the responsible designers, the customer for the work or product being designed, and a 

quality assurance representative to determine if a proposed design will meet the established 

design criteria and perform as expected when implemented. 
63 

Electronic Data Deliverable (EDD) – an electronic file containing data sorted into specific 

fields for different data constituents. Designed to be uploaded into data bases for overall data 

management without additional manual input of data. 

Engineered Environmental Systems - an all-inclusive term used to describe pollution control 

devices and systems, waste treatment processes and storage facilities, and site remediation 

technologies and their components that may be utilized to remove pollutants or contaminants 

from the environment. Examples include wet scrubbers (air), soil washing (soil), granulated 

activated carbon unit (water), and filtration (air, water). Usually, this term will apply to 

hardware-based systems; however, it will also apply to methods or techniques used for pollutant 

reduction or containment of contamination to prevent further movement of the contaminants, 

such as capping, solidification or vitrification, and biological treatment. 

Environmental Conditions - the description of a physical medium (e.g., air, water, soil, 

sediment) or biological system expressed in terms of its physical, chemical, or biological 

characteristics. 

Environmental Data - any information or measurements resulting from field data collection 

activity, laboratory analyses or modeling involving the assessment of chemical, physical, or 

biological factors related to the environment, and that describe environmental processes or 

conditions, or the performance of engineered environmental systems. 

Environmental Data Operations - work performed to obtain, use, or report information 

pertaining to environmental processes and conditions. 

Environmental Monitoring - the process of measuring or collecting environmental data. 

Environmental Processes - manufactured or natural processes that produce discharges to or 

impact the ambient environment. 

Environmental Programs - generally considered a regulatory activity that results from the 

implementation of an act of Congress or other legislative body (e.g., a state). The duration of a 

Program is usually legally seven years, (subject to renewal by the legislative body at various 

intervals), and is effectively continuous. Measurements are usually the same from year to year 

and take place on a recurring basis, e.g., quarterly monitoring for water or air pollutants, site 

assessments for Superfund, etc. Although the locations, parameters, and nature of measurements 

may change, the overall goal, which is to compare data to a regulatory standard, is generally 

constant. The Clean Water Act, Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, Clean Air Act, etc. 

are examples of Programs, although not all data generation activities funded under these laws 

would necessarily be considered Program data if they fall into the project category (see below). 

A Program requires a QMP, describing its QA System, and usually a Program QAPP (QA 

Program Plan) to describe in detail the process by which Program data are obtained. In this 

document, an environmental Program also refers to functional areas of work performed by 

groups or teams of people within the ADEQ organization. 
64 

Environmental Project - is defined as a data gathering activity that usually is of a finite length. 

Project data quality objectives are established during the planning phase and an assessment is 

made at the completion to determine whether the data quality objectives were met. Projects may 

include monitoring, but the data collected are frequently not intended for the use in enforcement 

of a regulatory standard. A trial burn, testing a new technology, a one-time ecosystem assesment 

and a habitat inventory are but a few examples of environmental projects. An environmental 

project requires a Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPjP). 

Environmentally Related Measurements - any measurement or information that describes 

environmental processes or conditions, or the performance of engineered environmental systems. 

Thus, environmental data include all chemical, physical, or biological measurements relating to 

the environment; however, it does not include demographic or financial data. In addition, 

environmental data includes both direct measurements of environmental conditions and data 

collected from other sources such as literature, industry surveys, computerized databases, 

historical data, and mathematical models. Data from such sources are often called secondary 

data. 

External Oversight - a term used to convey related activities performed for EPA by ADEQ; 

usually performed under contracts, grants, or cooperative agreements. Used in reference to 

Quality Assurance Project Plans and the Quality Management Plan. 

Financial Assistance - the process by which funds are provided by one organization (usually 

government) to another organization for the purpose of performing work or furnishing services 

or items. Financial assistance mechanisms include grants, cooperative agreements, and 

government interagency agreements. 

Graded Approach - the process of basing the level of application of managerial controls applied 

to an item or work according to the intended use of results and the degree of confidence needed 

in the quality of the results. 

Hazardous Waste - any waste material that satisfies the definition of "hazardous waste" as 

given in 40 CFR Part 261, "Identification and Listing of Hazardous Waste". 

Independent Assessment - an assessment performed by a qualified individual, group, or 

organization that is not a part of the organization directly performing and accountable for the 

work being assessed. 

Inspection - an examination or measurement of an item or activity to verify conformance to 

specific requirements. 

Internal Activities - a term used to describe the activities performed by ADEQ employees; 

usually used in relationship to Quality Assurance Project Plans, the QMP, contracts, or grants. 

Item - an all-inclusive term used in place of the following: appurtenance, facility, sample 

assembly, component, equipment, material, module, part, product, structure, subassembly, 

subsystem, system, unit, documented concepts, or data. 
65 

Leadership Team - that group of ADEQ Management assembled and under the direction of the 

ADEQ Director. The Leadership Team consists of the following members: ADEQ Director; 

ADEQ Deputy Director; Waste, Water, Air and Administrative Directors; Northern and Southern 

Regional Directors; Communications Officer; and ADEQ Administrative Council. 

Management - those individuals directly responsible and accountable for planning, 

implementing, and assessing work. 

Management System - a structured non-technical system describing the policies, objectives, 

principles, organizational authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of 

an organization for conducting work and producing items and services. 

Management System Review (MSR) - the qualitative assessment of a data collection operation 

and/or organization(s) to establish whether the prevailing quality management structure, policies, 

practices, and procedures are adequate for ensuring that the type and quality of data needed are 

obtained. 

Measurement Quality Objectives (MQOs) - Performance or acceptance criteria for individual 

data quality indicators, usually including precision, bias, sensitivity, completeness, comparability, 

and representativeness. 

Method - a body of procedures and techniques for performing an activity (e.g., sampling, 

chemical analysis, quantification) systematically presented in the order in which they are to be 

executed. 

Mixed Waste - hazardous waste material, as defined by 40 CFR part 261 (RCRA), mixed with 

radioactive constituents. 

Peer Review - a documented critical review of work characterized by the existence of potential 

uncertainty. The peer review is conducted by qualified individuals (or organization) who are 

independent of those who performed the work, but are collectively equivalent in technical 

expertise (i.e., peers) to those who performed the original work. The peer review is conducted to 

ensure that activities are technically adequate, competently performed, properly documented, and 

satisfy established technical and quality requirements. The peer review is an in-depth assessment 

of the assumptions, calculations, extrapolations, alternate interpretations, methodology, 

acceptance criteria, and conclusions pertaining to specific work and of the documentation that 

supports them. Peer reviews provide an evaluation of a subject where quantitative methods of 

analysis or measures of success are unavailable or undefined, such as in research and 

development. 

Performance Evaluation Audit - a type of audit in which the quantitative data generated in a 

measurement system are obtained independently and compared with routinely obtained data to 

evaluate the proficiency of an analyst or laboratory. 
66 

Performance Evaluation Sample - (PE) a sample, the composition of which is unknown to the 

analyst, is provided to test whether the analyst/laboratory can produce analytical results within 

the specified performance limits. 

Procedure - a documented set of steps or actions that systematically specifies or describes how 

an activity is to be performed. 

Process - an orderly system of actions that are intended to achieve a desired end or result. 

Examples of processes include analysis, design, data collection, operation, fabrication, and 

calculation. 

Qualified Data - any data that have been reviewed and assessed as part of data validation, or 

data verification, operations. 

Quality - the sum of features and properties/characteristics of a process, item, or service that 

bears on its ability to meet the stated needs and expectations of the user. 

Quality Assurance (QA) - an integrated system of management activities involving planning, 

implementation, assessment, reporting, and quality improvement to ensure that a process, item, 

or service is of the type and quality needed and expected by the customer. 

Quality Staff - the EPA Headquarters office within the Office of Environmental Information 

that establishes and promulgates Quality Assurance Policy for the Agency. Formerly the Quality 

Assurance Management Staff (QAMS). 

Quality Assurance Project Plan (QAPjP) - a formal document describing in comprehensive 

detail the necessary QA, QC, and other managerial and technical activities that must be 

implemented to ensure that the results of the work performed will satisfy the stated performance 

(data quality) objectives. 

Quality Assurance Program Plan (QAPrP) – a formal document that describes the QA system 

for environmental Programs such as the Clean Water Act or Clean Air Act that is usually based 

on environmental regulations. It contains details like a QA Project Plan, but at a organization 

wide or Program level and can function as a QA Project Plan or it may contain broader spectrum 

procedures that require additional QA Project Plans with more specific details. 

Quality Control (QC) - the overall system of technical activities that measures the attributes and 

performance of a process, item, or service against defined standards to verify that they meet the 

stated requirements established by the customer. 

Quality Improvement - a management Program for improving the quality of operations. Such 

management Programs generally entail a formal mechanism for encouraging worker 

recommendations with timely management evaluation and feedback or implementation 

Quality Management - that aspect of the overall management system of the organization that 

determines and implements the quality policy. Quality management includes strategic planning, 
67 

allocation of resources, and other systematic activities (e.g., planning, implementation, and 

assessment) pertaining to the quality system. 

Quality Management Plan (QMP) - a formal document that describes the quality system in 

terms of the organizational structure, functional responsibilities of management and staff, lines of 

authority, and required interfaces for those planning, implementing, and assessing all QA 

activities conducted. 

Quality System - a structured and documented management system describing the policies, 

objectives, principles, organizational authority, responsibilities, accountability, and 

implementation plan of an organization for ensuring quality in its work processes, products 

(items), and services. The quality system provides the framework for planning, implementing, 

and assessing work performed by the organization and for carrying out required QA and QC 

procedures. 

Readiness Review - a systematic, documented review of the readiness for the startup or 

continued use of a facility, process, or activity. Readiness reviews are typically conducted before 

proceeding beyond project milestones and prior to initiation of a major phase of work. 

Remediation - the process of reducing the concentration of a contaminant (or contaminants) in 

air, water, or soil media to a level that poses an acceptable risk to human health. 

Self-Assessment - an assessment of work conducted by individuals, groups, or organizations 

directly responsible for overseeing and/or performing the work. 

Sensitivity - - The capability of the measuring instrument to discriminate between the analytical 

response (e.g., absorbance, volume, meter reading) and background. In a specialized sense, it has the 

same meaning as the detection limit.

Service - the category of economic activity that does not produce manufactured items. In 

environmental data operations or engineering projects, such activities include design, inspection, 

laboratory and/or field analysis, repair, and installation. 

Significant Condition - any state, status, incident, or situation of an environmental process or 

condition of an engineered environmental system in which the work being performed will be 

adversely affected in a manner sufficiently serious to require corrective action to satisfy quality 

objectives or specifications and safety requirements. 

Software Life Cycle - the period of time that starts when a software product is conceived and 

ends when the software product is no longer available for routine use. The software life cycle 

typically includes a requirements phase, a design phase, an implementation phase, a test phase, 

an installation and check-out phase, an operation and maintenance phase, and sometimes a 

retirement phase. 

Standard Operating Procedure (SOP) - a written document that details the method for an 

operation, analysis, or action with thoroughly prescribed techniques and steps, and that is 

officially approved as the method for performing certain routine or repetitive tasks. 
68 

Supplier - any individual or organization furnishing items or services or performing work 

according to a procurement document or financial assistance agreement. This is an all-inclusive 

term used in place of any of the following: vendor, seller, contractor, subcontractor, fabricator, or 

consultant. 

Surveillance - the act of monitoring or observing a process or activity to verify conformance to 

specified requirements. 

Technical Review - a documented critical review of work that has been performed. The review 

is accomplished by one or more qualified reviewers who are independent of those who 

performed the work, but are collectively equivalent in technical expertise to those who 

performed the original work. The reviews are an in-depth analysis and evaluation of documents, 

activities, material, data, or items that require technical verification or validation for 

applicability, correctness, adequacy, completeness, and assurance that established requirements 

are satisfied. 

Technical Systems Audit (TSA) - a thorough, systematic, on-site qualitative audit of facilities, 

equipment, personnel, training procedures, record keeping, data validation, data management, 

and reporting aspects of a system. 

Validation - an activity that demonstrates or confirms that a process, item, data set, or service 

satisfies the requirements defined by the user. 

Verification - the act of authenticating or formally asserting the truth that a process, item, data 

set, or service is, in fact, that which is claimed. 
69 

APPENDICES 

ADEQ Temperature/Preservation Guidance Policy 

ADEQ Policy 0154 - Addressing Spike and Surrogate Recovery As They Relate to Matrix 

Effects in Water, Air, Sludge, and Soil Matrices 

ADEQ Policy 0170 – Implementation of EPA Method 5035 - Soil Preparation for EPA 

Methods 8015B, 8021B, and 8260B 

Arizona Data Qualifiers – Revision 3 (0 9/20/2007) 
Attachment K 

PCWRL Quality Manual 
This is a Controlled Document. Unless numbered, any copy of this Manual 

appearing in paper form is not controlled and should be checked against the 

server file version prior to use.

Copy # Given to:

5-12-12 1 of 74

COMPLIANCE AND REGULATORY AFFAIRS OFFICE 

Water & Energy Sustainability Center

3035 W El Camino del Cerro, Tucson, AZ 85743 Telephone: (520) 724-6200 

Fax: (520) 724-6071

LLAABBOORRAATTOORRYYSSEERRVVIIICCEESS

QUALITY MANUAL

 
5-12-12 Rev.7 2 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL
5-12-12 Rev.7 3 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Section 2.0 Table of Contents

 PAGE

Section 2.0 Table of Contents......................................................................................... 3

SECTION 3 INTRODUCTION & SCOPE........................................................................ 5

3.1 Scope of Testing ............................................................................................ 5

3.2 Table of Contents, References and Appendices ........................................... 5

3.3 Glossary and Acronyms Used........................................................................ 7

SECTION 4 ORGANIZATIONAL ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES ............................. 9

4.1 Laboratory Organizational Structure .............................................................. 9

4.2 Responsibility and Authority........................................................................... 9

SECTION 5- QUALITY SYSTEMS................................................................................ 12

5.1. Quality System Policy................................................................................... 13

5.2. Standard Operating Procedures................................................................... 14

SECTION 6- DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT.................................................................. 14

6.1 Controlled Documents................................................................................... 14

6.2 Obsolete Documents..................................................................................... 16

6.3 Standard Operating Procedures.................................................................... 16

SECTION 7 – REVIEW OF REQUESTS, TENDERS AND CONTRACTS.................... 18

7.1 Procedure for the Review of Work Requests ................................................ 18

7.2 Documentation of Review ............................................................................. 19

SECTION 8 – SUBCONTRACTING OF TESTS ........................................................... 20

SECTION 9 – PURCHASING SERVICES AND SUPPLIES ......................................... 21

SECTION 10 – SERVICE TO THE CLIENT.................................................................. 22

10.1 Client Confidentiality ..................................................................................... 22

SECTION 11 – COMPLAINTS...................................................................................... 22

SECTION 12 – CONTROL OF NON-CONFORMING WORK....................................... 23

SECTION 13 – CORRECTIVE ACTION ....................................................................... 24

13.1 Selection and Implementation of Corrective Actions ..................................... 24

13.2 Monitoring of Corrective Action ..................................................................... 24

13.3 Technical Corrective Action........................................................................... 25

13.4 Exceptionally Permitting Departures from Documented Policies and 

Procedures ................................................................................................................ 25

SECTION 14 – PREVENTIVE ACTION ........................................................................ 27

SECTION 15 – CONTROL OF RECORDS................................................................... 28

15.1 Records Management and Storage .............................................................. 28

15.2 Legal Chain of Custody Records................................................................... 29

SECTION 16 – AUDITS AND MANAGEMENT REVIEW .............................................. 30

16.1 Internal Audits ............................................................................................... 30

16.2 External Audits.............................................................................................. 30

16.3 Performance Audits....................................................................................... 31

16.4 System Audits and Management Reviews .................................................... 31

SECTION 17 – PERSONNEL, TRAINING, AND DATA INTEGRITY............................ 33

17.1 Job Descriptions- .......................................................................................... 33

17.2 Data Integrity and Ethics ............................................................................... 33
5-12-12 Rev.7 4 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

17.3 Data Integrity and Ethics Training ................................................................. 34

17.4 General Training ........................................................................................... 34

SECTION 18 – ACCOMMODATIONS & ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS................ 36

SECTION 19 – TEST METHODS AND METHOD VALIDATION .................................. 37

19.1 Demonstration of Capability (DOC)............................................................... 37

19.2 On-Going (or Continued) Proficiency ............................................................ 37

19.3 Initial Test Method Evaluation ....................................................................... 37

19.4 Estimation of Uncertainty .............................................................................. 39

19.5 Laboratory-Developed or Non-Standard Method Validation.......................... 39

19.6 Control of Data.............................................................................................. 40

SECTION 20 – EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................ 42

20.1 General Equipment Requirements ................................................................ 42

20.2 Support Equipment ....................................................................................... 44

20.3 Analytical Equipment..................................................................................... 49

SECTION 21 – MEASUREMENT TRACEABILITY....................................................... 56

21.1 Reference Standards .................................................................................... 56

21.2 Reference Materials ...................................................................................... 57

21.3 Transport and Storage of Reference Standards and Materials ..................... 57

21.4 Labeling of Reference Standards, Reagents, and Materials ......................... 57

SECTION 22 – SAMPLE MANAGEMENT .................................................................... 59

22.1 Sample Receipt............................................................................................. 59

22.2 Sample Acceptance ...................................................................................... 59

22.3 Sample Identification..................................................................................... 60

22.4 Sample Storage ............................................................................................ 61

22.5 Sample Disposal ........................................................................................... 61

22.6 Sample Transport.......................................................................................... 62

22.7 Sampling Records......................................................................................... 62

SECTION 23 – QUALITY OF TEST RESULTS............................................................. 63

23.1 Essential Quality Control Procedures............................................................ 63

23.2 Internal Quality Control Practices.................................................................. 64

23.3 Method Blanks .............................................................................................. 68

23.4 Laboratory Control Samples.......................................................................... 69

23.5 Matrix Spikes and Matrix Spike Duplicates ................................................... 69

23.6 Surrogate Spikes........................................................................................... 70

23.7 Proficiency Test Samples or Interlaboratory Comparisons............................ 70

23.8 Data Review.................................................................................................. 71

SECTION 24 – REPORTING OF RESULTS................................................................. 72

24.1 Test Reports.................................................................................................. 72

24.2 Supplemental Test Report Information.......................................................... 73

24.3 Environmental Testing Obtained from Subcontractors.................................. 74

24.4 Electronic Transmission of Results ............................................................... 74

24.5 Amendments to Test Reports........................................................................ 74

See 3.2 for List of Appendices.
5-12-12 Rev.7 5 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 3 INTRODUCTION & SCOPE

The purpose of this Quality Manual is to outline the quality system for the Pima County 

RWRD Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Office (CRAO) laboratory. The Quality 

Manual defines the policies, procedures, and documentation that assure analytical 

services continually meet a defined standard of quality that is designed to provide 

clients with scientifically valid and legally defensible data of known and documented 

quality and, where applicable, demonstrate regulatory compliance.

Policy

The Quality Manual sets the standard under which all laboratory operations are 

performed including the laboratory's organization, objectives, and operating philosophy.

3.1 Scope of Testing

The laboratory scope of analytical testing services includes those listed in

Appendix M - Laboratory License and in Appendix E - Listing of CRAO 

Laboratory SOPs. 

3.2 Table of Contents, References and Appendices

3.2.1. Appendices

This Quality Manual uses the references included in Modules 1-7 in the 2009 TNI 

Environmental Laboratory Sector Standard – Volume 1 – Management and 

Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis. 

For additional references please refer to the following appendices.

Appendices

 Appendix A – WESC CRAO Laboratory Floor Plan

 Appendix B - Obsolete 

 Appendix C – WESC CRAO Laboratory Organizational Chart

 Appendix D - Example of Final Lab Reports

 Appendix E - Listing of CRAO Laboratory SOPs

 Appendix F - Equipment Inventory Organic Chemistry 

 Appendix G - Equipment Inventory Inorganic Chemistry 

 Appendix H - Equipment Inventory QA Unit 

 Appendix I - Equipment Inventory Microbiology/Wet Chemistry

 Appendix J - Preservation and Holding Times Table

 Appendix K- Laboratory Glossary and Acronyms

 Appendix L - Laboratory Employee Signature/Initial Identification Form

 Appendix M - Laboratory License

 Appendix N- Document Schedule

 Appendix O-List of Forms and Checklists 

 Appendix P-List of QM changes 

 Appendix Q - Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of Environmental 

Laboratories R9-14-601 et seq.
5-12-12 Rev.7 6 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

3.2.2. References

This Quality Manual uses the references included in Modules 1-7 in the 2009 TNI 

Environmental Laboratory Sector Standard – Volume 1 – Management and 

Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing Environmental Analysis as 

well as the references listed in the Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of 

Environmental Laboratories R9-14-601 et. seq. (Appendix Q). 

This Quality Manual uses the references from the EL-VI-2009 TNI Standard.

Test Method References:

References to all analytical procedures in use are maintained in the CRAO Lab 

are located in the Unit Supervisor Office, the Quality Assurance officer's (QAO) 

office, or online. The QAO is responsible for maintaining the currency of all 

references used to write SOPs. All compliance samples tested by the CRAO 

Lab must follow SOPs derived from EPA approved methods as appropriate to the 

sample matrix. The following references contain approved methods for 

compliance testing performed by the CRAO Lab:

 Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vol. 11.01 and 11.02, Water and

Environmental Technology, American Society for Testing and Materials,

Philadelphia, PA. 1992. 

 Hach Water Analysis Handbook, 3rd Edition, Hach Company, P.O. Box 389, 

Loveland, CO, 1997

 Manual for the Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water: Criteria 

and Procedures Quality Assurance, 5th Edition, U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, 

Cincinnati, OH. Jan. 2005. EPA815-R-05-004.

 Supplement to the Fifth Edition of the Manual for the Certification of 

Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water, 5th Edition, U.S. Environmental 

Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, 

Cincinnati, OH. June 2008. EPA 815-F-08-006.

 Method 1664, Rev A, N-Hexane Extractable Material (HEM; Oil and Grease) 

and Silica Gel Treated N-Hexane Extractable Material (SGT-HEM; Non-polar 

Material) by Extraction and Gravimetry, U.S. Environmental Protection 

Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH.,

Feb 1999 EPA 821/R-98/002.

 Methods for Chemical Analysis of Water and Wastes, U.S. Environmental

Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory,

Cincinnati, OH, revised March 1983. (EPA 600/4-79-020).

 Methods for Determination of Inorganic Substances in Environmental 

Samples, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental Monitoring 

and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, Aug 1993, EPA 600/R-93/100.

 Methods for Organic Chemical Analysis of Municipal and Industrial 

Wastewater, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Environmental 

Monitoring and Support Laboratory, Cincinnati, OH, July 1982. (EPA 600/4-

82-057). http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

 Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater, 19th 

Edition, APHA-AWWA-WPCF, 1995.
5-12-12 Rev.7 7 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 Standard Methods for Examination of Water and Wastewater, 20th Edition,

APHA-AWWA-WPCF, 1998.

 Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, EPA, Pub. No. SW-846, 

Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, Physical/Chemical Methods (3rd 

ed. 1986), as amended by Update I, July 1992; Update IIA, August 1993; 

Update II, September 1994; Update IIB, January 1995; Update III, December 

1996; Update IIIA, June 1999; and Update IIIB, July 2005, available from 

National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 

22161, and at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/main.htm.

 Title 40 Code of Federal Regulations Part 136 app. A (July 2005), available at 

http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.html.

 Handbook of Environmental Analysis, Roy-Keith Smith, Genium Publishing 

Corporation, 1993. (Definitions)

 EPA 821/R-02/013 for Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing (WETT testing).

3.3 Glossary and Acronyms Used

Quality control terms are generally defined within the section that describes the 

activity. 

Glossary

For acronyms and definitions not covered here, please refer to Appendix K.

Acronyms

A list of acronyms used in this document and their definitions are:

AA – Accrediting Authority

ADHS - Arizona Department of Health

ANSI – American National Standards Institute

ASQC – American Society for Quality Control

ASTM – American Society for Testing and Materials 

Blk – Blank

BKD - Breakdown Check Standard, particular to pesticides

°C – degrees Celsius

Cal – calibration

CAL - Calibration Standard

CAS – Chemical Abstract Service 

CCB - Continuing Calibration Blank

CCV – Continuing calibration verification

COC – Chain of custody

CRL - MRL-Level Calibration Verification

DO – Dissolved oxygen

DOC – Demonstration of Capability

EPA – Environmental Protection Agency
5-12-12 Rev.7 8 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

g/L – grams per liter

GC/MS – gas chromatography/mass spectrometry

HCV - High-Level Calibration Verification

IBL - Instrument Blank

ICB - Initial Calibration Blank

ICP-MS – inductively coupled plasma-mass spectrometry

ICV – Initial calibration verification

IFA - Interference Check Standard A

IFB - Interference Check Standard B

ISO/IEC – International Organization for Standardization/International 

Electrochemical Commission

lb/in2 – pound per square inch 

LCS – Laboratory control sample 

LFB – Laboratory fortified blank

MDL – method detection limit

mg/Kg – milligrams per kilogram

mg/L – milligrams per liter 

MS – matrix spike

MSD – matrix spike duplicate

NELAP – National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program

NIST – National Institute of Standards and Technology

PEM - Performance Evaluation Mixture

PT – Proficiency Test(ing)

PTOB – Proficiency Testing Oversight Body

PTPA – Proficiency Testing Provider Accreditor

QA – Quality Assurance

QC – Quality Control

QM – Quality Manual

QAM – Quality Assurance Manager

RL – Reporting level

RPD – Relative percent difference

RSD – Relative standard deviation

SCV - Second Source Calibration Verification

SOPs – Standard operating procedures 

spk – spike

SRD - Serial Dilution

SRM – Standard Reference Material

std – standard

TNI - The NELAC institute

TUN - MS Tune

ug/L – micrograms per liter 

ug/m3– micrograms per cubic meter

UV – Ultraviolet

VOC – Volatile organic compound
5-12-12 Rev.7 9 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

WETT – Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing

SECTION 4 ORGANIZATIONAL ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

Policy

The laboratory is a legally identifiable organization. Through application of the 

policies and procedures outlined in this chapter, the laboratory assures that it is 

impartial and that personnel are free from undue commercial, financial, or other 

undue pressures that might influence their technical judgment. The laboratory is 

responsible for carrying out testing activities that meet the requirements of the 

EL-VI-2009 TNI Standard and that meet the needs of the client.

4.1 Laboratory Organizational Structure

Policy

The organizational structure indicated minimizes the potential for conflicting or 

undue interests that might influence the technical judgment of analytical 

personnel. 

The CRAO Lab is managed by the Pima County Compliance and Regulatory 

Affairs Office of Regional Wastewater Reclamation Department (RWRD). The 

CRAO Lab operates under the Arizona Lab License number AZO159 and the 

EPA labcode AZ00009. The CRAO Lab operates in Pima County, Arizona and 

provides analytical services to (1) all Pima County owned and operated 

wastewater reclamation facilities (WRF), (2) Pima County Regional Wastewater 

Reclamation's CRAO Industrial Wastewater Control (IWC), (3) CRAO Water 

Quality, (4) Pima County Departments of Transportation, Environmental Quality, 

and Natural Resources, Parks and Recreation (5) governmental/private 

organizations outside of Pima County government. The CRAO Laboratory is 

located in the Water & Energy Sustainability Center (WESC) at 3035 W El 

Camino del Cerro, Tucson, Arizona 85745. Please reference Appendices A & B 

for location maps and Appendix C for the Organization Chart.

4.2 Responsibility and Authority

Management includes the Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager, 

Laboratory Director, Inorganic Chemist Specialist, Organic Chemist Specialist, 

Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Chemist Specialist, WETT Chemist Specialist, and 

the Quality Assurance Officer. 

Policy

Management has overall responsibility for the technical operations and authority 

needed to generate the required quality of laboratory operations. 

Policy
5-12-12 Rev.7 10 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Management ensures technical competence of personnel operating equipment, 

performing tests, evaluating results, or signing reports, and limits authority to 

perform laboratory functions to those appropriately trained and/or supervised.

PROCEDURE

The assignment of responsibilities, authorities, and interrelationships of the 

personnel who manage, perform, or verify work affecting the quality of 

environmental tests is documented in the Quality Manual section 4.2.1.

Management bears specific responsibility for maintenance of the Quality System. 

This includes defining roles and responsibilities to personnel, approving 

documents, providing required training, providing a procedure for confidential 

reporting of data integrity issues, and periodically reviewing data, procedures, 

and documentation.

Management ensures that audit findings and corrective actions are completed 

within required time frames.

For any member of the CRAO Staff, should that staff member be absent, the 

authority and responsibility shifts to that staff member's supervisor.

Management is responsible for defining the minimal level of education, 

qualifications, experience, and skills necessary for all positions in the laboratory 

and assuring that technical staff has demonstrated capabilities in their tasks.

Training is kept up to date as described in Section 17.4 by periodic review of 

training records and through employee performance reviews.

The CRAO Lab is committed to reporting quality information, and this 

commitment is communicated to all levels of personnel from management down 

to staff positions. The following information reflects the authority and 

responsibilities of management, supervision, and staff.

The CRAO Lab organization consists of the following five units. (See 

Organizational Chart shown in Appendix C):

1. Inorganic Chemistry Unit

2. Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Unit

3. Organic Chemistry Unit

4. Quality Assurance Unit /Safety/Training/Haz Mat

5. Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing

4.2.1 Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager:

The Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project Manager is the administrator and 

the final authority for the CRAO Laboratory. It is the Program Manager's 

responsibility to ensure adequate funding and equipment is available for the 

laboratory staff. The Program Manager reports directly to the RWRD Director. 

The Program Manager administers the operations, maintenance and technical 
5-12-12 Rev.7 11 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

services of the Compliance and Regulatory Affairs group. The Program Manager 

acts as the "owner" of the CRAO Lab and therefore cosigns the Laboratory 

License.

4.2.2. CRAO Laboratory Director:

The CRAO Laboratory Director provides first line supervision of laboratory 

personnel involved in the chemical and microbiological examination of water and 

waste to include ground water, storm water, surface water, wastewater, and 

biosolids from RWRD facilities. This classification is responsible for accurate and 

timely testing for compliance with licensure requirements set forth by local, State 

and Federal regulatory agencies. [This position fulfills the requirements of the 

“Laboratory Director” as defined with duties enumerated by the Arizona 

Environmental Laboratory Licensure Rule.] The CRAO Laboratory Director

ensures the laboratory is committed to following the QM and the SOPs. The 

Laboratory Director reports to the CRAO Program Manager 

4.2.3 Quality Assurance Officer

The Quality Assurance Officer (QAO) has the responsibility and the authority to 

ensure the QM is implemented and followed at all times. The QAO has access to 

anyone in management who may make decisions on laboratory policy or 

resources. Ultimately the QAO is responsible for the oversight and/or review of 

quality control data. The QAO and The Quality Assurance Unit are not directly 

involved in analyzing samples to help ensure there is not a conflict of interest. 

Internal Audits are performed without influence from management or analysts.

The QAO is responsible for ordering and managing the laboratory performance 

evaluations annually. The QM is updated annually by the QAO.

The QAO is responsible for updating the SOPs, Forms, and data. The QAO 

reports to the Laboratory Director.

4.2.4 Chemical Hygiene /Training Officer: 

The Chemical Hygiene/Training Officer is responsible for monthly safety 

meetings, laboratory hazardous waste disposal, and the Chemical Hygiene Plan. 

The Chemical Hygiene /Training Officer reports to the Laboratory Director.

4.2.5. WW Laboratory Chemist Specialist:

The Chemist Specialist is a unit supervisor position and is responsible for 

verifying the quality of work of staff in the Unit. Chemist Specialist must review 

and approve all analytical results for the unit in LIMS. The unit supervisor also 

reviews all calibrations, detection limits, and quality control checks performed by 

analysts. The Chemist Specialist has the authority to reject an analysis or result 

for cause. 

The unit supervisor is responsible for reviewing, updating and signing each SOP 

along with all data forms used by the unit. Each supervisor is responsible for 
5-12-12 Rev.7 12 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

ensuring the analysts in their unit are properly trained, following accepted 

methods, and are performing analytical procedures in a manner that is safe to 

themselves and others in the laboratory. SOPs must remain current.

The Chemist Specialist is responsible for troubleshooting problems and making 

corrective action plans in concert with the analyst.

Unit supervisors have the authority to recommend approved methods and initiate 

purchase of new instruments for their unit. The amount unit supervisors can 

approve for purchases varies from contract to contract. This classification 

requires specialized knowledge of environmental laboratory functions for a unit of 

the laboratory. This classification is also responsible for following accepted 

testing methods as established by local, State and Federal regulatory agencies. 

They are responsible for annually reading, following and ensuring the people in 

their unit follow the CHP, QM, and Ethics policy. The Chemist Specialist position 

reports to the Laboratory Director.

4.2.6 WW Laboratory Chemist:

The Chemist has the responsibility to perform chemical and microbiological 

testing of samples using ADHS Licensed methods for reporting compliance data. 

The Chemist responsibilities include keeping the supervisor informed. Chemists 

must annually read and follow all SOPs relevant to the testing they perform. 

They report to the Chemist Specialist for any problems or concerns. They must 

conduct testing in accordance with the Lab Ethics Policy. Chemists may perform 

internal audits, provide training, calibrate thermometers, and write reports as 

needed.

Chemists may stop an analysis, which is not adhering to QA guidelines for that 

method or the client's requirements. Chemist must then immediately inform their 

Supervisor, QAO, and/or Laboratory Director as appropriate. Chemists report to 

the Chemist Specialist in the unit they are assigned.

4.2.7 WW Laboratory Technician:

The Technician has the responsibility to perform chemical and microbiological 

testing, under moderate supervision, samples in the field or brought to the 

laboratory using ADHS Licensed methods for reporting compliance data.

Technicians may stop an analysis, which is not adhering to QA guidelines for that 

method or the client's requirements. Technicians must then immediately inform 

their, Supervisor, QAO, and/or Laboratory Director as appropriate. Technicians 

report to the Chemist Specialist in the unit they are assigned.

SECTION 5- QUALITY SYSTEMS

The laboratory's Quality System is documented in this Quality Manual and associated 

quality system documents. Together they describe the policies, objectives, principles, 
5-12-12 Rev.7 13 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

organizational authority, responsibilities, accountability, and implementation plan of the 

organization for ensuring quality in its work processes, products, and services.

5.1. Quality System Policy

Quality Policy Statement

The objective of the quality system and the commitment of management is 

to consistently provide our customers with scientifically valid and defensible 

data of known and documented quality that meets their requirements. Our 

policy is to use good professional practices, to maintain quality, to uphold the 

highest quality of service, and to comply with the EL-VI-2009 TNI Standard 

and ADHS Rules & Statutes. The laboratory ensures that personnel are free 

from any commercial, financial, and other undue pressures, which might 

adversely affect the quality of work. This policy is implemented and enforced 

through the unequivocal commitment of management, at all levels, to the 

Quality Assurance (QA) principles and practices outlined in this manual. 

However, the primary responsibility for quality rests with each individual 

within the laboratory organization. Every laboratory employee must ensure 

that the generation and reporting of quality analytical data is a fundamental 

priority. Every laboratory employee is required to familiarize him or herself 

with the quality documentation and to implement the policies and procedures 

in their work. All employees are trained annually on ethical principles and 

procedures surrounding the data that is generated. The laboratory maintains 

a strict policy of client confidentiality.

Quality Manual (QM) Policy

Laboratory management ensures that the laboratory’s policies and objectives for 

quality are documented by reference or by inclusion in the Quality Manual, and 

that the Quality Manual is communicated to, understood by, and implemented by 

all personnel concerned.

Policy

Where the Quality Manual documents laboratory requirements, a separate SOP 

or policy is not required.

The QM is provided as an overall guidance for the CRAO laboratory. The QM is 

to be used in conjunction with the SOPs for a complete Quality Assurance 

System. 

PROCEDURE 

All employees sign a form, kept with their training records that state that they 

have read and understood the Quality Manual, including the quality policy.

The Quality Assurance Officer maintains the Quality Manual current and up-todate.
5-12-12 Rev.7 14 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

5.2. Standard Operating Procedures

SOPS are in place to give in-depth instructions on both general and technical 

subjects.

SECTION 6- DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT

This Section describes procedures for document management, which includes 

controlling, distributing, reviewing, and accepting modifications. The purpose of 

document management is to preclude the use of invalid and/or obsolete documents.

The laboratory manages three types of documents, 1) controlled, 2) approved, and 3) 

obsolete. 

A CONTROLLED DOCUMENT is one that is uniquely identified, issued, tracked, and kept 

current as part of the quality system. Controlled documents may be internal documents 

or external documents.

APPROVED means reviewed, and either signed and dated, or acknowledged in writing or 

secure electronic means by the issuing authority.

OBSOLETE DOCUMENTS are documents that have been superseded by more recent 

versions. 

Policy

All documents that affect the quality of laboratory data are managed appropriate to the 

scope and depth required. 

6.1 Controlled Documents

Policy 

Forms and Checklists will be reviewed and approved for use by the owner of the 

document or the Unit Supervisor prior to issue. 

SOPs will be reviewed and approved for use by the unit chemist specialist, if 

applicable, the Quality Assurance Officer, and the Laboratory Director prior to 

issue. 

PROCEDURE

Documents are reviewed each year or more often to ensure their contents are 

suitable and in compliance with the current quality systems requirements, and 

accurately describe current operations.

Approved copies of documents are available at all locations where operations are 

essential to the effective functions of the laboratory.

Copies of documents to distribute to laboratory personnel are numbered 

consecutively. The Laboratory Director or Quality Assurance Officer determines 
5-12-12 Rev.7 15 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

to whom the documents will be distributed. The Quality Assurance Officer

maintains the lists of distribution on the Laboratory Drive of the Network. The 

sequential number of each copy is recorded next to the individual’s name in the 

distribution list. The date of distribution is recorded. The employee initials that the 

copy was received. When the document is no longer valid, the date the 

document became obsolete is recorded, and the retrieved copies are checked off 

next to each employee’s name.

Controlled internal documents are registered tracked by the QA unit. Acceptable 

file types PDF, WORD, and EXCEL. Each document has a unique number. SOP 

numbers are listed in Appendix E. Each document has a unique number and is 

identified with 1) date of issue, 2) revision identification, 3) page number, and 4) 

the total number of pages.

A master list of controlled internal documents is maintained that includes 

distribution, location, and revision dates is automatically by Quality Assurance. 

The controlled document list is maintained by Quality Assurance. It is the Unit 

Supervisor’s responsibility to update forms and documents as needed.

6.1.1 Document Changes to Controlled Documents

For more information, access SOP 9.20 Adding and Revising Documents.

6.1.1.1 Paper Document Changes

Policy

Document changes are approved by the original approving authority, 

usually the unit chemist specialist or designee. 

Policy

Corrections on documents, including Chain of Custodies shall specify 

the reason for the correction unless the correction is transcription error.

Policy

The document management process allows for handwritten 

modifications to documents. 

Procedure

The unit chemist specialist must approve all document changes in 

SOPs. The modified SOP is then copied and distributed, and obsolete 

documents are removed. 

Amendments to SOPs are incorporated into a new revision and 

reissued as soon as practicable.

6.1.1.2 Electronic Document Changes
5-12-12 Rev.7 16 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Procedure

Suggested revisions to electronic documents are presented to the unit 

chemist specialist for review and approval. Changes to electronic 

documents are approved by date and initial on the document or through 

electronic means (such as email, change tracking functions, or 

memoranda). 

Where practicable, the altered text or new text in the draft is identified 

during the revision or review process to provide for easy identification of 

the modifications. 

6.2 Obsolete Documents

Policy

All invalid or obsolete documents are removed from general distribution, or 

otherwise prevented from unintended use. 

Procedure

Please refer to SOP 9.20 for procedures on obsolete documents.

6.3 Standard Operating Procedures

STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPs) are used to ensure consistency of 

application of common procedures, are written procedures that describe in detail 

how to accurately reproduce laboratory processes, and are of two types: 1) test 

method SOPs, which have specifically required details, and 2) Administrative use 

SOPs which document the more general organizational procedures. 

SOPs do not have to be formal documents with predefined section headings and 

contents. They can be less formal descriptions of procedures described in the 

Quality Manual or other documents. 

Policy

Copies of all SOPs are accessible to all personnel. Electronic signed copies are 

located internally at X:\CRAO\Lab Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab\SOPs. Paper copies 

are distributed to each unit. 

Procedure

Each SOP indicates the effective date, the revision number, and the signature(s) 

of the Unit Chemist Specialist, the Quality Assurance Officer, and the Laboratory 

Director.

6.3.1 Test Method SOPs

Policy
5-12-12 Rev.7 17 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

The laboratory has SOPs for all test methods within its scope, located in the 

Quality Assurance Office, and for procedures that are part of the Quality System 

that accurately reflect how the analytical process is performed. Where equipment 

manuals or published methods accurately reflect laboratory procedures in detail, 

a separate SOP is not required. 

Policy

Any deviation from a test method is documented, including both a description of 

the change made and a technical justification. The deviation from a test method 

is reported to the client. For compliance reporting, the deviation must be an 

allowable method modification per the 40 CFR, Part 136.6 and ADHS rules.

Procedure

Each Test Method SOP includes or references (as applicable) the following:

a) Identification of the test method;

b) Applicable matrix or matrices;

c) Detection limit;

d) Scope and application, including components to be analyzed;

e) Summary of the test method;

f) Definitions;

g) Interferences;

h) Safety;

i) Equipment and supplies;

j) Reagents and standards;

k) Sample collection, preservation, shipment and storage;

l) Quality control, including acceptance criteria (5.4.10.6);

m) Calibration and standardization;

n) Procedure;

o) Data analysis and calculations;

p) Method performance;

q) Pollution prevention;

r) Data assessment and acceptance criteria for quality control measures;

s) Corrective actions for out-of-control ;

t) Contingencies for handling out-of-control or unacceptable data;

u) Waste management;

v) References; and,

w) Any tables, diagrams, flowcharts and validation data. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 18 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 7 – REVIEW OF REQUESTS, TENDERS AND CONTRACTS

Policy

The review of all new work assures that oversight is provided so that requirements are 

clearly defined, the laboratory has adequate resources and capability, and the test 

method is applicable to the customer's needs. This process assures that all work will be 

given adequate attention without shortcuts that may compromise data quality. 

Contracts for new work may be formal bids, signed documents, verbal, or electronic. 

The written form for evaluation of requests, tenders and contract in available on the Gdrive, form QA-23.

PROCEDURE

7.1 Procedure for the Review of Work Requests 

The Laboratory Director determines if the laboratory has the necessary 

accreditations, resources, including schedule, equipment, deliverables, and 

personnel to meet the work request. 

The Quality Assurance Officer informs the client of the results of the review if it 

indicates any potential conflict, deficiency; lack of accreditation or inability of the 

lab to the complete the work satisfactorily. 

The client is informed of any deviation from the agreement including the test 

method or sample handling processes. All differences between the request and 

the final agreement are resolved and recorded before any work begins. It is 

necessary that the contract be acceptable to both the laboratory and the client.

The review process is repeated when there are amendments to the original 

agreement by the client. The participating personnel are given copies of the 

amendments.

The Laboratory Director or designee will review the work request.

For routine projects and other simple tasks, a review by the unit chemist 

specialist is considered adequate. The unit chemist specialist confirms that the 

laboratory has any required certifications, that it can meet the client’s data quality 

and reporting requirements, and that the lab has the capacity to meet the clients 

turn around needs.

For new, complex or large projects, the proposed work agreement is given to the 

Laboratory Director. The Laboratory Director will in turn forward the work 

agreement to the appropriate personnel to evaluate such items as:
5-12-12 Rev.7 19 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 Method capabilities, analyte lists, reporting limits, and quality control 

limits

 Turnaround time feasibility

 QA/QC issues, including certification/accreditation

 Formal laboratory quote

 Final report formatting and electronic deliverable documents

 Time required to keep sample in house

 Final sample disposal requirements

 Review PT sample results

The Laboratory Director or designee submits the bid and formal quote to the 

client. 

7.2 Documentation of Review

Records are maintained for every agreement or work request, when appropriate. 

This includes pertinent discussions with a client relating to the client's 

requirements or the results of the work during the period of execution of the 

agreement. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 20 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 8 – SUBCONTRACTING OF TESTS

A SUBCONTRACT LABORATORY is defined as a laboratory external to this laboratory, or at a 

different location than the address indicated on the front cover of this manual, that 

performs analyses for this laboratory.

Policy

When subcontracting analytical services, the laboratory assures work requiring 

accreditation is placed with an appropriately accredited laboratory or one that meets 

applicable statutory and regulatory requirements for performing the tests.

PROCEDURE

A list of subcontractors is maintained. 

A copy of the certificate and analyte list for subcontractors may be maintained as 

evidence of compliance. A current list of licensed parameters for any Arizona certified 

lab is accessible on the ADHS website 

https://app.azdhs.gov/BFS/LABS/ELBIS/ArizonaCertifiedLabs/.

 

The laboratory notifies the client of the intent to subcontract the work in writing. 

When possible, the laboratory gains the approval of the client to subcontract their work 

prior to implementation, preferably in writing.

The laboratory performing the subcontracted work is identified in the final report. The 

laboratory assumes responsibility to the client for the subcontractor’s work, except in the 

case where a client or a regulating authority specified which subcontractor is to be used.
5-12-12 Rev.7 21 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 9 – PURCHASING SERVICES AND SUPPLIES

Policy

The laboratory ensures that purchased supplies and services that affect the quality of 

environmental tests are of the required or specified quality by using approved suppliers 

and products.

Policy

The laboratory has procedures for purchasing, receiving, and storage of supplies that 

affect the quality of environmental tests.

PROCEDURE

The unit chemist specialist or the Lab Director perform reviews and approves the 

supplier of services and supplies and approves technical content of purchasing 

documents prior to ordering. 

Evaluation of suppliers is accomplished by ensuring the supplier ships the product or 

material ordered and that the material is of the appropriate quality by signing packing 

slips or other supply receipt documents. The purchasing documents contain the data 

that adequately describe the services and supplies ordered.

The laboratory keeps a list of approved suppliers.

On Demand Items (Items not on a purchase order)

Three Bids are taken on each order. Each item requested must meet quality 

specifications as required in the SOPs. A statement and a signature line are included on 

the purchase order to indicate that the items requested meet quality specifications (like 

specific grades mentioned in SOPs).

Bid Items (Items from a multi-year purchase order)-

Purchase Orders are required for similar or repetitive purchases of more than $1,000 

during any one fiscal year period or for purchases with an aggregate cost (including 

freight, tax, etc.) of more than $4,999.99. Purchase Orders may either be DepartmentOnly or County wide.

All Bid orders are tracked in Pima Core, the county financial applications program.

Procedure for Receipt of Supplies

Supplies received are reconciled against the packing list and inspected for damage, 

distributed to the appropriate individuals, departments or storage areas. Supplies 

received are stored according to manufacturer’s instructions, laboratory SOP, or test 

method specifications.

Bid items are received in PimaCore when they are physically received.
5-12-12 Rev.7 22 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 10 – SERVICE TO THE CLIENT

The laboratory collaborates with clients and/or their representatives in clarifying their 

requests and in monitoring of the laboratory performance related to their work. Each 

request is reviewed to determine the nature of the request and the laboratory's ability to 

comply with the request within the confines of prevailing statutes and/or regulations 

without risk to the confidentiality of other clients.

10.1 Client Confidentiality 

Policy

As a government entity, all records are available to the public. Confidentiality 

may not be promised or assumed.

SECTION 11 – COMPLAINTS

The purpose of this section is to assure that customer complaints are addressed and 

corrected. This includes requests to verify results or analytical data.

Policy

The Laboratory Director reviews all complaints and determines appropriate action.

PROCEDURE

All customer complaints are documented by the person receiving the complaint and 

addressed by appropriate personnel. If it is determined that a complaint is without merit, 

it is documented, and the client is contacted. If it is determined that the complaint has 

merit, a corrective action is initiated. See Section 13 for corrective action procedures.
5-12-12 Rev.7 23 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 12 – CONTROL OF NON-CONFORMING WORK

NON-CONFORMING WORK is work that does not meet acceptance criteria or requirements. 

Non-conformances can include unacceptable quality control results (see Section 24 

Assuring the Quality of Results) or departures from standard operating procedures or 

test methods. Requests for departures from laboratory procedures are approved by the 

unit chemist specialist and documented.

POLICY

The policy for control of non-conforming work is to identify the non-conformance, 

determine if it will be permitted, and take appropriate action. All employees have the 

authority to stop work on samples when any aspect of the process does not conform to 

laboratory requirements.

PROCEDURE

The responsibilities and authorities for the management of non-conforming work are 

detailed in the text below. The procedure for investigating and taking associated 

corrective actions of non-conforming work are described in Section 13. 

The unit evaluates the significance of the nonconforming work, and takes corrective 

action immediately. The client is notified if their data has been impacted. Resumption of 

work after non-conformance is authorized by the unit chemist specialist. 

Employees immediately notify the appropriate unit chemist specialist of any nonconformance. The unit chemist specialist reviews the significance of nonconformance 

and develops a course of action. Customers are notified within one business day if data 

is questionable.
5-12-12 Rev.7 24 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 13 – CORRECTIVE ACTION

CORRECTIVE ACTION is the action taken to eliminate the causes of an existing 

nonconformity, defect, or other undesirable situation in order to prevent recurrence. 

POLICY

Deficiencies cited in external assessments, internal quality audits, data reviews, 

complaints, or managerial reviews are documented and require corrective action. 

Corrective actions taken are appropriate for the magnitude of the problem and the 

degree of risk. 

PROCEDURE

The unit chemist specialist is responsible for initiating corrective action on routine data 

reviews. The unit chemist specialist is responsible for monitoring and recording 

corrective actions.

All deficiencies are investigated and a corrective action plan developed and 

implemented if determined necessary. The implementation is monitored for 

effectiveness. 

Specific corrective action protocols specified in test methods may override general 

corrective action procedures specified in this manual. 

13.1 Selection and Implementation of Corrective Actions

ROOT CAUSE is the condition or event that, if corrected or eliminated, would 

prevent the recurrence of a deficiency. 

POLICY

Once an exceedence or nonconformance is noted, the first action is an 

investigation to determine the root cause. Records are maintained in Y:\Lab 

Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab\Corrective Action of nonconformance requiring 

corrective action to show that the root cause(s) was investigated, and includes 

the results of the investigation.

Where uncertainty arises regarding the best approach for analysis of the cause 

of exceedences that require corrective action, appropriate personnel will 

recommend corrective actions to be initiated.

The appropriate unit Chemist Specialist ensures that corrective actions are 

discharged within the agreed upon time frame. 

13.2 Monitoring of Corrective Action

POLICY
5-12-12 Rev.7 25 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Appropriate personnel will monitor implementation and documentation of the 

corrective action to assure that the corrective actions were effective. 

Procedure

The unit chemist specialist enters corrective Actions into correct file in Y:\Lab 

Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab\Corrective Action . Quality Assurance Personnel or 

designees will follow-up in four to six weeks to ensure corrective action is 

effective. If the problem still exists and was not fixed, the process will start again.

13.3 Technical Corrective Action

CAUSE ANALYSIS in corrective action investigates the root cause of the problem. 

POLICY

Sample data associated with a failed quality control are evaluated for the need to 

be reanalyzed or qualified. 

Procedure

Unacceptable quality control results are documented, and if the evaluation 

requires cause analysis, the cause and solution are recorded.

The analyst is responsible for initiating or recommending corrective actions and 

ensuring that exceedences of quality control acceptance criteria are documented.

Analysts routinely implement corrective actions for data with unacceptable QC 

measures. First level correction may include re-analysis without further 

assessment. If the test method SOPs addresses the specific actions to take, they 

are followed. Otherwise, corrective actions start with assessment of the cause of 

the problem.

unit Chemist Specialist review corrective action reports and suggest 

improvements, alternative approaches, and procedures where needed. If the 

data reported are affected adversely by the nonconformance, the client is notified 

in writing.

The discovery of a non-conformance for results that have already been reported 

to the client must be immediately evaluated for significance of the nonconformance, its acceptability to the client, and determination of the appropriate 

corrective action. 

13.4 Exceptionally Permitting Departures from Documented Policies and 

Procedures

POLICY

The laboratory allows the release of non-conforming data only with approval by 

the appropriate unit chemist specialist or their designee on a case-by-case basis. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 26 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Planned departures from procedures or policies do not require audits or 

investigations.

Procedure

Permitted departures for non-conformances, such as QC failures, are fully 

documented and include the reason for the departure, the affected SOP(s), the 

impact of the departure on the data, and the data itself. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 27 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 14 – PREVENTIVE ACTION

PREVENTIVE ACTION, rather than corrective action, aims at minimizing or eliminating 

inferior data quality or other non-conformance through scheduled maintenance and 

review, before the non-conformance occurs. 

Preventive action includes, but is not limited to, review of QC data to identify quality 

trends, regularly scheduled staff quality meetings, annual budget reviews, annual 

managerial reviews, scheduled column trimming, running a new LIMS system in tandem 

with the old system to assure at least one working system, and other actions taken to 

prevent problems. 

All employees have the authority to recommend preventive action procedures, however 

management is responsible for implementing preventive action.
5-12-12 Rev.7 28 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 15 – CONTROL OF RECORDS

RECORDS are a subset of documents, usually data recordings that include annotations, 

such as daily refrigerator temperatures posted to a laboratory form, lists, spreadsheets, 

or analyst notes on a chromatogram. Records may be on any form of media, including 

electronic and hard copy. Records allow for the historical reconstruction of laboratory 

activities related to sample-handling and analysis.

POLICY

The laboratory maintains a record system appropriate to its needs, records all 

laboratory activities, and complies with applicable standards or regulations as required. 

PROCEDURE

The laboratory retains all original observations, calculations and derived data, 

calibration records, and a copy of the test report for ten years. The CRAO lab at the 

WESC facility will maintain two years on-site and maintain eight years at the Pima 

County Records Retention Center where data can be retrieved within 24 hours.

Note: Retained records must contain the following information:

 Identity of personnel involved in sampling, sample receipt, preparation, or 

testing;

 Information related to equipment, test methods, sample receipt, sample 

preparation, and data verification;

 Record-keeping system that facilitates retrieval of information for verification or 

inspection;

 Changes to records are signed or initialed by laboratory staff and includes the 

reason for signature or initials, such as “reviewed by” or “sampled by”;

 Records, except those generated by automated systems, are generated 

directly, promptly, and legibly in permanent ink;

 Entries are not obliterated by methods such as erasures, over-writings, or 

markings. All changes are made by one line marked through the entry with the

entry signed or initialed and dated by the individual making the change;

 Changes to electronic records are tracked through the data system audit 

tracking system or by notations made in the electronic system. 

Records of all procedures to which a sample is subjected while in the possession of the 

laboratory are kept.

15.1 Records Management and Storage

POLICY

Records, including electronic records, are easy to retrieve, legible, and protected 

from deterioration or damage; held secure and in confidence; and are available 

to accrediting authorities for a minimum of ten years.
5-12-12 Rev.7 29 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

POLICY

The laboratory maintains a record management system for control of laboratory 

notebooks, instrument logbooks, standards logbooks, and records for data 

reduction, validation, storage, and reporting. 

POLICY 

Archived information and access logs are protected against fire, theft, loss, 

environmental deterioration, vermin, and in the case of electronic records, 

electronic or magnetic sources.

POLICY

In the event that the laboratory transfers ownership or goes out of business, 

records are maintained or transferred according to the clients’ instructions.

Procedure

All electronic records are backed-up weekly by Information Technology. Access 

to protected records is limited to laboratory management or their designees to 

prevent unauthorized access or amendment.

Identification: Records are uniquely identified.

Collection: Observations, data and calculations are recorded at the time they are 

made. When mistakes are made in technical records, each mistake is crossed 

out with a single line (not erased, made illegible, or deleted) and the correct value 

entered alongside. Corrections are signed or initialed by the person making the 

correction. For electronic systems, all changes are tracked by the audit trail or by 

added notes. When changes are made to technical records for reasons other 

than for correction of transcription errors, the reason for the change is recorded 

on the document.

Storage: All records stored on electronic media are supported by the hardware 

and software required for retrieval and have hard-copy or write-protected backup 

copies.

Filing: Records are filed promptly and in an organized fashion.

Disposal: Records are disposed of according to applicable regulation, client 

request, or after ten years.

15.2 Legal Chain of Custody Records

EVIDENTIARY SAMPLE DATA are used as legal evidence. The CRAO lab processes 

all compliance samples submitted into the laboratory or contracted to another lab 

with an official Chain of Custody to maintain the transfer as uncompromised.
5-12-12 Rev.7 30 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 16 – AUDITS AND MANAGEMENT REVIEW

AUDITS measure laboratory performance and verify compliance with accreditation/ 

certification and project requirements. Audits specifically provide management with an 

on-going assessment of the quality system. They are also instrumental in identifying 

areas where improvement in the quality system will increase the reliability of data. 

Audits are of four main types: internal, external, performance, and system. 

Notification of clients for events that cast doubt on the validity of the results is completed 

within one working week of the results being reviewed. See SOP 9.21 Exceedence

Report Procedure For AZPDES/NPDES, App Permits, Reuse, And IWC Ordinances

16.1 Internal Audits

POLICY

The laboratory conducts internal audits of its quality systems activities, including 

data integrity, and the use of trained and qualified personnel at least annually. 

Personnel may not audit their own activities except when it can be demonstrated 

that an effective audit will be carried out. 

Procedure

Annually, the laboratory prepares a schedule of internal audits to be performed 

during the year. These audits verify compliance with the requirements of the 

quality system, including analytical methods, SOPs, ethics policies, other 

laboratory policies, and the EL-VI-2009 TNI Standard. 

It is the responsibility of the Quality Assurance Officer to plan and organize audits 

as required by the schedule and requested by management.

The area audited, the audit findings, and corrective actions are recorded.

All investigations that result in findings of inappropriate activity are documented 

and include any disciplinary actions involved, corrective actions taken, and all 

appropriate notifications of clients.

Clients are notified promptly, in writing, when audit findings cast doubt on the 

validity of the data.

Audits are reviewed after completion to assure that corrective actions were 

implemented and effective.

16.2 External Audits

POLICY

It is the laboratory’s policy to cooperate and assist with all external audits, 

whether performed by clients or an accrediting authority. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 31 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

POLICY

All external audits are fully documented and tracked to closure. ADHS currently 

performs on-site audits on a biennial review.

Procedure

Management ensures that all areas of the laboratory are accessible to auditors 

as applicable and that appropriate personnel are available to assist in conducting 

the audit.

Any findings related to an external audit follow corrective action procedures. 

Management ensures that corrective actions are carried out within the timeframe 

specified by the auditor(s). EL-VI-2009 TNI rules currently specify that a written 

Corrective Action Plan is submitted within 30 days from the date of the initial 

Report of Findings.

16.3 Performance Audits

POLICY

The laboratory defines holding time for PT or QC samples as beginning when the 

vial is opened.

Performance audits may be Proficiency Test Samples, internal single-blind 

samples, double-blind samples through a provider or client, or anything that tests 

the performance of the analyst and method.

The policy and procedures for Proficiency Test Samples are discussed in SOP 

9.6, Distribution of Performance Evaluation Samples.

16.4 System Audits and Management Reviews

POLICY

Laboratory management reviews the quality system and maintains records of 

review findings and actions.

Procedure

The quality system is reviewed annually, and findings are recorded. Managers 

assure that actions are performed within agreed time frames.

Internal Audits may review:

 The suitability of policies and procedures

 Reports from managerial and supervisory personnel

 The outcome of recent internal audits
5-12-12 Rev.7 32 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 Corrective and preventive actions

 Assessments by external bodies

 The results of interlaboratory comparisons or Proficiency Tests

 Changes in the volume and type of the work

 Client feedback

 Complaints

 Other relevant factors, such as:

o Quality control activities

o Resources

o Staff training

Findings from management reviews are recorded. These records ensure that 

corrective actions are completed in one month.
5-12-12 Rev.7 33 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 17 – PERSONNEL, TRAINING, AND DATA INTEGRITY

17.1 Job DescriptionsFor more information see 4.2.

POLICY

Job descriptions are available for all positions that manage, perform, or verify 

work affecting data quality, and are located at http://www.pima.gov/hr/salary.

Procedure

Job descriptions include the specific tasks, minimum education and 

qualifications, skills, and experience required for each position. 

17.2 Data Integrity and Ethics 

DATA INTEGRITY is the result of the processes that together assure valid data of 

known and documented quality. 

Data integrity and ethics procedures in the laboratory include training, signed, 

and dated integrity documentation for all laboratory employees, periodic 

monitoring of data integrity, and written SOP 9.1.

POLICY

Technical managers uphold the spirit and intent by supporting integrity 

procedures, by enforcing data integrity procedures, and by signing and dating the 

data integrity procedure training forms.

POLICY

Data integrity procedures and evidence of inappropriate actions are reviewed 

annually or through regularly scheduled internal audits, and are updated by 

management.

POLICY

The mechanism for confidential reporting of ethics and data integrity issues is (1) 

unrestricted access to senior management, (2) an assurance that personnel will 

not be treated unfairly for reporting instances of ethics and data integrity 

breaches, and (3) anonymous reporting.

POLICY

Employees are required to understand, through training and review of quality 

systems documents that any infractions of the laboratory data integrity 

procedures will result in a detailed investigation that could lead to very serious 

consequences such as immediate termination, or civil/criminal prosecution. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 34 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

POLICY 

Any potential data integrity issue is handled confidentially until a follow-up 

evaluation, full investigation, or other appropriate actions have been completed 

and the issues clarified. Inappropriate activities are documented, including 

disciplinary actions, corrective actions, and notifications of clients, if applicable. 

These documents are maintained for a minimum of 5 years. 

Procedure

Any determination for detailed investigation of data integrity issues must be 

communicated to senior management. Allegations are investigated and remain 

confidential to the extent necessary. 

Documentation for all investigations that result in findings of inappropriate activity 

include any disciplinary actions involved, corrective actions taken, and all 

appropriate notifications of clients.

Data integrity procedures are reviewed annually and are periodically monitored 

through in-depth data review, records review, or other thorough check processes.

For more information, see SOP 9.1, Laboratory Ethics Policy.

17.3 Data Integrity and Ethics Training

POLICY

Data integrity training is provided for all employees initially upon hire and 

annually thereafter.

Procedure

Attendance at an initial data integrity training (part of new employee orientation) 

and the annual refresher training is recorded with a signature attendance sheet 

or other form of documentation that demonstrates all staff has participated and 

understands their obligations related to data integrity.

Training records regarding data integrity and ethics are signed and dated by 

senior management.

When contracted technical or support personnel are used, management is 

responsible for ensuring that they are trained to the laboratory’s quality system 

and data integrity procedures, competent to perform the assigned tasks, and 

appropriately supervised.

Topics covered are provided in writing and provided to all trainees.

17.4 General Training
5-12-12 Rev.7 35 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

POLICY

All personnel are appropriately trained and competent in their assigned tasks 

before they contribute to functions that can affect data quality. It is 

management’s responsibility to assure personnel are trained. 

POLICY

Only trained personnel are authorized to perform specific tasks.

POLICY

Training records are kept on individual training forms. 

Procedure

New staff members are given introductory training and orientation upon arrival. 

Training is documented by signature sheets of all who attended.

Attendance at training sessions is documented on signature sheets.

The initial training for a new task contains the following steps:

 All documentation involved with a new and unfamiliar task is read and 

understood by the trainee.

 Training is under the direct supervision of a qualified senior analyst. During 

the time the analyst is training, the trainee may sign laboratory notebooks or 

logbooks, but laboratory notebooks must be cosigned by the senior analyst, 

who is responsible for the data generated.

 The trainee demonstrates competency in the new task before they can 

operate independently. The competency for a test method is accomplished by 

a demonstration of capability as indicated in Section 19. Approval of 

competency is noted by the initials or signature of the qualified senior analyst 

on the training form.

 Each step of the training process is documented.

Ongoing training will consist of the following:

 The analyst attests, through signature that they have read, understood, and 

agreed to perform the latest version of the Quality Manual and any method 

SOP’s that the analyst performs.

 Annually, the analyst shows continued proficiency in each method they 

perform.

 Other training as determined by management.

 Proof of acceptable on-going training is documented by the annual 

demonstrations of capability for each analyst and each method.
5-12-12 Rev.7 36 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 18 – ACCOMMODATIONS & ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

POLICY

Laboratory facilities are designed and organized to facilitate testing of environmental 

samples. Environmental conditions are monitored to ensure that conditions do not 

invalidate results or adversely affect the required quality of any measurement.

POLICY 

Environmental tests are stopped when the environmental conditions jeopardize the 

results. 

POLICY

Access to, and use of areas affecting the quality of the environmental tests is controlled 

by restriction of areas to authorized personnel only. 

POLICY

The laboratory workspaces are adequate for their use, and appropriately clean to 

support environmental testing and ensure an unencumbered work area.

PROCEDURE

Laboratory space is arranged to minimize cross-contamination between incompatible 

areas of the laboratory. Please see Appendix A for CRAO Lab Floor Plans.

If the laboratory environment is required to be controlled by method or regulation, the 

adherence is recorded. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 37 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 19 – TEST METHODS AND METHOD VALIDATION

POLICY

A method is validated before it is put into use. All methods are published or 

documented.

19.1 Demonstration of Capability (DOC)

A DEMONSTRATION OF CAPABILITY (DOC) is a procedure to establish the ability of 

the analyst to generate data of acceptable accuracy and precision. 

WORK CELLS consist of analysts with specifically defined tasks who together 

perform the method. Work cells together meet specified acceptance criteria and 

demonstrations of capability.

POLICY

The laboratory confirms that it is capable of generating data of acceptable 

accuracy and precision on all methods before employing them. 

PROCEDURE

The DOC is documented and kept in the training files for each analyst. 

A DOC is performed for each analyte whenever the method, analysts, analytes, 

or instrument type is changed.

The unit Chemist Specialist certifies that technical staff members in their area of 

expertise are trained and authorized to perform all tests for which we are 

accredited by signing the DOC form. 

The process for DOC is documented in SOP 9.36, Demonstration of Capability. 

19.2 On-Going (or Continued) Proficiency 

After the demonstration of capability is completed, on-going proficiency is 

maintained and demonstrated at least annually through the analysis of either 

single-blind samples, performing another DOC, or use of four consecutive 

laboratory control samples compared to pre-determined acceptance limits for 

precision and accuracy. This is documented in the training file of each analyst 

and in each unit by the unit supervisor. 

19.3 Initial Test Method Evaluation

For chemical analyses, the INITIAL TEST METHOD EVALUATION involves the 

determination of the Limit of Detection (LOD) (also called Method Detection Limit 

or MDL), confirmation of the Limit of Quantitation (LOQ) (also called Practical 
5-12-12 Rev.7 38 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Quantitation Limit or PQL), an evaluation of precision and bias, and an evaluation 

of the selectivity of the method. 

19.3.1 Limit of Detection (LOD) or Method Detection Limit (MDL)

The LOD/ MDL is an estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that an 

analytical process can reliably detect. An LOD/MDL is analyte-and matrix specific 

and may be laboratory-dependent. 

19.3.2 Limit of Quantitation (LOQ) or Practical Quantitaion Limit (PQL) 

The LOQ/PQL or is an estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that can 

be reported with a specified degree of confidence. 

POLICY

If an LOD/MDL study is not performed, concentrations less than the Limit of 

Quantitation are not reported, are reported as less than the PQL, or reported with 

a qualifier.

POLICY

The lowest calibration standard is equal to the LOQ/PQL. 

POLICY

The LOQ/PQL will always be greater than the LOD/MDL. 

POLICY

The LOD/MDL must be current.

PROCEDURE

LOQ/PQLs are determined from a quality system matrix using all sample 

processing steps, when there is a change in the test method or instruments 

affects sensitivity.

LODs/MDLs are run by a Method Detection Level study according to 40CFR, 

Part 136, Appendix B and use the MDL as the LOD.

The LOQ/PQL is the lowest standard in the calibration curve. 

19.3.3 Precision and Bias

PRECISION is the degree to which a set of observations or measurements of the 

same property, obtained under similar conditions, conform to themselves. 

Precision is usually expressed as standard deviation, variance, or range, in either 

absolute or relative terms.

BIAS is the systematic error that contributes to the difference between the mean 

of a significant number of test results and the accepted reference value. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 39 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

POLICY

Precision and bias are determined for standard and non-standard methods.

PROCEDURE

Precision and bias are determined for standard methods through the 

performance of a Demonstration of Capability. 

Precision and bias using non-standard, modified standard or laboratorydeveloped methods are compared to the criteria established by the client (when 

requested), the method, or the laboratory.

Replicate spikes in a quality system matrix are analyzed according the 

procedures outlined in the 2009 TNI Standard where applicable.

19.3.4 Selectivity

SELECTIVITY is the capability of a test method or instrument to respond to a target 

substance or constituent in the presence of non-target substances (EPA-QAD).

POLICY

The laboratory evaluates selectivity through procedures defined in the test 

method SOPs.

19.4 Estimation of Uncertainty

ESTIMATION OF UNCERTAINTY consists of the sum (combining the components) of 

the uncertainties of the numerous steps of the analytical process, including, but 

not limited to, sample plan variability, spatial and temporal sample variation, 

sample heterogeneity, calibration/calibration check variability, extraction 

variability, and weighing variability. 

PROCEDURE

If requested on certain projects, the laboratory estimates uncertainty using the 

three times standard deviation calculated from routine quality control samples, 

where applicable.

19.5 Laboratory-Developed or Non-Standard Method Validation

POLICY

Laboratory developed, modified standard methods, and non-standard methods 

require method validation.

PROCEDURE
5-12-12 Rev.7 40 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

METHOD VALIDATION is the confirmation by examination and the provision of 

objective evidence that the particular requirements for a specific intended use are 

fulfilled (EL-VI2009 TNI Standard).

POLICY

Where applicable, the laboratory validates non-standard methods, laboratorydesigned/developed methods, standard methods used outside their published 

scope, and amplifications and modifications of standard methods to confirm that 

the methods are fit for the intended use. 

POLICY

The range and accuracy of the values obtainable from validated methods (e.g. 

the uncertainty of the results, detection limit, selectivity of the method, linearity, 

limit of repeatability and/or reproducibility, robustness against external influences 

and/or cross-sensitivity against interference from the matrix of the sample/test 

object), is assessed for the intended use and whether it is relevant to the clients' 

needs.

PROCEDURE

The laboratory’s method validation procedures may conform to the EPA’s Tier 1, 

2 or 3 Validations Procedures,

http://water.epa.gov/scitech/methods/cwa/atp/flex.cfm.

The laboratory records method validation results, the procedure used for the 

validation, and a statement as to whether the method is fit for the intended use. 

19.6 Control of Data 

POLICY

All calculations and all relevant data are subject to appropriate checks in a 

systematic manner.

POLICY

Commercial off-the-shelf software (e.g. word processing, database and statistical 

programs) used within the designed application range is considered sufficiently 

validated when in-house programming is not used. 

PROCEDURE

The laboratory assures that computers and software are protected, maintained, 

and secure through measures such as documentation, locked access, and 

control of the laboratory environment.

Each laboratory member has his or her own user name and password for 

Windows & LIMS. The pass-words are changed at intervals set up by the 

administrators of the programs. 

Computers left unattended for 15 minutes are locked to avoid unauthorized users 
5-12-12 Rev.7 41 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

accessing the computer. 

The lab drive on ‘Y:\Lab Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab' is accessible to lab and Data 

Management personnel (DM) only. Each user has a personal directory that only 

that person can access. Training records on the ‘Y:\Lab Svcs\_Shared 

Data\Labdrive' are accessible by the Laboratory Director, the unit Chemist 

Specialists, QA auditors and the file administrator.

To insure that reported data is free from transcription errors, instruments that are 

automated directly import data into LIMS. The remainder of the data in LIMS is 

checked by the unit Chemist Specialist or their designee against the raw data for 

errors. 

Quality control measures are reviewed by the analyst and unit Chemist 

Specialists before data is approved in LIMS.

Transcription error procedure

a) Transcription and calculation errors are minimized through data review and 

through periodic review of data reduction processes.

b) Quality control results are reviewed by the analyst and by authorized 

personnel (such as the supervisor or peer). The results are evaluated for 

consistency, trend, or feasibility before data are released to the client. 

c) Manual integrations and any analytical notes are reviewed for integrity and 

justification prior to the release of data.

The laboratory assures that computers, user-developed computer software, 

automated equipment, or microprocessors used for the acquisition, processing, 

recording, reporting, storage, or retrieval of environmental test data are:

a) Documented in sufficient detail and validated as being adequate for use; 

b) Protected for integrity and confidentiality of data entry or collection, data 

storage, data transmission and data processing; 

c) Maintained to ensure proper functioning and are provided with the 

environmental and operating conditions necessary to maintain the integrity of 

environmental test data; and 

d) Held secure including the prevention of unauthorized access to, and the 

unauthorized amendment of, computer records.
5-12-12 Rev.7 42 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 20 – EQUIPMENT 

20.1 General Equipment Requirements

POLICY

The laboratory provides all the necessary equipment required for the correct 

performance of the scope of environmental testing presented in this Quality 

Manual. 

POLICY

All equipment and software used for testing and sampling is capable of achieving 

the accuracy required and complies with the specifications of the environmental 

test method as specified in the laboratory SOP. 

POLICY

Equipment is operated only by authorized personnel.

POLICY

The laboratory procedure for safe handling, transport, storage, use and planned 

maintenance of measuring equipment to ensure proper functioning and in order 

to prevent contamination or deterioration is found in the specific instrument 

manuals and in the method SOPs. 

PROCEDURE

Up-to-date instructions on the use and maintenance of equipment (including any 

relevant manuals provided by the manufacturer of the equipment) are readily 

available for use by laboratory personnel.

All equipment is calibrated or checked before being placed into use to ensure 

that it meets laboratory specifications and the relevant standard specifications.

Test equipment, including hardware and software, are safeguarded from 

adjustments which would invalidate the test results measures by limiting access 

to the equipment and using password protection where possible. 

Equipment that has been subject to overloading, mishandling, given suspect 

results, or been shown to be defective or outside specifications is taken out of 

service, isolated to prevent its use, or clearly labeled as being out of service until 

it has been shown to function properly. If it is shown that previous tests are 

affected, then procedures for non-conforming work are followed.

When equipment is needed for a test that is outside of permanent control of the 

laboratory, the lab ensures the equipment meets the requirements of this manual 

prior to its use by inspecting or otherwise testing it.
5-12-12 Rev.7 43 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Each item of equipment and the software used for testing and significant to the 

results is uniquely identified and records of equipment and software are 

maintained. This information includes the following:

a) Identity of the equipment and its software;

b) Manufacturer’s name, type identification, serial number or other unique 

identifier;

c) Checks that equipment complies with specifications of applicable tests;

d) Current location;

e) Manufacturer’s instructions, if available, or a reference to their location;

f) Dates, results and copies of reports and certificates of all calibrations, 

adjustments, acceptance criteria, and the due date of next calibration;

g) Maintenance plan where appropriate, and maintenance carried out to date; 

documentation on all routine and non-routine maintenance activities and 

reference material verifications;

h) Any damage, malfunction, modification or repair to the equipment;

i) Date received and date placed into service (if available); and

j) Condition when received, if available (new, used, reconditioned).

See appendices F, G, H, and I for inventory lists.
5-12-12 Rev.7 44 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

20.2 Support Equipment

SUPPORT EQUIPMENT includes, but is not limited to: balances, ovens, refrigerators, 

freezers, incubators, water baths, temperature measuring devices, volumetric 

dispensing devices, and thermal/pressure sample preparation devices.

POLICY

All support equipment is maintained in proper working order and records are kept 

of all repair and maintenance activities, including service calls.

PROCEDURE

All raw data records are retained to document equipment performance. These 

records include logbooks, data sheets, or equipment computer files. 

All support equipment is calibrated or verified annually over the entire range of 

use using NIST traceable references where available. The results of the 

calibration of support equipment are within specifications or (1) the equipment is 

removed from service until repaired, or (2) records are maintained of correction 

factors to correct all measurements.

Support equipment such as balances, ovens, refrigerators, freezers, and water 

baths are checked with a NIST traceable reference if available, each day prior to 

use, to ensure they are operating within the expected range for the application for 

which the equipment is to be used. 

Mechanical volumetric dispensing equipment, including burettes (except Class A 

glassware), is checked for accuracy the day of use for primary standards, or 

quarterly, whichever is more frequent.

Glass micro-liter syringes have a certificate attesting to the established accuracy. 

If the certificate of accuracy for glass micro-liter syringes is not available, the 

accuracy of the syringe is demonstrated upon receipt and documented.

For chemical tests that use autoclaves, the temperature, cycle time, and 

pressure is documented by use of chemical indicators or temperature recorders 

and pressure gauges.

For microbiology analyses, records for autoclaves used in the laboratory are 

required for the following:

 Initial performance of the autoclave functional properties (supplier by the 

installer);
5-12-12 Rev.7 45 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 Temperature demonstration of sterilization continuous monitoring device or 

maximum registering temperature;

 For every cycle, record date, contents, maximum temperature reached, 

pressure, time in sterilization mode, total run time, and analysts initials;

 Quarterly check of autoclave timing device against a stopwatch; and

 Annual maintenance check to include a pressure check and calibration of 

temperature device.
5-12-12 Rev.7 46 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

20.2.1 Support Equipment Maintenance

Regular maintenance of support equipment, such as balances is conducted at 

least annually.

Maintenance on other support equipment, such as ovens, refrigerators, and 

thermometers is conducted on an as needed basis. 

Records of maintenance to support equipment are documented in Instrument 

Maintenance Logs. Each piece of support equipment has its own logbook. 

20.2.2 Support Equipment Calibration

Calibration requirements for analytical support equipment are found in the table 

below. For analytical instrumentation, the calibration requirements are found in 

the method SOPs

Table 20.2 - 2 Calibration And Maintenance

Instrument Activity Frequency Documentation

Balance 1. Clean.

2. Check alignment.

3. Check with working

 weight.

4. Check with 

reference weights.

5.Service Contract.

1. Before use.

2. Before use.

3. Before use.

4. Monthly.

5. Annually.

Worksheet/log 

book.

Post annual service 

date on balance.

ASTM Class 1 

Weights

1. Only use for the 

intended purpose

2. Use plastic forceps 

to handle.

3.Keep in case.

4. Re-calibrate. Once every year. File certificate.

Thermometers:

1. Glass and 

electronic 

2. Dial 

thermometers

Check at the 

temperature used, 

against a reference 

NIST certified 

thermometer 

1. Annually for 

glass and 

electronic, 

twice a year 

for Coliform 

thermometers

2. Quarterly for 

dial 

thermometers 

See SOP 9.25

Calibration factor 

and date of 

calibration on 

thermometer and 

worksheet/log book
5-12-12 Rev.7 47 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Table 20.2 - 2 Calibration And Maintenance

Instrument Activity Frequency Documentation

pH meters Calibration:

1. pH buffer aliquot are 

used only once.

2.Buffers used for 3 

point calibration will 

bracket the pH of the 

media, reagent, or 

sample tested.

Daily before use. Worksheet/log 

book.

pH probe Maintenance:

Use manufacturer’s 

specifications.

As needed. Worksheet/log 

book.

Automatic or 

digital type 

pipettes

Calibrate for accuracy 

and precision using 

reagent water and 

analytical balance.

See SOP 9.14

Before use, if 

used for 1

Standards.

Worksheet/logbook

Refrigerators, 

Freezers, and 

BOD incubators

1. Thermometers are 

immersed in liquid to 

the appropriate 

immersion line.

2. The thermometers 

are graduated in 

increments of 1C or 

less.

Temperatures 

are recorded 

each day in use.

See SOP 9.25, 

9.30

Correction factor 

Worksheet/log 

book.

Sterilizer 1. Use a maximumtemperatureregistering 

thermometer or a 

continuous recording 

device.

1.Weekly. Worksheet/log 

book.

2. Use spore strips or 

ampoules.

2. One sterilizing 

cycle per 

month.

3. Maintenance of 

autoclave by service 

contract.

3. Annually.

4.Timing Autoclave 

cycle.

4.Quarterly Worksheet/log 

book.
5-12-12 Rev.7 48 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Table 20.2 - 2 Calibration And Maintenance

Instrument Activity Frequency Documentation

5. Hot air ovens must 

maintain a stable 

temperature of 

170C - 180C for at 

least two hours

5. Checked Daily Worksheet/log 

book.

Microbiological 

incubators, and 

water baths

1. Thermometers in 

each unit are 

immersed in liquid to 

the appropriate 

immersion line.

2. The thermometers 

will be graduated in 

increments of 0.5C 

(0.2C increments for 

tests which are 

incubated at 44.5C) 

or less.

Temperature of 

incubators and 

water baths will 

be recorded 

twice a day for 

each day in use 

with readings 

separated by at 

least four hours

Worksheet/log 

book

DO probe Maintenance as specify 

by manufacturer

As needed Worksheet/log 

book
5-12-12 Rev.7 49 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

20.3 Analytical Equipment

20.3.1 Maintenance for Analytical Equipment

POLICY

All equipment is properly maintained, inspected, and cleaned. 

PROCEDURE

Maintenance of analytical instruments and other equipment may include regularly 

scheduled preventive maintenance or maintenance on an as-needed basis due 

to instrument malfunction and is documented in Instrument Maintenance Logs, 

which become part of the laboratory’s permanent records.

Equipment that is Out of Service must clearly be marked as such by the 

equipment operator or analyst or removed out of the laboratory area, when 

practicable.

Required maintenance may be specified in the corresponding method SOPs or in 

specific SOPs written to cover only maintenance, as listed below in the table.
5-12-12 Rev.7 50 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Table 20.3-1 Analytical Equipment Maintenance

Instrument Procedure Frequency

Leeman Mercury 

Analyzer

See SOP 5.7.5

Check tubing for wear

Replacing the liquid-gas separator

Lubricate the auto-sampler arm with oil

Daily

As required

ICP

See SOP 5.7.4

Check pump tubing

Check nebulizer torch and injector tip

Check sample tube is not plugged

Verify that there is no aerosol 

cohesion within the mixing chamber

Check waste level, Check torch 

Clean the dust screens on Power 

supplies, Camera refrigeration unit, & 

Water chiller.

Back up files and instrument 

configuration files

Defrost camera

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

As required

As required

As required

ICPMS Clean the surface of the equipment

Check Drain Vessel, empty if needed

Check pump tubing and replace if 

necessary

Clean and inspect the torch

Clean and inspect the cone

Clean and inspect the snout and 

bonnet

Replace pump tubing

Clean and inspect the spray chamber

Clean and inspect the nebulizer

Clean and inspect the cooling air intake 

filter

Inspect the state of the induction coil

Check the water level in the water 

cooler

Perform a Wavelength Calibration

Clean and inspect water filter 

Daily

Daily

Daily

Weekly

Weekly

Weekly

Weekly

Monthly

Monthly

Monthly

Monthly

Monthly

Monthly

Every 6 month

Auto Analyzers Clean sampler

Check all tubing

Record manifold temperature

Daily

Daily

Heated procedures

GC/MS Analyzer bake-out

Analyzer cleaning

Resolution adjustment

As required

As required

As required
5-12-12 Rev.7 51 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Table 20.3-1 Analytical Equipment Maintenance

Instrument Procedure Frequency

COMPUTER SYSTEM AND PRINTER:

Air filter cleaning

Change data system air filter

Printer head carriage lubrication

Paper sprocket cleaning

Drive belt lubrication

As required

As required

As required

As required

As required

Gas 

Chromatograph

Check air, H2, and He tank levels

Open make up, air and H2

Change septum 

Daily

Daily

Weekly

Balances Working weight check

Clean pan and check if level

Field service

Calibrated weight check

Daily, when used

Daily 

At least annually

Monthly

Deionized/Distilled

Water

Check Levels on Storage Tanks

Check UV disinfection lights

Record flow rate

Record Resistivity

Note which pump is on

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Daily

Drying Ovens Temperature monitoring

Temperature adjustments

Daily 

As required

Refrigerators/

Freezers

Temperature monitoring

Temperature adjustment

Daily

As required 

pH/Specific Ion

Meter

Calibration/check slope

Clean electrode

Daily

As required

Water Baths Water replaced Daily or as needed
5-12-12 Rev.7 52 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

20.3.2 Initial Instrument Calibration

Initial instrument calibration and continuing instrument calibration verification are 

an important part of ensuring data of known and documented quality. If more 

stringent calibration requirements are included in a mandated method or by 

regulation, those calibration requirements override any requirements outlined 

here or in laboratory SOPs. Generally, instrument calibrations are provided in 

test methods. Calibration Training is available on the ADHS website 

http://www.azdhs.gov/lab/license/tech/calibration-training/index.htm.

POLICY

All initial instrument calibrations are verified with a standard obtained from a 

second source traceable to a national standard when commercially available. If a 

second source is not available, a standard prepared from a separate lot may be 

used as long as the manufacturer can demonstrate the lot was prepared 

independently from other lots purchased. 

POLICY

If the reference or mandated method does not specify the number of calibration 

standards to use, the minimum number is three, not including blanks or a zero 

standard.

POLICY

Any samples that are analyzed after an unacceptable initial calibration are reanalyzed or the data are reported with qualifiers, appropriate to the scope of the 

unacceptable condition.

POLICY

Quantitation is always determined from the initial calibration unless the test 

method or applicable regulations require quantitation from the continuing 

calibration. 

POLICY

The lowest calibration standard is the lowest concentration for which quantitative 

results can be reported without qualification. The lowest calibration standard is 

equal to the Limit of Quantitation and is greater than the limit of detection.

POLICY

The highest calibration standard is the highest concentration for which 

quantitative results can be reported.

POLICY

Data reported that are greater than the highest calibration standard without 

dilution are considered to be an estimate and are reported with a qualifier code 
5-12-12 Rev.7 53 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

and explained in the case narrative. 

PROCEDURE

Initial instrument calibration includes calculations, integrations, acceptance 

criteria, and associated statistics referenced in the test method SOP.

Sufficient raw data records are collected to allow reconstruction of the initial 

instrument calibration. These include, at a minimum, calibration date, test 

method, instrument, analysis date, analyte names, analysts signature or initials, 

concentration and response, calibration curve or response factor, or unique 

equation or coefficient used to reduce instrument responses to concentration.

Calibration date and expiration date (when recalibration is due) is recorded for 

equipment requiring calibration, where practicable.

Acceptance criteria are listed in the method SOP.

Corrective actions are performed when the initial calibration results are outside 

acceptance criteria. Calibration points are not dropped from the middle of the 

curve unless the cause is determined and documented. If the cause cannot be 

determined, the calibration curve is re-prepared. If the low or high calibration 

point is dropped from the curve, the working curve is adjusted and sample results 

outside the curve are qualified. 

Results that are less than the lower calibration standard are considered to have 

increased uncertainty, and are either reported with a qualifier code or explained 

in the case narrative.

Results that are greater than the highest calibration standard are either diluted to 

within the calibration range, or considered to be an estimate; and are reported 

with a qualifier code and explained in the case narrative.

For instrumentation where single point calibration is recommended by 

manufacturer’s instructions, such as with some ICP and ICP/MS technologies 

(with a zero and single point calibration), the following apply:

a) For single point plus zero blank calibrations, the zero point and the single 

point standard are analyzed prior to the analysis of samples, and the linear 

range of the instrument established by analyzing a series of standards, one of 

which is at the lowest quantitation level.

b) Zero blank and single point calibration standards are analyzed with each 

analytical batch for methods where they are specified.

c) A standard corresponding to the limit of quantitation is analyzed with each 

analytical batch and must meet established acceptance criteria when using 

single point plus zero blank calibrations.
5-12-12 Rev.7 54 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

d) The linearity of single point plus zero blank calibrations is verified at a 

frequency established by the method or the manufacturer.

20.3.3 Continuing Instrument Calibration

POLICY

The validity of the initial calibration is verified prior to sample analysis by use of a 

continuing instrument calibration verification (CCV) standard.

POLICY

Corrective action is initiated for continuing instrument calibration verification 

results that are outside of acceptance criteria. 

PROCEDURE

Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed at the beginning and 

end of each analytical batch, except for instances when an internal standard is 

used. For methods employing internal standards, only one verification may be 

performed at the beginning of the analytical batch. 

Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed whenever it is 

expected that the analytical system may be out of calibration or might not meet 

verification acceptance criteria.

Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed when the time period 

for calibration or the most recent calibration verification has expired.

Continuing instrument calibration verification is performed for all analytical 

systems that have a calibration verification requirement.

Calibration is verified for each compound, element, or other discrete chemical 

species. 

The calculations and associated statistics for continuing instrument calibration 

are included or referenced in the test method SOP. 

Sufficient raw data records are retained to allow reconstruction of the continuing 

instrument calibration verification. Continuing instrument calibration verification 

records connect the continuing verification date to the initial instrument 

calibration.

Acceptance criteria for continuing instrument calibration verification is referenced 

in the test method SOP.

Some methods require a PQL/LOQ or method reporting level calibration 

verification standard (CRL). The acceptance criteria is either specified in the 
5-12-12 Rev.7 55 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

referenced method, or the laboratory uses the ADHS default acceptance criteria 

of 50-150% recovery (See Appendix Q, Exhibit II, Section E).

A second source calibration verification (SCV) may also be analyzed per the 

referenced method. Depending on the method it may be equivalent to the 

ICV/CCV or LFB. The method SOP would specify the acceptance criteria.

If routine corrective action for continuing instrument calibration verification 

fails to produce a second consecutive (immediate) calibration verification within 

acceptance criteria, then a new calibration is performed or acceptable 

performance is demonstrated after corrective action with two consecutive 

calibration verifications.

For any samples analyzed on a system with an unacceptable calibration, some 

results may be useable if qualified and under the following conditions:

a) If the acceptance criteria are exceeded high (high bias) and the associated 

samples are below detection, then those sample results that are non-detects 

may be reported as non-detects.

b) If the acceptance criteria are exceeded low (low bias) and there are samples 

that exceed the maximum regulatory limit, then those exceeding the 

regulatory limit may be reported.
5-12-12 Rev.7 56 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 21 – MEASUREMENT TRACEABILITY

Measurement quality assurance comes in part from traceability of standards to certified 

materials. 

POLICY

All equipment used that affects the quality of test results are calibrated prior being put 

into service and on a continuing basis. These calibrations are traceable to national 

standards of measurement where available. 

POLICY

Measurements from laboratory equipment provide the uncertainty required by test 

method or client. 

POLICY

If traceability of measurements to SI units is not possible or not relevant, evidence for 

correlation of results through inter-laboratory comparisons, proficiency testing, or 

independent analysis is provided.

PROCEDURE

All equipment that affects the quality of test results are calibrated according to the 

minimum frequency suggested by the manufacturer, by regulation, by method, or as 

needed.

Clients can verify that required uncertainty is achieved by reviewing the internal quality 

control data, if requested.

21.1 Reference Standards 

REFERENCE STANDARDS are standards of the highest quality available at a given 

location, from which measurements are derived. 

POLICY

Reference Standards, such as ASTM Class 1 weights, are used for calibration 

only and for no other purpose unless it is shown that their performance as 

reference standards will not be invalidated. 

PROCEDURE

Reference standards, such as ASTM Class 1 weights, are calibrated by an entity 

that can provide traceability to national or international standards.

The following reference standards are sent out to be calibrated to a national 

standard:

a) Class 1 weights are sent out for calibration every 12 months.

b) Reference thermometers are sent out for calibration every 12 months.
5-12-12 Rev.7 57 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

21.2 Reference Materials

REFERENCE MATERIALS are substances that have concentrations that are 

sufficiently well established to use for calibration or as a frame of reference.

POLICY

Reference materials, where commercially available, are traceable to national 

standards of measurement, or to Certified Reference Materials, usually by a 

Certificate of Analysis. 

POLICY

Internal reference materials, such as working standards or intermediate stock 

solutions, are checked as far as technically and economically possible.

PROCEDURE

Purchased Reference Materials require a Certificate of Analysis.

Internal Reference Materials, such as working standards and intermediate stock 

solutions, are checked according to the SOP. 

a) Internal thermometers are checked annually against the NIST certified 

reference thermometer.

b) Working class weights are checked against Class 1 weights monthly.

21.3 Transport and Storage of Reference Standards and Materials

POLICY

The laboratory handles and transports reference standards and materials in a 

way that protects their integrity. 

PROCEDURE

Reference standard and material integrity is protected by separation from 

incompatible materials and/or minimizing exposure to degrading environments or 

materials. 

Reference standards and materials are stored according to manufacturer’s 

recommendations and separately from working standards or samples.

21.4 Labeling of Reference Standards, Reagents, and Materials 

POLICY

Reference standards and materials are tracked from purchase, receipt, and 

storage through disposal LIMS.
5-12-12 Rev.7 58 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

POLICY

Reagent quality is verified before use.

PROCEDURE

Records for all standards, reagents, reference materials, and media include:

1. The manufacturer/vendor name (or traceability to purchased stocks or 

neat compounds).

2. The manufacturer’s Certificate of Analysis or purity (if supplied).

3. The date of receipt.

4. Reference to the method of preparation.

5. Date of preparation.

6. Where it is stored.

7. An expiration date after which the material shall not be used (unless its 

reliability is verified by the laboratory). It may be documented elsewhere if 

referenced.

8. Preparer’s initials (if prepared).

9. Dates used.

In methods where the purity of reagents is not specified, analytical reagent grade 

is used. If the purity is specified, that is the minimum acceptable grade. Purity is 

verified and documented according to Section 9, Purchasing, Services, and 

Supplies.

All containers of standards, reagents, or materials, whether original or prepared, 

are labeled with an expiration date and tracked through LIMS.

All containers of prepared standards and reference materials have a preparation 

date and unique identifier. This laboratory uses LIMS assigned numbers.

Standard preparation records are kept in LIMS and indicate traceability to 

purchased stocks or neat compounds, reference to the method of preparation, 

date of preparation, expiration date, and preparer's initials.

Prepared reagents are verified to meet the requirements of the test method 

according to each SOP. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 59 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 22 – SAMPLE MANAGEMENT

22.1 Sample Receipt

PROCEDURE 

When samples are received at the laboratory, their condition is documented, they 

are given unique identifiers, and they are logged into the LIMS.

Sample location is tracked in LIMS or in a laboratory notebook. Most samples 

are delivered to sample storage, room 1085. Analysts then sign the samples in 

and out of sample storage for analysis and disposal. Samples with a short 

holding time may be delivered directly to the unit. 

22.2 Sample Acceptance

POLICY

The minimum conditions a sample must meet on receipt are:

 Preservation type,

 Bottle type

 Sample integrity

 Full required documentation (sample ID, location, date and time of 

collection, sampler name, sample type, and analysis requested).

 Holding time

If these conditions are not met, the client is contacted prior to any further 

processing. 

PROCEDURE

The laboratory checks samples for the conditions above, where appropriate, to 

evaluate sample acceptance. 

The following preservation checks are performed and documented upon receipt:

Thermal preservation:

a) For temperature preservation, the temperature must be within ± 2°C unless 

otherwise stated. 

b) For samples that require preservation at 4°C, the acceptable range is “from 

just above freezing to 6°C”.

c) Samples that are delivered to the lab the same day as they are collected are 

likely not to have reached a fully chilled temperature. This is acceptable if 

there is evidence that chilling has begun. 

d) Record on the receipt form if ice is present and the temperature.
5-12-12 Rev.7 60 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

The following preservation checks are performed and documented upon receipt 

in the unit:

Chlorine checks:

a) Microbiological samples from chlorinated water systems do not require a 

chlorine check if -

 Sufficient sodium thiosulfate is present (to neutralize 5mg/L chlorine for 

drinking water and 15 mg/L chlorine for wastewater).

 One container from each batch containers is checked for efficacy of the 

sodium thiosulfate for 15-mg/L chlorine for wastewater.

 Chlorine residual is checked in the field and documented.

pH checks:

b) The pH of samples requiring acid/base preservation is checked upon 

sample receipt or upon initiation of analysis.

The sample acceptance policy is available to sample collection personnel, and 

emphasizes the need for use of water resistant ink, use of appropriate 

containers, and adherence to holding times, sample volume requirements, and 

what to do with compromised samples.

Sample submission sheets from the field are maintained by the samplers.

If the checks performed upon sample receipt indicate the criteria are not met, 

then 1) the sample is rejected as agreed with the client, 2) the decision to 

proceed is documented and agreed upon with the client, 3) the condition is noted 

on the Chain of Custody form and/or lab receipt documents, and 4) the data are 

qualified in the report.

22.3 Sample Identification

POLICY

Samples, including subsamples, extracts, are uniquely identified in a permanent 

chronological record in LIMS to prevent mix-up and to document receipt of all 

sample containers.

PROCEDURE

Samples are assigned sequential numbers that reference more detailed 

information kept in the LIMS.

See SOP 9.2.1, Receiving Samples And Logging Samples Into LIMS, for more 

information.
5-12-12 Rev.7 61 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

The following information is collected in LIMS for each bottle:

a) Client or project name

b) Date and time of sampling

c) Date and time of receipt at lab

d) Unique laboratory identification number

e) Unique field LIMS number

f) Initials of recorder

g) Analyses requested

h) Comments regarding rejection (if any).

22.4 Sample Storage

PROCEDURE

Storage conditions are monitored for any required criteria, verified, and the 

verification recorded in logbooks. This includes temperature.

Samples are held secure, as required. Samples are stored apart from standards, 

reagents, food or potentially contaminating sources, and such that crosscontamination is minimized. All portions of samples, including extracts, 

digestates, leachates, or any product of the sample is maintained according to 

the required conditions.

22.5 Sample Disposal

POLICY

Samples are disposed of according to Federal, State and local regulations.

Procedures for the disposal of samples, digestates, leachates, and extracts are 

contained in the appropriate SOP.

Sample Storage, Disposition, and Disposal

Sample Disposal Policy: ERLN samples must be retained for 60 days. Daily 

WRF samples are disposed of the day the analysis is complete. All other 

samples are disposed of after the result is released unless a client requests it be 

stored longer. 

 After sample analysis the samples are returned to their original location in the 

refrigerator. A red stick-on dot is placed on the container signifying that they 

have been analyzed for all parameters requested.

 The unit supervisors will review the source of the sample to determine if any of 

the released sample reports should have the samples retained.
5-12-12 Rev.7 62 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

 The unit supervisors will review the result of the samples to ensure there are no 

hazardous waste samples.

 The unit supervisors prepare a list of samples for disposal.

 Any Hazardous waste samples must be given to the CHO.

 The unit supervisors will ensure the samples are disposed.

 A record of when and how the samples were disposed shall be maintained.

 All bacterial samples are autoclaved before disposal.

 Sample digestions containing HF are neutralized before disposal.

HEALTH AND SAFETY WARNINGS

- Each sample should be treated as a potential health hazard. Appropriate PPE must be 

worn, and safety procedures as prescribed in the Chemical Hygiene Plan must be 

observed.

22.6 Sample Transport

POLICY

Samples that are transported under the responsibility of the laboratory, where 

necessary, are done so safely and according to storage conditions. This includes 

moving bottles within the laboratory. Specific safety operations are addressed 

outside of this document.

22.7 Sampling Records

Micro/Wet Chemistry personnel perform sampling for the daily AZPDES discrete 

samples at Roger and Ina for chlorine, dissolved oxygen, temperature, pH, and 

E. coli testing 365 days per year. Sampling is performed according to SOP 6.6, 

Daily Permit Grab Sampling For Chlorine, Dissolved Oxygen, E. Coli, Ph, And 

Temperature.

Operations personnel, IWC personnel, and Water Quality Personnel perform 

other sampling necessary.

POLICY

Sampling plans are based, whenever it is reasonable or requested by the client, 

on appropriate statistical sampling methods. 

Sub-sampling within the laboratory is performed according to SOP 9.2.3, Monthly 

QA Plant Pour-off and distribution of Discharge Monitoring Report Samples.

Relevant sampling data are recorded, including the 1) sampling procedure used, 

2) the identification of the sampler, 3) environmental conditions (if relevant), 4) 

the sampling location, and 5) the statistics upon which the sampling procedures 

are based. 
5-12-12 Rev.7 63 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

SECTION 23 – QUALITY OF TEST RESULTS

23.1 Essential Quality Control Procedures

POLICY

All essential quality control elements are collected and assessed on a continuing 

basis.

POLICY

The qualities of test results are recorded in such a way that trends are 

detectable, and where practicable, are statistically evaluated. 

POLICY

For test methods that do not provide acceptance criteria for an essential quality 

control element or where no regulatory criteria exist, acceptance criteria are 

developed or the ADHS rules default acceptance criteria is adopted (Appendix Q, 

Exhibit II). Control limits are developed using the mean, plus or minus 3 standard 

deviations; or static limits such as +/- 15 percent. These limits can be found in the

SOP for the method.

POLICY

The quality control procedures specified in test methods are followed by 

laboratory personnel. The most stringent of control procedures is used in cases 

where multiple controls are offered. If it is not clear which is the most stringent, 

that mandated by test method or regulation is followed. 

PROCEDURE

To monitor the validity of environmental tests performed, review includes any one 

or combination of the techniques below:

a) Use of certified reference materials or cultures and/or internal quality control 

using secondary reference materials;

b) Participation in proficiency testing programs;

c) Replicate testing using the same or different methods;

d) Retesting of retained samples; and/or

e) Correlation of results for different characteristics of a sample.

Written procedures to monitor quality controls including acceptance criteria are 

located in the test method SOPs, except where noted, and include such 

procedures as:
5-12-12 Rev.7 64 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

a) Use of laboratory control samples and blanks to serve as positive and 

negative controls for chemistry methods;

b) Use of laboratory control samples to monitor test variability of laboratory 

results;

c) Use of calibrations, continuing calibrations, certified reference materials 

and/or PT samples to monitor accuracy of the test method;

d) Measures to monitor test method capability, such as limit of detection, limit of 

quantitation, and/or range of test applicability, such as linearity;

e) Use of regression analysis, internal/external standards, or statistical analysis 

to reduce raw data to final results; 

f) Use of reagents and standards of appropriate quality;

g) Procedures to ensure the selectivity of the test method;

h) Measures to assure constant and consistent test conditions, such as 

temperature, humidity, rotation speed, etc., when required by test method;

i) Use of sterility checks for equipment, media and dilution water for 

microbiology; and

j) Use of positive and negative culture controls for microbiology.

23.2 Internal Quality Control Practices

Analytical data generated with QC samples that fall within prescribed acceptance 

limits indicate the test method is IN CONTROL.

QC samples that fall outside QC limits indicate the test method is OUT OF 

CONTROL (non-conforming) and that corrective action is required or that the data 

are qualified.

POLICY

Detailed QC procedures and QC limits are included in test method standard 

operating procedures (SOPs), or where unspecified in the SOPs, are detailed 

elsewhere. 

POLICY

All QC measures are assessed and evaluated on an on-going basis, so that 

trends are detected.

PROCEDURE

The following general controls are used:

Positive and Negative Controls such as:

a) Blanks (negative)

b) Laboratory control sample or laboratory fortified blanks (positive)
5-12-12 Rev.7 65 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

c) Sterility checks and control cultures (positive and negative).

Selectivity is assured through:

a) Absolute and relative retention times in chromatographic analyses;

b) Two-column confirmation when using non-specific detectors;

c) Use of acceptance criteria for mass-spectral tuning (found in test method 

SOPs);

d) Use of the correct method according to its scope assessed during method 

validation; and

e) Use of reference cultures (positive and negative) from a recognized 

manufacturer (where applicable).

Consistency, Variability, Repeatability, and Accuracy are assured through:

a) Proper installation and operation of instruments according to manufacturer’s 

recommendations or according to the processes used during method 

validation;

b) Monitoring and controlling environmental conditions (temperature, access, 

proximity to potential contaminants);

c) Selection and use of reagents and standards of appropriate quality; and

d) Cleaning glassware appropriate to the level required by the analysis. 

Cleaning procedures not provided in test method SOPs are provided in a 

separate SOP. For microbiology, glassware care includes use of borosilicate 

glassware, use of detergents designed for laboratory use, testing each day for 

alkaline or acid residue with bromthymol blue, and conduct of the Inhibitory 

Residue test when the detergent is changed. 

e) Following SOPs and documenting any deviation, assessing for impact, and 

treating data appropriately; 

f) Testing to define the variability and/or repeatability of the laboratory results, 

such as replicates;

g) Use of measures to assure the accuracy of the test method, including 

calibration and/or continuing calibrations, use of certified reference materials, 

proficiency test samples, or other measures;

Acceptance or rejection criteria are created according to laboratory policy where 

no method or regulatory criteria exist. Acceptance criteria define the boundary for 

the appropriate response from laboratory personnel, such as corrective action, 

reporting with qualifiers, reanalysis, review, and others. 

Test Method Capability is assured through:

a) Establishment of the method detection limit (MDL) where appropriate;
5-12-12 Rev.7 66 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

b) Establishment of the practical quantitation limit (PQL) or reporting level; 

and/or

c) Establishment of the range of applicability such as linearity;

Data reduction is assured to be accurate by:

a) Selection of appropriate formulae to reduce raw data to final results such as 

regression; 

b) Periodic review of data reduction processes to assure applicability;

c) Microbiological calculations, data reduction, and statistical interpretations 

specified by each test method.

The following tables summarize the key elements of a quality control system for a 

laboratory performing chemistry and microbiology testing.

-

Item Frequency Acceptance 

Criteria Corrective action

Negative Control

(Method Blank).

1/batch. Method specific or 

reporting limit.

Qualify data and take 

corrective action.

Positive Control

(Laboratory 

Control Sample).

1/batch or by 

method 

requirement.

Method specific or 

determined by 

laboratory.

Reprocess, reanalyze, 

or qualify data. 

Matrix Spike; 

Matrix Spike 

Duplicates.

Per method 

requirement.

Method specific or 

determined by 

laboratory.

Corrective action and 

qualify data.

Surrogate spikes. Per method 

requirement.

Method specific or 

determined by 

laboratory.

Corrective action and 

qualify data

Matrix Duplicates. Per method 

requirement.

Method specific or 

determined by 

laboratory.

Corrective action and 

qualify data

Continuing 

Calibration 

Verification.

Per method 

requirement.

Method specific or 

determined by the 

laboratory.

Reanalyze standard 

immediately; Corrective 

action
5-12-12 Rev.7 67 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Item Frequency Acceptance 

Criteria Corrective action

Sterility blank Each lot of media prior to 

first use

No growth. Investigate cause

Sterility check 

containers

One container (bottle) for 

each lot or batch 

sterilized.

No growth. Investigate cause

Sterility check 

dilution water

One per batch of dilution 

water.

No growth. Investigate cause

Positive control Pure culture of target 

organisms/ each lot or 

batch of medium (prior to 

first use of medium) 

Positive 

reaction.

Investigate cause.

If necessary reject 

the medium

Negative control Pure culture of non-target 

organisms/each lot or 

batch of medium (prior to 

first use of medium)

Negative 

reaction.

Investigate cause.

If necessary reject 

the medium.

Duplicate colony 

counts (For 

numeric results 

only)

Monthly on one positive 

sample for each month 

performed.

Same analyst 

<5% difference 

between counts

Two analysts 

<10% difference 

between counts

Investigate cause.

Qualify data

1) Microorganisms may be single use preparations or cultures maintained by 

documented procedures that demonstrate the continued purity and viability of the 

organism.
5-12-12 Rev.7 68 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Table 23.2-4 Essential Quality Control Requirements for Microbiology –

Pour Plate Methods Only

Item Frequency Acceptance 

Criteria

Corrective action

Sterility blank 

media

Each lot of media

prior to first use 

minimum one blank 

plate per batch.

Internally 

defined

Investigate cause

Table 23.2-5 Stock Cultures

Item Frequency Handling

Reference cultures Single use Preserved and handled per mfg. 

specifications

Reference culture

Reference stock

Culture stocks to make 

working stocks

Preserved and not refrozen

Handling per mfg specs

Working stocks Not transferred more 

than five times.

Not sub-cultured to 

replace reference stocks

23.3 Method Blanks

POLICY

Contaminated blanks are identified according to the acceptance limits in the test 

method SOPs or laboratory documentation.

POLICY

Samples associated with a contaminated blank are evaluated as to the 

appropriate corrective action for the samples (e.g. reprocessing or data qualifying 

codes). 

PROCEDURE

Our laboratory identifies a blank as contaminated when analyte results are 

greater than two times the MDL or above the reporting limit, as specified in the 

method SOP. 

When a blank is determined to be contaminated, the cause must be investigated 

and measures taken to minimize or eliminate the problem.

Data that are unaffected by the blank contamination (non-detects or other 
5-12-12 Rev.7 69 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

analytes) are reported unqualified.

Sample data that are suspect due to the presence of a contaminated blank are 

reanalyzed, qualified, or deleted.

23.4 Laboratory Control Samples 

LABORATORY FORTIFIED BLANKS, OR CONTROL SAMPLES are prepared from analyte 

free water, and spiked with verified and known amounts of analytes for the 

purpose of establishing precision or bias measurements. Also referred to as 

Blank Spike (BS).

POLICY

Laboratory control samples are analyzed at a frequency mandated by method, 

regulation, or client request, whichever is more stringent.

PROCEDURE

The results of laboratory control samples (LCS) are calculated in percent 

recovery or other appropriate statistical technique that allows comparison to 

established acceptance criteria. The laboratory documents the calculation in the 

test method SOP.

The individual LCS is compared to the acceptance criteria as published in the 

mandated test method, or where there are no established criteria, the laboratory 

established limits or refer to the default limits in the ADHS Rules (Appendix Q, 

Exhibit II). 

23.5 Matrix Spikes and Matrix Spike Duplicates

MATRIX SPIKES (MS and MSD [duplicates]) are environmental samples fortified 

with a known amount of analyte to help assess the affect of the matrix on method 

performance. MS and MSD, when appropriate to the method, are performed at a 

minimum frequency of 5% of the samples.

POLICY

The MS/MSD results are used to help assess the effect of the sample matrix on 

method performance.

PROCEDURE

The laboratory procedure for MS/MSD includes spiking appropriate analytes at 

appropriate concentrations, calculating percent recoveries and relative percent 

difference (RPD), and evaluating and reporting the results. 

Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory uses the mean plus or 

minus three standard deviations as the control limits for MS/MSD or refer to the 
5-12-12 Rev.7 70 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

default limits in the ADHS Rules (Appendix Q, Exhibit II). 

For MS/MSD results outside established criteria corrective action is documented 

or the data are reported with appropriate data qualifying codes.

23.6 Surrogate Spikes

SURROGATES are substances with chemical properties and behaviors similar to 

the analytes of interest used to assess method performance in individual 

samples. 

POLICY

Surrogates are added to all samples (in test methods where surrogate use is 

appropriate) prior to sample preparation or extraction.

PROCEDURE

Surrogate recovery results are compared to the acceptance criteria as published 

in the mandated test method. 

Where there are no established criteria, the laboratory uses the mean plus or 

minus three standard deviations as surrogate control limits or may default to the 

ADHS Rules of 70-130% recovery (Appendix Q, Exhibit II, Section B).

For surrogate results outside established criteria, data are evaluated to 

determine the impact. Corrective actions include qualifying data as appropriate.

23.7 Proficiency Test Samples or Interlaboratory Comparisons

POLICY

The laboratory participates in proficiency test (PT) samples twice per year.

POLICY

The laboratory defines holding time for PT samples as beginning when the vial is 

opened.

POLICY

The laboratory institutes corrective action procedures for failed PT samples. 

POLICY

The laboratory does not share PT samples with other laboratories, does not 

communicate with other laboratories regarding current PT sample results, and 

does not attempt to obtain the assigned value of any PT sample from the PT 

provider.

PROCEDURE
5-12-12 Rev.7 71 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Proficiency Testing (PT) or Proficiency Evaluation (PE) samples (or Performance 

Evaluation Mixture – PEM) are treated as typical samples in the normal 

production process where possible, including the same preparation, calibration, 

quality control and acceptance criteria, sequence of analytical steps, number of 

replicates, and sample log-in. PT samples are not analyzed multiple times unless 

routine environmental samples are analyzed multiple times. 

23.8 Data Review

POLICY

The laboratory reviews data generated in the laboratory for compliance with 

method, laboratory and, where appropriate, client requirements.

POLICY

All data review is documented.

Data Review PROCEDURE 

LIMS and benchsheets are used to record the information required for traceability 

of the analysis. The bench sheets include quality control measurements and 

acceptance criteria. Data is recorded on the bench sheets promptly at the time of 

the analysis, in ink or electronically.

Analysts review sample data and QC information at the time of analysis and 

indicate if the QC parameters meet the acceptance criteria by marking the bench 

sheet or approving it electronically.

The analyst approves, signs or initials and dates the bench sheet to indicate that 

they have performed the step indicated and that the analysis meets acceptance 

criteria or has exceptions that are noted in the bench sheet.

When the analyst has finished the primary analysis review the unit chemist 

specialist or their designee checks the bench sheet for the following items:

a) All required information has been recorded on the bench sheet.

b) QC criteria have been met or exceptions are documented in the bench 

sheet. 

c) Manual calculations are checked for accuracy.

d) When these checks have been completed, the reviewer initials and dates 

the bench sheet to document that the review has been performed.

The bench sheet is used by laboratory personnel to enter the data in LIMS. Any 

exceedences are reported per SOP 9.21, Reporting Exceedences. Data 

Qualifiers, if necessary, are entered into LIMS as per SOP 9.4, Arizona Data 
5-12-12 Rev.7 72 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

Qualifiers. 

The unit chemist specialist verifies the correct number was entered into LIMS 

and approves the result in LIMS.

The Laboratory Director reviews the result and approves the result in LIMS.

DM prints the final report and submits it to the QA Unit for final review. This final 

review verifies that the data is coherent, that QC results are acceptable, QC 

exceptions are appropriately reflected on the final report, and results are in line 

with historical values, if known. At least 10% of Final Reports are QA checked. 

Please see form QA-22, Final Report Check sheet Form, for more information on 

the final report check.

The Laboratory Director or designee signs the final report.

SECTION 24 – REPORTING OF RESULTS

POLICY

The result of each test carried out is reported accurately, clearly, unambiguously, and 

objectively and complies with all specific instructions contained in the test method. 

POLICY

Data are reported without qualification if they are greater than the lowest calibration 

standard, lower than the highest calibration standard, and without compromised sample 

or method integrity.

24.1 Test Reports

POLICY

The report format has been designed to accommodate each type of test 

performed and to minimize the potential for misunderstanding or misuse. 

PROCEDURE

Each test report generated contains the following information (unless not 

required by the client): 

a) A title, such as Test Report or Test Results; 

b) The name and address of the laboratory, the location of the laboratory if 

different from the address, and the phone number and name of a contact 

person; 

c) Unique identification of the test report, such as a serial number, on each page 

and a pagination system that ensures that each page is recognized as part of 

the test report and a clear identification of the end of the report, such as 3 of 

10; 
5-12-12 Rev.7 73 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

d) The name and address of the client if applicable; 

e) The identification of the test method used; 

f) An unambiguous identification of the sample(s), including the client 

identification code; 

g) The date of sample receipt when it is critical to the validity and application of 

the results, date and time of sample collection, dates the tests were 

performed, the time of sample preparation and analysis if the required holding 

time for either activity is less than or equal to 72 hours; 

h) Reference to the sampling plan and procedures used by the laboratory where 

these are relevant to the validity or application of the results; 

i) The test results with failures identified, units of measurement, an indication of 

whether results are calculated on a dry weight or wet weight basis, and for 

Whole Effluent Toxicity, an identification of the statistical package used; 

j) The name, function, and signature or an equivalent electronic identification of 

the person authorizing the test report, and the date of issue; 

k) Certification that the results are in compliance with the EL-VI-2009 TNI 

Standard if accredited to be in compliance or provide reasons and/or 

justification if they do not comply. 

l) The ADHS designated License Number AZO159 (WESC Lab).

24.2 Supplemental Test Report Information 

When necessary for interpretation of the results or when requested by the client, 

test reports include the following additional information:

a) Deviations from, additions to, or exclusions from the test method, 

information on specific test conditions, such as environmental conditions,

and any non-standard conditions that may have affected the quality of the 

results, and any information on the use and definitions of data qualifiers; 

b) A statement of compliance/non-compliance when requirements of the 

quality systems are not met, including identification of test results that did 

not meet sample acceptance requirements, such as holding time, 

preservation, etc.; 

c) Where applicable and when requested by the client, a statement on the 

estimated uncertainty of the measurement; 

d) Additional information which may be required by specific methods or 

client; 

e) Qualification of results with values outside the working range. 

For test reports that contain the results of sampling, the following is provided if 

necessary for the interpretation of the results:

a) The date of sampling; 
5-12-12 Rev.7 74 of 74 CRAO QUALITY MANUAL

b) Unambiguous identification of the material sampled; 

c) The locations of the sampling

d) A reference to the sampling plan and procedures used; 

e) Details of any environmental conditions during sampling that may affect 

the interpretations of the test results; 

f) Any standard or other specification for the sampling method or procedure, 

and deviations, additions to or exclusions from the specification 

concerned. 

24.3 Environmental Testing Obtained from Subcontractors 

Test results obtained from test performed by subcontractors are clearly identified 

on the test report by subcontractor name and/or accreditation number.

The test results from subcontractors are reported in writing or electronically. A 

copy of the subcontractors report is attached to the final report.

24.4 Electronic Transmission of Results 

POLICY

All test results transmitted by telephone, fax, telex, e-mail, or other electronic 

means comply with the requirements of this Quality Manual and associated 

procedures to protect the confidentiality and proprietary rights of the client. 

24.5 Amendments to Test Reports 

POLICY

Material amendments to a test report after it has been issued are made only in 

the form of another document or data transfer. All supplemental reports meet all 

the requirements for the initial report and the requirements of this Quality Manual. 

PROCEDURE

Amended test reports are titled, “Revision # ” or an equivalent form of wording to 

assure they can be differentiated from other test reports.

When it is necessary to issue a complete new report, the new report is uniquely 

identified and contains a reference to the original that it replaces.
Appendix A – Laboratory Floor Plan

5-12-12 A1 of 1 
Appendix C

5-12-12 C-1 of 1
APPENDIX D

Final Report Example

5/12/12 D1 of 2
APPENDIX D

Final Report Example

5/12/12 D2 of 2
APPENDIX E

SOPS

5-12-12 E1 of 5

 

2.1 Sample Container Preparation

2.2 Sample Bottle Preservation

2.5 Preparation of Trip Blanks for 40 ml Clear Septum Vials

2.8 Contract Lab Sample Shipping

5.1.1.1 Glassware Washing - Metals

5.1.1.2 Glassware Washing -Nonmetals

5.1.1.3 Cleaning Procedure for Pipettes

5.1.4 Detection Limits

5.1.5 Criteria for Accepting and Rejecting Data

5.2.2 Mercury - EPA Method 245.1 and 7470A, Mercury

5.5.3.1 SM4500-CN- G. Cyanides Amenable to Chlorination after Distillation

5.5.3.2 SM 4500-CN- E, Cyanide, Total for Water and Wastewater Samples, 

Colorimetric Method (LACHAT) 

5.5.3.3 Method SM 4500-CN- C, Cyanide Distillation 

5.5.4 Fluoride – Ion Selective Electrode (SM 4500-F C)

5.5.5 Hardness by Calculation - SM 2340 B

5.5.11 Method SM4500-SO4

2-

F, Sulfate Automated Methylthymol Blue (Lachat)

5.5.13 Sulfide - SM 4500-S F

5.5.14 Pretreatment and Analysis of Turbid Wastewater Samples, Sulfide, ATP

5.5.15 HACH 8131, Sulfide Methylene Blue Method

5.6.2 ICP Analysis of Solid Wastes, Method 6010B

5.6.7 EPA Method 7471A, Mercury in Sludge and Sediment 

5.7.4 ICP Maintenance

5.7.5 Maintenance Procedures for Leeman PS 200 Automated Mercury Analyzer

5.8 Quality Control Data and Report

5.10 Method of Standard Additions

5.11.1 Inductively Coupled Plasma Emission Spectroscopy (EPA Method 200.7, 

Rev. 4.4) Varian

5.12 CEM Microwave Assisted Acid Digestion of Aqueous Samples and Extracts

5.13 Method EPA 1311, TCLP: Extraction Procedure for Metals

5.15 ICP-MS Analysis of Water and Waste EPA Method 200.8

5.16 Determination of Metals in Ambient Particulate Matter Using Inductively 

Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectroscopy (ICP/MS) EPA IO-3.5
APPENDIX E

SOPS

5-12-12 E2 of 5

 

5.16.1 EPA IO-3.1 Digestion of Ambient Particulate Matter for use with ICP and 

ICP-MS Analysis

5.16.2 Determination of Metals in Ambient Particulate Matter Using Inductively 

Coupled Plasma (ICP) EPA IO-3.4

5.16.3 Preparation of Lead Audit Strips

5.16.4 Method EQL 0510-191, Determination of Lead in TSP using ICPMS with 

Heated Ultrasonic Digestion

5.17.1 ICP-MS Maintenance

5.18 Chloride in Water (Colorimetric, Automate Ferricyanide) SM 4500-Cl-E 

(LACHAT FIA)

5.19 Method SM 4500-NO2 B, Nitrite Nitrogen (Colorimetric Automated 

Diazotization) 

5.20 EPA 353.2, Nitrate/Nitrite Nitrogen (Colorimetric Automated Diazotization) 

(LACHAT FIA)

5.21 Determination of Orthophosphate and Total P by EPA 365.1 (Colorimetric, 

Automated, Ascorbic Acid) 

5.22 EPA Method 350.1 Ammonia Nitrogen (Colorimetric Automated Phenate 

Lachat)

5.22.1 Method SM4500-NH3 D Ammonia-Ion Selective Electrode

5.23 Determination of Total Kjeldahl Nitrogen (TKN) EPA 351.2, SemiAutomated Colorimetry 

5.24 Method SM 4500-Cr D, Hexavalent Chromium (Colorimetric)

5.25 For Method 1010A, Ignitability

5.26 Turbidity – EPA 180.1 (Nephelometric) Analytical Procedure for Water 

Samples

5.28 Using the Reagent, Solution, & Standard Traceability Feature in Sapphire

6.1.1 SM 2320B Total Alkalinity – Titrametric Method 

6.1.2 Alkalinity - In Digested Sludge (2320B)

6.2.1 SM 5210B Biochemical Oxygen Demand (BOD)

6.3 Hach 8000, Chemical Oxygen Demand

6.4.1 Total Residual Chlorine by Hach Methods

6.4.2 For Hach Method 10014, Total Residual Chlorine

6.5 Multiple-Tube Fermentation Analysis for Fecal Coliforms, SM 9221 A, B, C, 

D, & E

6.5.2 Multiple-Tube Fermentation Analysis for Fecal Coliforms, SM9221 A, B, C & 
APPENDIX E

SOPS

5-12-12 E3 of 5

 

E For Sludges, Soils, Sediments And Muds.

6.5.3 For Method SM 9223B, Total Coliform, Fecal Coliform and E. Coli By Most 

Probable Number or Presence/Absence (IDEXX Colilert, Colilert 18)

6.6 Daily Permit Grab Sampling for Chlorine, Dissolved Oxygen, E. Coli, pH, 

and Temperature.

6.9 Methods SM 2510B and Hach 8160, Specific Conductance (Conductivity)

6.16 Method SM 4500-H

+ B, pH

6.17 For Method SM 2540G, Total Solids & Total Volatile Solids

6.18 For Method 2540 C, Total Dissolved Solids

6.19A For Method EPA 160.5, Settleable Solids 

6.20 For Method SM 2541D & EPA 160.4, Total Suspended Solids & Volatile 

Suspended Solids

6.36 Method SM 4500-O G, Dissolved Oxygen and Hach Method 10360, 

Luminescent Dissolved Oxygen

6.37 Microbiological Media and Sample Collection Bottle Preparation, SM 9020B

6.38 Microbiology Bench Quality Control

6.39 Morning Preparation

6.40 Temperature (SM 2550B), Care and Use of Thermometers

6.41 Stormwater Procedures

7.1 Organic Glassware Washing Procedure

7.2 Method Detection Limits (MDL) Organic Unit

7.9 Total Organic Carbon Analysis (SM 5310C) Persulfate – Ultraviolet 

Oxidation Method

7.10 Volatile Organic Acids

7.11 Sludge Digester Gas Analysis (By Gas Chromatographic Method SM 

2720C)

7.16 Method 1664, Revision A: N-Hexane Extractable Material (HEM, Oil, and 

Grease and Silica Gel Treated N-Hexane Extractable Material (SGT-HEM; 

Non-Polar Material By Extraction and Gravimetry 

8.1 Determination of Volatile Organics in Wastewater by Purge and Trap Gas 

Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometry

8.2 625 Semi-volatiles by GC/MS 

8.2.1 625 Pesticide/PCB by GC/MS

8.2.2 625 Extraction Pesticide/PCB 
APPENDIX E

SOPS

5-12-12 E4 of 5

 

8.3 Determination of Volatile Organics In Groundwater and Municipal Sludge by 

Purge and Trap Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry 

8.4 8270C Semi-Volatile by GC/MS 

8.4.1 8270C Pesticides/PCB by GC/MS

8.7 Determination of 2, 3, 7, 8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-P-Dioxin (2, 3, 7, 8-TCDD) in 

Wastewater and Municipal Sludge by GC/MS

8.8 Determination of Acrolein and Acrylonitrile in Wastewater by Purge and 

Trap Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry

8.9 TCLP Extraction Semi-Volatiles

8.9.1 TCLP Extraction Procedure for Volatile Compounds

9.1 Laboratory Ethics Policy

9.2.1 Receiving Samples and Logging Samples into LIMS

9.2.3 Monthly QA Plant Pour-Off and Distribution of Discharge Monitoring Report 

Samples

9.3.1 Laboratory Water System Maintenance WESC Building-(Formerly named 

DI (Deionized) Water System Maintenance Administration Building)

9.4 Guidelines for the Use of Arizona Data Qualifiers

9.5 Sample Holding Time

9.6 Distribution of Performance Evaluation Samples

9.9.1 Laboratory Balance Calibration and Maintenance

9.14 Calibration of Micro Pipette (Gravimetric)

9.18 Managing Laboratory Standard Operating Procedures

9.20 Adding and Revising Documents

9.21 Not Analyzed, Not Reported, and Exceedance Reporting Procedure for 

AZPDES, APP, Reuse Permits, and IWC Ordinances

9.24 Expression of Results

9.25 Thermometer Calibration, Use, and Maintenance

9.25.1 Operation of Thermometer Calibration Bath

9.26 Quality Control Samples

9.28 Proficiency Testing

9.29 Chain of Custody

9.30 Ice-point Calibration of Reference Thermometers

9.32 Guidelines for Internal Auditing

9.36 Demonstration of Capability
APPENDIX E

SOPS

5-12-12 E5 of 5

 

9.38 Management Review

LS 1 Personal Protective Equipment – Laboratory Gloves

LS 2 Fume Hoods

LS 3 Laboratory Hazardous Waste Disposal

LS 4 Chemical Spills

LS 5 Safe Practices Using HF Acid 

LS 6 Introducing New Chemicals into the Laboratory

LS 7 Safe Handling of Glassware
APPENDIX F ORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5-12-12 F1 of 2 

Asset 

Serial Number 

PC Tag

Item description 

(Make, Model) 

Manufacturer Purpose

ROOM 1079 VOLATILES

114968 GC CP-3800 Varian Volatiles

88895 MS Saturn 2000 Varian Volatiles

US01615907 Purge And Trap Velocity XPT Tekmar Volatiles

VAR12103 Autosampler Archon Varian Volatiles

SN 020905007 Refrigerator/Freezer 

5.5 cu. ft.

Fisher Sci Volatiles

97-935-2 Refrigerator/Freezer 

5.5 cu. ft.

Marvel Volatiles

----- Zero headspace extraction Associated Design & 

Manufg Co.

TCLP

13274

PC-93934

GC/MS CP-3800

Saturn 2000

Varian Volatiles

SN US09030001

PC-116913

Autosampler, Solatek 72 Tekmar Volatiles

US09023002

PC-116912

Purge And Trap, Stratum Tekmar Volatiles

CN11481003 (GC) 

US11493935 (MS)

GC-MS Agilent Volatiles

US11344003 Autosampler/Purge & Trap 

(Foam Sensor)

Teledyne Leeman Volatiles

ROOM 1082 SAMPLE PREP, EXTRACTIONS

PC-97211 SPE-DEX 3000XL Horizon Tech Oil and Grease

PC-97210 SPE-DEX 3000XL Horizon Tech Oil and Grease

PC-97878 SPE-DEX 3000XL Horizon Tech Oil and Grease

1120280108

PC-100696

Analytical Balance Mettler Reagents, Oil 

and Grease

DAA-V132-GB Vacuum Pump (Oil & Grease) GAST Oil and Grease

PC-95390 Solvent Recovery system Horizon Tech Oil & Grease

----- Solvent Evaporator Horizon Tech Oil & Grease

107440 Glassware Oven Grieve Semi-volatiles

PC-54904 Vacuum Oven Fisher Scientific Various

PC-112111 Concentrator Dry Vap Horizon Tech Pesticide

PC-112110 (6) Extractor SPE-DEX 4790 Horizon Tech Pesticide

PC-91606 Liq-Liq Extractor (BNA) Organomation Assoc. Semi-volatiles

PC-91604 Liq-Liq Extractor (BNA) Organomation Assoc.

PC-76874 Liq-Liq Extractor (BNA) Organomation Assoc.

267059-B NANOpure Ultra Pure Water Barnstead Water Purity

PC-83556 Centrifuge, HN-SII IEC

Y10W-689718-YW Refrigerator/Freezer Thermo Sci Revco

0146005901111123 Refrigerator Thermo Sci 

PC-91505 Chiller (BNA) NESLAB
APPENDIX F ORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5-12-12 F2 of 2 

Asset 

Serial Number 

PC Tag

Item description 

(Make, Model) 

Manufacturer Purpose

----- Chiller VWR

ROOM 1083 COMPOUNDS OF EMERGING CONCERN

4024 GC-MS + Auto-sampler Leco

5101 GC-MS + Auto-sampler Leco

Y10W-689720-YW Refrigerator/Freezer Thermo Sci Revco

ROOM 1084 SEMIVOLATILES

C70264250004US

PC-107700

GC/MS 

QP-2010/GC2010

Shimadzu Semi-volatiles

116179 Smart UPS 

Uninterrupted Power Supply

SURT003 Semi-volatiles

PC-95574 Refrigerator/Freezer Fisher Scientific

CN61439038

PC-114465

GC 6890N Agilent Pesticides

PC-114465 GC/MS, Pegasus IV Leco Pesticides

116180 Smart UPS 

Uninterrupted Power Supply

---- Pesticides

911204

PC-83815

Gas Partitioner 

Tremetrics 541GC 

Tremetrics Sludge Gas 

Analysis

C118049 Gas Chromatograph 

GC-2010 Plus

Shimadzu Sludge Gas 

Analysis

HG1100115613 Hydrogen Generator Perkin Elmer

1084 Gas Chromatograph 

FID GC-2014

Shimadzu Volatile Acids

1084 TOC Analyzer, Phoenix 8000 Tekmar Dohrman TOC
APPENDIX G INORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5-12-12 G1 of 2 

Asset or Serial 

Number PC Tag

Item description (make, 

model) & Location

Manufacturer Purpose

ROOM 1063 NUTRIENTS

SN 070500000450 FIA 8500 

W pump

Lachat Nutrients

010797A520 XYZ Auto Sampler

ASX520

Lachat Nutrients

PC 103741 Block Digester Lachat

A83000-1825 FIA 8000 series

W/ pump (SN A82000-612)

Lachat Nutrients

A81010-508 XYZ Auto Sampler

ASX520

Lachat Nutrients

----- FIA 8500 w/ pump) Lachat Nutrients

----- XYZ auto sampler Lachat Nutrients

SN18104358 Analytical Balance PI225D Denver Instr. Weighing

P117368 XS205 Balance Mettler Toledo

B114126748 Balance (top load) Mettler Toledo

B102102312 Balance (side load) Mettler Toledo

SN 1378936

Asset Tag WW000457

DR3800 Spectrophotometer Hach Sulfide

----- DR 2010 

Spectrophotometer

Hach Hexavalent 

Chromium

0146007301111130 Refrigerator #2 Thermo Sci Stds and reagents

0168968101111114 Refrigerator #1 Thermo Sci Stds and reagents

980608-198TS-Z

PC9?469

Heat Block Environmental 

Express

Total Phos

SN 5060262

SN 82000-127

Pump Lachat Back for FIA

ROOM 1064 TRACE METALS PREP

90NML48540-1 Chiller 

HX-150

Neslab 

(Thermo Fisher)

Cooling Instruments

MD5023 Microwave CEM Metals Digestion

PC-000395 Ultra Sonic Cleaner Model 

60/H

Tovatec ELMA Air Filter Lead

PC-000455 Ultra Sonic Cleaner Model 

60/H

Tovatec ELMA Air Filter Lead

257062-9 NANOpure Water Filtration Barnstead Water Purifier

----- Refrigerator 5.5 ft3Thermo Sci

----- Acid Neutralizing System BPE (Burt 

Process 

Equipment)

Acid Neutralization

103510 Mars5 

Microwave Digestion

CEM Metals Digestion

ROOM 1065 TRACE METALS 

PC-116922 ICP 725-ES Varian Metals
APPENDIX G INORGANIC UNIT INVENTORY

5-12-12 G2 of 2 

Asset or Serial 

Number PC Tag

Item description (make, 

model) & Location

Manufacturer Purpose

w/ Chiller & Autosampler

81XN1111702 NexION

300-ICP-MS

Seko In Storeroom

----- Chiller Perkin Elmer In Storeroom

----- Vacuum Pump Seko In Storeroom

81XN1111701 NexION

300-ICP-MS

Seko In Storeroom

----- Chiller Perkin Elmer In Storeroom

----- Vacuum Pump Seko In Storeroom

ROOM 1069 LOW LEVEL Hg PREP

ROOM 1070 LOW LEVEL Hg

----- Low Level Mercury Analyzer Teledyne In Storeroom

ROOM 1071 HIGH LEVEL Hg

112108 Mercury AA Analyzer Hydra 

w/ Autosampler

Teledyne 

Leeman

Mercury HL

----- Hotblock 

SC151-35-Well w/enclosure

Environmental 

Express

Mercury Digestion

INA - TO BE DISCARDED

98310 Mercury AF Analyzer 

Hydra

Teledyne Leeman Mercury LL

86707 Fume Hood (Nutrient 

TKN's)

Labconco Nutrient

Fume Hood 

(Metals/HF )

Labconco Metals

Fume Hood (Mercury 

Digestion per EPA 

245.7)

Labconco Mercury

85167 Lachat FIA Lachat

89062 TJA ICP IRIS 

w/Chiller & 

autosampler

Thermo Fisher Metals Testing

100737 VG PQ Excel 

w/chiller and 

autosampler

Thermo Fisher Metals Testing

88397 MDS 2100 

Microwave Digestion 

System

CEM Corp Metals Samples 

Digestion

72149 MDS 81D Microwave 

Digestion System

CEM Corp Metals Samples 

Digestion

----- Analytical Balance 

A2005

Sartorius Weighing
Appendix H Quality Assurance Inventory

5/12/12 H1 of 2

 

Asset 

Serial number

PC Tag

Item description

(make, model)

Manufacturer Purpose

ROOM 1044 SAMPLE RECEIVING

SN 57BE05603 Digital Copier System, 

printer, scanner, fax 

Bizhub 600 Bldg 1, 

Sample Receiving

Konica/ Minolta Sample Receiving

SN 

0168974201111116

Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

ROOM 1046 BOTTLE PREP

SN 0168 9333 011 

111 01

Refrigerator/Freezer 

Model # 3764A

Thermo Scientific QC Samples 

Ice, Lab Water 

SN 110541833 K Dishwasher

FlaskScrubber 

Model# 442 0331

Labconco Bottle Washing 

SN 110542233 K Dishwasher

FlaskScrubber 

Model# 442 0331

Labconco Bottle Washing 

SN G24626 Thermometer Calibration 

Bath System

Ertco Model TCS200-

35

Thermometer 

Calibration

SN 600111000 Oven 104C Thelco Precision Glassware Drying

ROOM 1065 SAMPLE STORAGE

0168968601111114 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Micro

0168974301111116 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Inorganic

0168972901111115 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Inorganic

0168974101111116 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Inorganic

0168974001111116 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

WETT

0168973001111115 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

WETT
Appendix H Quality Assurance Inventory

5/12/12 H2 of 2

 

Asset 

Serial number

PC Tag

Item description

(make, model)

Manufacturer Purpose

0168968301111114 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Organic

0168968401111114 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Organic

0168980901111117 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Micro

0168981001111117 Refrigerator, 2-door Glass

Model MR49PA-GAEETS

Thermo Scientific Sample Storage

Micro

Asset 

Serial number

PC Tag

Item Description

(Make, Model)

Manufacturer Purpose

ROOM 1035 WAREHOUSING

Pallet Jack

Model 4YX97

Dayton Hauling loads

ROOM 1041 WATER TREATMENT

----- Water Treatment System Culligan Water Purity

ROOM 1043 RECEIVING (LOADING DOCK)

SN 2764-GO-1 Golf Cart, Electric EZ-Go Sample Delivery

MISCELLANEOUS LAB

6LJ05251002 Digital Color System

Studio 5510c

Toshiba Hallway Printer, 

Copier, Scanner, 

Fax
Appendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5-12-12 I1 of 4 

Asset 

Serial Number 

PC Tag

Item Description 

(Make, Model)

Location

Manufacturer Purpose

ROOM 1056 BOD (BIOCHEMICAL OXYGEN DEMAND)

11187 SP1000 Analyzer Skalar BOD 

SN 06143

PC-113819

SP1000 Analyzer Skalar BOD 

11691 Pump Skalar BOD

WL1136003 Waterbath VWR BOD

11J 100031 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Orion DO Analysis

09E 100961 Dissolved Oxygen Meter Orion DO Analysis

SN 06J2165 Dissolved Oxygen Meter YSI DO Analysis

XL94101040 XL25 Accumet pH

021199 3 star meter Orion pH

110643258 K FlaskScrubber Labconco Glassware washer

Y10W689719YW Refrig/Freezer Revco Standards storage

021199 3 star meter Orion pH analysis

ROOM 1056A BOD INCUBATION

SN 2116 Walk-In Incubator (20 

degree)

Environmental 

Growth Chambers

ROOM 1057 COLIFORMS

02721 Tray Sealer IDEXX Coliforms

5315 Quanti-Tray Sealer IDEXX Coliforms

1326983 Ultraviolet Light Cabinet 

CM10

Spectroline Coliforms

1828507 Ultraviolet Light Cabinet 

CM10

Spectroline Coliforms

247341-625 Waterbath

Model 2862

Precision 

Thermo Sci

Coliforms

110643257K FlaskScrubber Labconco Media, Coliforms

ROOM 1057A AUTOCLAVE, INCUBATION

URA010626 Gravity Steam Sterilizer 

Model 422LS

Getinge Coliforms

SN 04B04792

PC-105441

Microprocessor controlled 

Steam Sterilizer model 

422LS

Getinge Coliforms

----- Incubator 35C ThermoSci Coliforms

----- Incubator 35C ThermoSci Coliforms

----- Incubator 35C ThermoSci Coliforms

ROOM 1058 MEDIA

PC 116109 Media Incubator in 

Coliform room (20 

degree)

Thermo Electron Coliforms

271135-3 NANOpure Model 7149 Barnstead Coliforms, BOD
Appendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5-12-12 I2 of 4 

Asset 

Serial Number 

PC Tag

Item Description 

(Make, Model)

Location

Manufacturer Purpose

ThermoSci

----- Accudispense Barnstead

ThermoSci

Coliforms, BOD

B114126756 Balance 

Precision

XP1202S

Mettler Toledo Media

----- Refrigerator ThermoSci Standards,Samples

001130 pH meter

4 Star 

Orion pH, DO

ROOM 1059 SOLIDS, WET CHEMISTRY

New Furnace TVS, TVSS

48818 Centrifuge Model HN-S II Damon/IEC Alkalinity

116954 Thermolyne Type 30428C 

Furnace (550 degree)

Barnstead/ 

Thermolyne

TVS

B015024214 Balance 

Excellence Plus

XP1202S

Mettler Toledo TS, TVS

B114126747 Balance 

Excellence Plus

XP1202S

Mettler Toledo TS, TVS

021117 pH meter

3 star

Orion pH analysis

XL94101043 Accumet XL25 Accumet pH analysis

1154186 Spectrophotmeter 

DR/2800

Hach Chlorine, COD

SN B045085417 Balance

New Classic MF

Model MS 304S/03

Mettler Toledo TSS, TVSS, TDS

116081-337 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

111352-333 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

111354-336 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

113082-339 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

113081-338 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

113824-343 Steam Table Thermo Fisher Sci TS, TDS

4123215A 104 Oven A Heratherm TS, TSS

SN 42132151 Oven 180C Heratherm

Thermo Sci

TDS

0011 Durabath

Waterbath

Baxter TS, TDS

10050C0335 DRB 200

Reactor Black

Hach COD

1231255145 Seven Multi Meter Mettler Toledo pH, Conductivity
Appendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5-12-12 I3 of 4 

Asset 

Serial Number 

PC Tag

Item Description 

(Make, Model)

Location

Manufacturer Purpose

1231275344 Seven Multi Meter Mettler Toledo pH, Conductivity

113687-665 Waterbath Precision

Thermo Sci

Conductivity

110300005632 HQ40d Meter Hach Conductivity

B24947/248910-A-10 3Star Meter Orion Conductivity

3995500 Vacuum pump

Model UN726FTP

KNF Neuberger TDS

5804AL061743 Centrifuge 5804 Eppendorf Alkalinity

----- Centrifuge (back-up) In Storeroom

----- Balance (back-up) In Storeroom

INA OLD LAB (Moving to WESC)

00171 Automatic Pipetting 

Machine

Hamilton Media Preparation

PC 54607 Centrifuge Damon/IEC 

Division

Isolate sample 

matrix

002795 Conductivity Meter, 

Digital Model 115

Orion Conductivity 

Analysis

---------- Dissolved Oxygen Meter

5100

Orion DO Analysis

PC 106153 Incubator 35C "C" VWR Media

1204-007 Refrigerator, 4C

97-915-1

Fisher Cl2

PC48778

PC 47921

Automatic Pipetting 

Machine (2)

Brewer Media Preparation

PC 65534 Incubator 35C "B"

3010

VWR Coliforms

------- pH meter

510

Oakton pH analysis

------- pH meter

520

Orion pH analysis

XL94101040 Accumet XL25 Accumet pH analysis

INA LAB

----- DR/2800 Hach Chlorine

88967

AN 99000014

Labconco Dishwasher Labconco Glassware 

Cleaning

48805-7-9 Walk-In Incubator (20 

degree)

Sherer BOD

48804-6-8 Walk-In Refrigerator (4 

degree)

Sherer Sample Storage
Appendix I Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Inventory

5-12-12 I4 of 4 

INA OLD LAB (To be discarded, or go to Ops)

89693 VWR Model 1370 GM 

Oven (180 degree)

VWR TDS

SN 5600573 Top loading Balance 

FY3000 0.1-3100g

AND Coliform Culture 

Media

SN J8055010 Top loading Balance 

EK200G 0.01-200g

AND TS, TVS

SN1117032037 Analytical Balance 

AG204 0.1mg-210g

Mettler Toledo TSS, TVSS, TDS, 

SN04112981117028 Incubator Model # 

414004-594 

VWR Coliforms

PC 73621 Incubator 35C "A"

1550

VWR Coliforms

PC 87348 Oven 103C

Isotemp

Fisher TS, TSS/VSS, RAS, 

MLSS, Grit

PC 89693

SN 0500597

Oven, 180C

1370 GM

VWR TDS

92080007632 Reactor Heat Block 

16500-10

Hach COD

960500014203 Reactor Heat Block 

16500-10

Hach COD

981000018238 Reactor Heat Block 

16500-10

Hach COD

920900007829 Reactor Heat Block 

16500-10

Hach COD

981000018242 Reactor Heat Block 

16500-10

Hach COD

49263 Steam Table 1437 Boekel TS, TDS

70936 Steam Table 1437 Boekel TS, TDS

Steam Table Precision Scientific TS, TDS

25369 Vacuum Manifold Gelman TSS/VSS, RAS, 

MLSS

98909 Waterbath, 44.5C Linberg Fecal Coliforms
APPENDIX J

PRESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5-12-12 J1 of 4

PARAMETER METHOD PRESERVATION MAXIMUM

HOLDING TIME

CONTAINER

Alkalinity SM 2320B Cool, 4C 14 days 500-1000 ml Plastic or 

Glass

Acrylonitrile/ Acrolein

(AC/AC)

EPA 624 Field-Sodium 

Thiosulfate if Chlorine 

is present. Cool, 4C,

HCl to pH 4-5

3 days w/o 

preservation, 

14 days 

w/preservation

40ml septa vials, 1 40ml 

trip blank

Ammonia (as N) EPA 350.1,

SM4500-NH3 D

Cool, 4C, H2SO4 to 

pH <2

28 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Beryllium (Air filters) Method IO-3.4 dry storage none Air Filters

Biosolids (any 

parameter) ----------------------

Cool to 4C, no 

chemical preservative -------------------- ---------------------------------

Biochemical Oxygen 

Demand (BOD)

SM 5210B Cool, 4C 48 hours 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Chemical Oxygen 

Demand (COD)

HACH 8000 Cool, 4C, H2SO4 to 

pH <2

28 days 500 ml Glass or Plastic

Chloride SM 4500-CL E None Required 28 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Chlorine-Total 

Residual

HACH 10014 None Required Immediately 300ml black glass BOD 

bottle

Coliforms-Fecal SM 9221E

SM 9223B

Cool, 4C,

Na2S2O3, EDTA

6 hours 125-250 ml Sterile

Plastic or Glass

Cyanide, Total SM 4500-CN 

BCE

Cool, 4C, 

10N NaOH to pH >12, 

(0.6g ascorbic acid in 

the presence of 

Chlorine).

14 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Cyanide, Amenable SM 4500-CN G Cool, 4C, 

10N NaOH to pH >12, 

(0.6g ascorbic acid in 

the presence of 

Chlorine).

14 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Dissolved Metals EPA 200.7

EPA 200.8

Filter first, Cool, 4C, 

HNO3 to pH <2

6 months 1 Liter HDPE before 

filtering, 500ml HDPE 

after filtering

Dissolved Oxygen SM 4500-O G None Required Analyze Immediately 300 ml Glass BOD Bottle, 

Glass stopper

Dissolved Organic SM 5310C Cool, 4C, H2SO4 to 28 days (filtered & 120 ml Glass w/ Teflon 
APPENDIX J

PRESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5-12-12 J2 of 4

PARAMETER METHOD PRESERVATION MAXIMUM

HOLDING TIME

CONTAINER

Carbon (DOC) pH <2 preserved) Septa

E.coli by Colilert MPN

Total Coliform by 

Colilert

SM 9223B Cool, 4C,

Na2S2O3, 

6 hours 100 ml Sterile

Plastic or Glass

Fluoride SM 4500 F-C None Required 28 days 1000 ml Plastic

Hardness SM 2340B HNO3 to pH <2 6 months 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Ignitability EPA 1010A None 28 days 1000 ml Amber Glass

Mercury EPA 245.1

EPA 7470A,

EPA 7471A

HNO3 to pH <2 28 days 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Metals/Minerals EPA 200.7, 

EPA 200.8, 

EPA 6010B

HNO3 to pH <2 6 months 500 or 1000ml Plastic or 

Glass

Lead in TSP (Air 

Filters)

EQL 0510-191 dry storage none Air Filters

Nitrate/Nitrite 

(combined result)

EPA 353.2 Cool, 4C, H2SO4 to 

pH <2

28 days 500 ml Glass

Nitrate & Nitrite 

(separate results) or 

Nitrate alone 

EPA 353.2/ SM 

4500-NO2B

Cool, 4C, 

1-unpreserved

1-H2SO4 to pH <2

48 hours

28 days

250 ml Glass

500 ml Glass

Nitrite SM 4500-NO2B, Cool, 4C 48 hours 250 ml Glass 

Nitrogen, Kjeldahl EPA 351.2 Cool, 4C ,H2SO4 to 

pH <2

28 days 500 ml Glass

Oil & Grease EPA 1664A Cool, 4C, HCl to pH 

<2

28 days 1000 ml Glass

Orthophosphate EPA 365.1 Cool, 4C 48 hours 250 ml Glass

Pesticides/PCBs EPA 625 Cool, 4C Field -

Na2S2O3 to be used 

for chlorinated 

samples

7 days until 

extracted; 40 days 

after extraction

1000ml Amber Glass,

Teflon Cap

Petroleum 

Hydrocarbons

EPA 1664A Cool, 4C HCl to pH 

<2

28 days 1000 ml Glass

pH SM 4500-H B None Required Analyze

Immediately

500-1000 ml Glass or 

Polyethylene

Phosphorous (T) EPA 365.1 Cool, 4C H2SO4 to 

pH <2

28 days 250ml glass
APPENDIX J

PRESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5-12-12 J3 of 4

PARAMETER METHOD PRESERVATION MAXIMUM

HOLDING TIME

CONTAINER

Purgeables (VOCs) –

not including AC/AC

EPA 624

EPA 8260

Cool, 4C, may be 

preserved upon 

laboratory receipt

7 days unpreserved

14 days preserved

4 X 40ml septa vials

1 trip blank

Residue, Filterable 

(Total Dissolved 

Solids TDS)

SM 2540C Cool, 4C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Residue, Nonfilterable 

(Total Suspended 

Solids - TSS)

SM 2540D Cool, 4C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Residue, Volatile 

(Total Suspended 

Volatile Solids -TVSS)

EPA 160.4 Cool, 4C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Semi-Volatile 

Organics

(Excluding Pesticides 

&

PCBs)

EPA 625

EPA 8270C

Cool, 4C, Field -

Na2S2O3 to be used 

for chlorinated 

samples

7 days until 

extracted; 40 days 

after extraction

1000 ml Amber Glass, 

Teflon Lined Cap

Sludge Gases – non 

compliance

SM 2720C None Required Analyze immediately 250ml Clear Glass 

Collecting Tube

Specific Conductance SM 2510B Cool, 4C 28 days 125 ml Plastic or Glass

Sulfate SM 4500-SO4 F Cool, 4C 28 days 250, 500, 1000 ml Plastic 

or Glass

Sulfide Hach 8131 (Low)

SM 4500-S F 

(High)

Added in the Field: 

Zinc Acetate,

10N NaOH to pH >9 

7 days 300 ml Glass BOD 

(3 Bottles for High Level)

Toxicity Characteristic 

Leaching Procedure 

(TCLP) Herbicides

EPA 1311 –

Contract Lab

Cool, 4C 7 days until 

extraction; 40 days 

after extraction

1000 ml Glass

TCLP Mercury EPA 1311 Cool, 4C 28 days until 

extraction; 28 days 

after extraction;

1000 ml Glass

TCLP Metals, except 

Mercury

EPA 1311 Cool, 4C 180 days until 

extraction; 180 days 

after extraction

1000 ml Glass

TCLP Pesticides EPA 1311 Cool, 4C 14 days to prepare 1000 ml Glass
APPENDIX J

PRESERVATION AND HOLDING TIMES

5-12-12 J4 of 4

PARAMETER METHOD PRESERVATION MAXIMUM

HOLDING TIME

CONTAINER

leachate;

7 days until 

extraction; 40 days 

after extraction

TCLP Semi Volatile 

Organics

Cool, 4C 14 days to prepare 

leachate;

7 days until 

extraction; 40 days 

after extraction

1000 ml Glass

TCLP Volatile 

Organics

Cool, 4C 14 days until 

extraction, 14 days 

after extraction;

Soil Jars with Septa lids or 

40ml Septa vials

Temperature SM 2550B N.P. Immediately 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Total Organic Carbon 

(TOC)

SM 5310C Cool, 4C, H2SO4 to 

pH <2

28 days 120 ml Amber Glass Vial

Total, Fixed, and 

Volatile Solids in 

Sludge (TS, TVS)

SM 2540G Cool to 4C. 7 days 1000 ml Plastic or Glass

Turbidity, ntu EPA 180.1 Cool, 4C 48 hours 500 ml Plastic or Glass

Volatile Organic Acids 

(VOA) – non 

compliance

SM 6010C None Required ----------------- Analyze immediately
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K1 of 12

ADEQ: The Arizona Department of Environmental Quality.

ADHS: The Arizona Department of Health Services.

Analyte: means the substance or chemical constituent being sought or 

measured in an analytical procedure.

APP: Aquifer Protection Permit issued by Arizona Department of 

Environmental Quality.

ASLAPR- Arizona State Library, Archives and Public Records

Approved method: An analytical test procedure or technique authorized 

by the Department to test for the presence of a particular contaminant or 

characteristic and includes an alternate method approved by the 

Department under R9-14-610(C) and an approved method used with a 

method alteration approved by the Department under R9-14-610(C).

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

AZPDES: Arizona Pollutant Discharge Elimination System

Batch: Environmental Samples that are prepare and or analyzed together 

with the same process and personnel, using the same lot(s) of reagents. A 

batch is composed of one to 20 samples.

BOD: Biological Oxygen Demand.

BNAs: Base, Neutral, Acid Extractable Compounds (See Semi-Volatiles).

Calibration Check: Verification of the ratio of instrument response to 

analyte amount, a calibration check is done by analyzing for analyte 

standards in an appropriate solvent. Calibration check solutions are made 

from a stock solution, which is different from the stock used to prepare 

standards.

Calibration Check Standard: (Continuing Calibration Standard) -

Standard used to determine the state of calibration of an instrument 

between periodic recalibrations.

Calibration model: A mathematical form for a calibration curve.

CHP: Chemical Hygiene Plan.
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K2 of 12

COC: Chain if Custody

Confidence Coefficient: The probability, percent (%), that a 

measurement result will lie within the confidence interval or between the 

confidence limits.

Confidence Interval: Set of possible values within which, the true value 

will lie with a specified level of probability.

Confidence Limit :One of the boundary values defining the confidence 

interval.

Continuing Calibration: (Organic Analysis) Analytical standard run every 

8 to 12 hours as required by the SOP to verify the calibration of the 

GC/MS system.

Continuing Calibration: (Inorganic Analysis) Analytical standard run 

every 10 analytical samples or every 2 hours, whichever is more frequent, 

to verify the calibration of the analytical system.

Continuous Liquid-Liquid Extraction: Used herein synonymously with 

the terms continuous extraction, continuous liquid extraction and liquid 

extraction. This extraction technique involves boiling extraction solvent in

a flask and condensing the solvent above the aqueous sample. The 

condensed solvent drips through the sample, extracting the compounds of 

interest from the aqueous phase.

Control: A lab fortified blank spiked with a known amount of all method 

analytes and processed through the analytical scheme. Controls measure 

accuracy of the procedure.

Correlation Coefficient: A number (r), which indicates the degree of 

dependence between two variables (concentration - absorbance). The 

more dependent they are the closer the value to one. Determined based 

on the least squares line.

CRAO: Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Office

DDT: dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K3 of 12

Decafluorotriphenylphosphine (DFTPP): (Organic Analysis) 

Compound chosen to establish mass spectral instrument performance for 

semi-volatile analysis.

Digestion Log: (Inorganic Analysis) An official record of the sample 

preparation (digestion).

Dissolved Metals: (Inorganic Analysis) Analyte elements, which will pass 

through a 0.45 μm filter.

DOC: Demonstration of Capability or Dissolved Organic Compound.

Dry Weight: The weight of a sample based on percent solids. The weight 

after drying in an oven.

Duplicate: A second aliquot of a sample that is treated the same as the 

original sample in order to determine the precision of the method.

Duplicate Samples: Duplicate samples are two separate samples taken 

from the same source (i.e., in separate containers and analyzed 

independently).

ECD: Electron Capture Detector

EDB: 1,2-Dibromomethane

Effluent: means an outflow, as of a stream that flows out of a facility

Environmental Sample: An environmental sample or field sample is a 

representative sample of any material (aqueous, nonaqueous, or 

multimedia) collected from any source for which determination of 

composition or contamination is requested or required. Environmental 

samples are normally classified as follows:

Drinking Water -- delivered (treated or untreated) water designated

as potable water.

Water/Wastewater -- raw source waters for public drinking water 

supplies, ground waters, municipal influents/effluents, and 

industrial influents/effluents.
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K4 of 12

Biosolids (Sludge) -- municipal sludges and industrial sludges.

Waste / Hazardous waste:- aqueous and nonaqueous liquid wastes, 

chemical solids, contaminated soils, and industrial liquid and 

solid wastes.

EPA: United States Environmental Protection Agency

FID: Flame Ionization detector

Field Blank: Usually an organic or aqueous solution that is as free of 

analyte as possible and is transferred from one vessel to another at the 

sampling site and preserved with the appropriate reagents. This serves 

as a check on reagent and environmental contamination. One field blank 

should be analyzed with each analytical batch or every 20 samples, 

whichever is greater.

Field Measurement: The determination of physical, biological, or 

radiological properties, or chemical constituents; that are measured onsite, close in time and space to the matrices being sampled/measured, 

following accepted test methods. This testing is performed in the field 

outside of a fixed-laboratory or outside of an enclosed structure that 

meets the requirements of a mobile laboratory.

GC: Gas Chromatography

GC/EC: Gas Chromatography/Electron Capture.

GC/MS: Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry.

Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption (GFAA): Atomic absorption, 

which utilizes a graphite cell for excitation.

HEM: n-Hexane extractable material.

Holding Times (Maximum Allowable Holding Times): the 

maximum times that samples may be held prior to analysis and still be 

considered valid or not compromised. (40 CFR Part 136)

HPLC: High Performance Liquid Chromatography.
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K5 of 12

ICP/MS: Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometry.

ID: Identification.

IDOC: Initial demonstration of capability.

Inductively Coupled Plasma (ICP) : A technique for the simultaneous 

or sequential multi-element determination of elements in solution. The 

basis of the method is the measurement of atomic and ionic emission by 

an optical spectroscopic technique. Characteristic atomic and ionic line 

emission spectra are produced by excitation of the sample in a radio 

frequency inductively coupled plasma.

In-House: At the laboratory’s facility.

INTELEX: web-based environmental, quality, health & safety, and 

business performance management database.

Initial Calibration: Analysis of analytical standards for a series of 

different specified concentrations; used to define the linearity and 

dynamic range of the response of the analytical detector or method.

Initial Demonstration of Capability (IDOC): A test performed by an 

analyst, as prescribed by a method, to document the analyst's ability to 

perform the method.

Injection :Introduction of the analytical sample into the instrument

excitation system for the purpose of measuring absorbance, emission, or 

concentration of analyte. May also be referred to as exposure.

Instrument Calibration: (See also Calibration) Analysis of analytical 

standards for a series of different specified concentrations; used to define 

the quantitative response, linearity, and dynamic range of the instrument 

to target analytes.

Instrument Detection Limit (IDL): Determined by multiplying by three 

the standard deviation obtained for the analysis of a standard solution 

(each analyte in reagent water) at a concentration of 3 to 5 times the IDL 

on three nonconsecutive days with seven consecutive measurements per 
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K6 of 12

day.

Interferents: Substances that affect the analysis for the analyte of 

interest.

Internal Standards: Compounds added to the sample after sample 

preparation for qualitative and quantitative instrument analysis; the 

compounds serve to give a standard of retention time and response, 

which is invariant from run-to-run with the instrument.

IPC: Instrument Performance Check

IT: Information Technology

KERP: Kino Ecological Restoration Project

Kilogram (kg): 1000 grams

L or l: liter

LIMS-Laboratory Information Management System, computer software 

that is used in the laboratory for the management of laboratory 

samples.(Wikipedia))

Linear Range, Linear Dynamic Range: (Inorganic Analysis) The 

concentration range over which the ICP analytical curve remains linear.

Matrix: the substrate of a test sample.

Field of Accreditation Matrix: these matrix definitions shall be used 

when accrediting a laboratory (see Field of Accreditation).

Matrix Spike Duplicate (MSD): A second aliquot of the same matrix as 

the matrix spike (above) that is spiked in order to determine the precision 

of the method. 

MDL: Method Detection Limit.

Method Blank: An analytical control consisting of all reagents, internal 

standards and surrogate standards, that is carried through the entire 

analytical procedure just like a sample. The method blank is used to 
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K7 of 12

define the level of laboratory background and reagent contamination that 

may have been introduced into the sample during the digestion/extraction 

process.

Method of Standard Additions (MEA): (Inorganic Analysis) The 

addition of 3 increments of a standard solution (spikes) to sample aliquots 

of the same size. Measurements are made on the original and after each 

addition. The slope, x-intercept and y-intercept, are determined by least 

- square analysis. The analyte concentration is determined by the 

absolute value of the x-intercept. Ideally, the spike volume is low relative

to the sample volume (approximately 10% of the volume). Standard 

addition may counteract matrix effects; it will not counteract spectral 

effects. Also referred to as Standard Addition.

mg/l : milligram per liter

Milligram (mg): 1/1000th of a gram

Milliliter (ml): 1/1000th of a liter

Must: denotes a requirement that must be met. (Random House 

College Dictionary)

NA, ND: Not analyzed; none detected.

Narrative: A descriptive documentation of any problems encountered in 

processing the samples, along with corrective action taken and problem 

resolution.

PE: Performance Evaluation.

Percent Moisture: An approximation of the amount of water in a 

soil/sediment sample made by drying an aliquot of the sample at 105C. 

The percent moisture determined in this manner also includes 

contributions from all compounds that may volatilize at or below 105C, 

including water. Percent moisture may be determined from decanted 

samples and from samples that are not decanted.

Percent Solids: The proportion of solid in a soil sample determined by 

drying an aliquot of the sample.
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K8 of 12

Performance Evaluation (PE) Sample: See Proficiency Test Sample.

pH: The negative logarithm of the effective hydrogen ion concentration. 

A scale (0 to 14) representing an aqueous solution’s acidity or alkalinity. 

Low pH values indicate acidity and high values indicate alkalinity. The 

scale’s mid-point, 7, is neutral. Substance in an aqueous solution ionize 

to various extents giving different concentrations of H and OH ions. 

Strong acids have excess H ions and a pH of 1 to 3 (HC1, pH = 1). 

Strong bases have excess OH ions and a pH of 11 to 13 (NaOH, pH - 12).

Pima County Municipal Code Title 11 Purchasing- Rules and 

Regulations that must be followed by Pima County Employees when 

purchasing. See 

http://library.municode.com/index.aspx?clientId=16119&stateId=3&stateName=Arizona

ppb: Parts per billion (ug/l).

ppm: Parts per million (mg/l).

ppt: parts per trillion (μg/mL)

PQL : The practical quantitation limit (PQL) is the lowest quantitation 

point that can be reliably achieved within specified limits of precision and 

accuracy during routine laboratory operating conditions.

Primary Standard: 1) A physical standard for a particular parameter

which is designated or whose value is accepted without relation or 

comparison to any other reference. 

Protocol: a detailed written procedure for field and/or laboratory 

operation (e.g., sampling, analysis), which must be strictly followed. 

(EPA-QAD)

Purge and Trap (Device): Analytical technique (device) used to isolate 

volatile (purgeable) organics by stripping the compounds from water or 

soil by a stream of inert gas, trapping the compounds on an absorbent 

such as a porous polymer trap, thermally desorbing the trapped 
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K9 of 12

compounds onto the gas chromatographic column.

QA: Quality Assurance.

QAO: Quality Assurance Officer

QC: Quality Control.

Quality Control Sample: a sample used to assess the performance of 

all or a portion of the measurement system. QC samples may be 

Certified Reference Materials, a quality system matrix fortified by 

spiking, or actual samples fortified by spiking.

Reagent Blank: Usually an organic or aqueous solution that is as free of 

analyte as possible and contains all the reagents in the same volume as 

used in the processing of the samples. The reagent blank must be carried 

through the complete sample preparation procedure and contains the 

same reagent concentrations in the final solution as in the sample 

solution used for analysis. The reagent blank is used to correct for 

possible contamination resulting from the preparation or processing of the 

sample. One reagent blank should be prepared for every analytical batch 

or for every 20 samples, whichever is greater.

Reagent Water: Water in which an interferant is not observed at or 

above the minimum quantitation limit of the parameters of interest.

Relative Percent Difference (RPD): To compare two values, the 

relative percent difference is based on the mean of the two values and is 

reported as an absolute value (i.e. always expressed as a positive number 

or zero).

Replicate: Repeated operation occurring within an analytical procedure. 

Two or more analyses for the same constituent in an extract of a single 

sample constitutes replicate extract analyses.

Replicate Sample: A replicate sample is a sample prepared by dividing a 

sample into two or more separate aliquots. Duplicate samples are 

considered to be two replicates. In cases where aliquoting is impossible, 

as in the case of volatiles, duplicate samples must be taken for the 

replicate analysis.
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K10 of 12

Resolution: Also termed separation or percent resolution. The separation 

between peaks on a chromatogram, calculated by dividing the depth of 

the valley between the peaks by the peak height of the smaller peak 

being resolved and multiplied by 100.

Retention Time Window: Usually defined as three times the standard 

deviation of the absolute or relative RT of an analyte standard injected 

over the course of a 72-hour period.

RRT: Relative Retention Time.

RSD: Relative Standard Deviation.

RT: Retention Time.

RT Window: See Retention Time Window.

Run: A continuous analytical sequence consisting of prepared samples 

and all associated quality assurance measurements.

RWRD- Regional Wastewater Reclamation Department

Sample: A portion of material to be analyzed that is contained in single 

or multiple containers and identified by a unique sample number.

Sample Number (LAB Sample Number) : A unique identification 

number designated by LIMS for each sample. The LAB sample number 

appears on the sample Chain-Of-Custody which documents information on 

that sample.

Sapphire: The CRAO Laboratory Information Management System

SD: Standard Deviation.

Secondary Standard: A secondary standard is a standard that is 

prepared in the laboratory for a specific analysis. It is usually 

standardized against a primary standard. 
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K11 of 12

Semi-volatile Compounds: (Organic Analysis) Compounds amenable to 

analysis by extraction of the sample with an organic solvent. Used 

synonymously with Base/Neutral/Acid (BNA) compounds.

Shall: denotes a requirement that is mandatory whenever the criterion 

for conformance with the specification requires that there be no 

deviation. This does not prohibit the use of alternative approaches or 

methods for implementing the specification so long as the requirement 

is fulfilled. (ANSI)

Should: denotes a requirement that is mandatory whenever the 

criterion for conformance with the specification requires that there be 

no deviation permissible. (ADHS)

Standard Curve: A standard curve is a curve, which plots concentrations 

of known analyte standards versus the instrument response to the 

analyte. Calibration standards are prepared by diluting the stock analyte 

solution in graduated amounts, which cover the expected range of the 

samples being analyzed. Standards should be prepared at the frequency 

specified in the appropriate section. The calibration standards must be 

prepared using the same type of acid or solvent and at the same 

concentration as will result in the samples following sample preparation. 

This is applicable to organic and inorganic chemical analysis. See 

Calibration.

Stock Solution: Standard solution which can be diluted to derive other 

standards.

Subcontractor: A subcontractor is an individual or in many cases a business that 

signs a contract to perform part or all of the obligations of another's contract. 

(Wikipedia)

Suspended: (Inorganic Analysis) Those elements which are retained by a 

0.45 μm membrane filter.

Synergen: Asset Management Software used by Pima County

TCLP: Toxicity Characteristic Leaching (not Leachate) Procedure
APPENDIX K

DEFINITIONS, ACRONYMS & GLOSSARY

5-12-12 K12 of 12

Total Metals: (Inorganic Analysis) Analyte elements, which have been 

digested prior to analysis and have not been filtered.

Trip Blank: Usually an organic or aqueous solution that is as free of 

analyte as possible and is transported to the sampling site and returned to

the laboratory without being opened. This serves as a check on sample 

contamination originating from sample transport, shipping, and from the 

site conditions. One trip blank should be analyzed with each analytical 

batch or every 20 samples, whichever is greater.

Validation: the confirmation by examination and provision of objective 

evidence that the particular requirements for a specific intended use 

are fulfilled.

Volatile Compounds: (Organic Analysis) Compounds amenable to 

analysis by the purge and trap technique. Used synonymously with 

purgeable compounds.

Water: Reagent, analyte-free, or laboratory pure water means distilled or 

deionized water or Type II reagent water which is free of contaminants 

that may interfere with the analytical test in question.

Net Weight: The weight of a sample aliquot including moisture (undried).
Appendix L

Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5-1-12 L1 of 4 Appendix L

 

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)

 

 Name Signature Initials
Appendix L

Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5-1-12 L2 of 4 Appendix L

 

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)

 

 Name Signature Initials

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)
Appendix L

Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5-1-12 L3 of 4 Appendix L

 

 

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)
Appendix L

Signatures/Initial Identification Form

Laboratory Staff

5-1-12 L4 of 4 Appendix L

 

 

 Name Signature Initials

(Please sign as you would sign a legal document)
APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE 

5-12-12 M1 of 5 
APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE 

5-12-12 M2 of 5 
APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE 

5-12-12 M3 of 5 
APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE 

5-12-12 M4 of 5 
APPENDIX M LABORATORY LICENSE 

5-12-12 M5 of 5 
Appendix N

5-12-12 N1 of 1

 
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O1 of 14

FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

DIGESTION LIST EPA 200.7 IO-1 1 JIMMIE BARAJAS Inorganic

CALCULATION OF SULFIDE STOCK 

STANDARD IO-10,11 2

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

MDLPQLCALC IO12,13,14,15 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

MDLCALC IO-16,17 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Standard Additions Worksheet IO-18,19 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

ICPMS Run Data IO-2 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

SULFIDE SHEET - CONTROL WORKSHEET IO-20,21,22 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

ICPMS Instrument Parameters IO-4 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

ICPMS Digestion List IO-5 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Cyanide 2nd Source Control Standardization 

Worksheet IO-6 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Cyanide Standardization IO-7 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Fluoride Worksheet IO-8 1 RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Mercury Sludge Digestion Log IO-23 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Mercury Waters Digestion List IO-24 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Low Level Mercury Digestion List IO-25 1
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O2 of 14

FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

Be Air filter Digestion List IO-26 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Pb Air Filters Digestion List IO-28 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

TCLP Digestion List IO-29 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

200.7 Minerals IO-30 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

6010B Sludge Digestion List IO-31 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

TCLP Extraction Log IO-32 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

Fluoride Distillation Log IO-33 1

RICHARD M. 

AROS Inorganic 

LIMS Paramlist Addition-Modification Form 01546 1 NANCY POWELL Laboratory 

Review of Requests Tenders and Contracts 

Form QA-23 5 NANCY POWELL Laboratory 

SOP Template - Administrative QA-5a 3 CYNTHIA 

HOWSER Laboratory 

Hach 10014 Ina Log M-10 3 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Ina Fecal Coliform M-11 3 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Fecal Low Level M-12 2SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

E-Coli M-13 2SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Roger Fecal Coliform M-14 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Ina and Roger pH DO Bench Record M-15 4 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O3 of 14

FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

Weekly contact (Rodac) plates M-16 2 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Monthly air and water plates M-17 2 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Monthly Quantitray Sealer Test M-18 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Monthly Spore Test and Min Max 

Thermometer Check M-19 3 SHAWNEEN R. MICHAUD Microbiology 

Quarterly Autoclave Timing Test M-20 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Roger Road Bench Record Chlorine M-21 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

ALK-pH METER M-23 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Roger pH Meter Calibration M-24 2SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

IDEXX Bottle Volume Check M-25 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

Alkalinity Bench Record M-3 3 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

COD Bench Record M-4 2 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

pH & Alkalinity Bench Record M-5 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

TDS Bench Record M-6 2SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

TS TVS Bench Record M-7 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology

TSS TVSS Bench Record M-8 3 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 

BOD Bench Record Sheets M-9 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Microbiology 
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O4 of 14

FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

Monthly Balance Calibration QA-11 8 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER QAQC 

Therm Cal Check QA-12 2JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER QAQC 

Working Weight Precision Check Form QA-15 2 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER QAQC 

Internal Audit Log QA-16 3CYNTHIA B. 

HOWSER QAQC 

Employee Roster QA-17 1 DAVID W. 

FOSTER QAQC 

Subcontract Lab Data Checksheet Form QA-18 8 NANCY POWELL QAQC 

SOP Awareness Cerification QA-19 4 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER QAQC 

QA Monthly Report Form QA-2 4 NANCY POWELL QAQC 

Header QA-21 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC 

Review of Request for Analysis QA-23 5 NANCY POWELL QAQC 

Micropipette Calibration- One Volume QA-24 2 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Micropipette Calibration- Two Volumes QA-25 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Corrective Action Form for PT Studies QA-26 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Sample Bottle Sign Out Sheet QA-29 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Internal Audit Master QA-3 3 CYNTHIA B. 

HOWSER QAQC 

SOP Template - Method QA-5 4 CYNTHIA B. 

HOWSER QAQC 

Internal Audit Schedule QA-6 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC 

Quality Assurance Master Document List QA-7 3 NANCY POWELL QAQC 
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O5 of 14

FORM NAME DOC # REV # OWNER LOCATION

Pretrip Inspection Form Page 2 S-10 1 SHAWNEEN R. 

MICHAUD Safety 

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Task Evaluation for Sulfate 

MethylthymolBlue Method

00756 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Blue Method

Training Checksheet for Sulfate 00757 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Methylthymol Blue Method(2)

Pre-trip Inspection Form 00786 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for balance 

calibration

00787 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

checks

Task Evaluation for Settable Solids 00797 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Training Checklist for 5 Day BOD 

Analysis

00798 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Training Checklist for E. Coli and 

Total

00799 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Coliforms by Colilert MICHAUD

Training Checklist for Exceedence 

Report

00800 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Procedures MICHAUD

Training Checklist for Hach COD 

Analysis

00801 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O6 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Training Checklist for Microbiological 

Media

00802 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

and Sample Bottle Prep MICHAUD

Training Checklist for Residual 

Chlorine

00803 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Training Checklist for Settable Solids 00804 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Training Checklist for Specific 

Conductance

00805 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Training Checklist for Water Alkalinity 00806 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Training Checklist forTotal 

Suspended

00807 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Solids and TVSS MICHAUD

Training Checklist Template 00808 2 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for Fecal and 

Total

00809 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Coliforms MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for Ina Daily 

Permit

00810 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Grab Sampling MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for pH 00812 1 JOHN HENRY VAN Microbiology

RIPER

Training Checksheet for Roger Daily 

Permit

00813 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Grab Sampling MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for Sludge 

Alkalinity

00814 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O7 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Training Checksheet for Total 

Dissolved

00815 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Solids Analysis MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for Total Solids 

and

00816 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

TVS Analysis MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for balance 

calibration

00822 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

checks

Training Checksheet for Acid Bath 00823 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Neutralization

Training Checksheet for daily DI 

Water

00824 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Maintenance

Training Checksheet for Exceedane 

Report

00825 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Procedures

Training Checksheet for Ice Point 00826 3 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Calibration

Training Checksheet for Pouroff 00827 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Training Checksheet for QA-QC 00828 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Bottlewashing

Training Checksheet for Sample 

Receiving

00829 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

and COC's

Training Checksheet for Trip blank 

prep

00830 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Training Checksheet for - Inorganic 00831 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O8 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Glassware

Training Checksheet for Ammonia 

Lachat

00832 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Training Checksheet for Chloride 

Lachat

00833 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Training Checksheet for 

Determination of

00834 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Trace Metals by ICP

Training Checksheet for 

Determination of

00835 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Trace Metals by ICP EPA 200.8

Training Checksheet for 

Determination of

00836 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Trace Metals by ICP-MS 200.8

Training Checksheet for Digestions 

for ICP

00837 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

and ICP-MS

Training Checksheet for FIA 

Instrument by 

00838 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat

Training Checksheet for Fluoride ion 00839 2 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Selective Electrode Analysis

Training Checksheet for Ignitability 

(Flash

00840 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Point) Analysis

Training Checksheet for Kjeldahl 

Nitrogen

00841 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Training Checksheet for Maintenance 00842 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Procedures for LEEMAN PS200
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O9 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Training Checksheet for Mercury by 

Cold

00843 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Vapor Analysis

Training Checksheet for Mercury 

Sludge

00844 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

and Sediment

Training Checksheet for Nitrate-Nitrite 00845 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat Analysis

Training Checksheet for Nitrite 

Nitrogen

00846 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat Analysis

Training Checksheet for 

Orthophosphate

00848 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat Analysis

Training Checksheet for Sulfate 00849 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Turbidimetric Analysis

Training Checksheet for Sulfides in 

Turbid

00850 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Samples

Training Checksheet for TCLP 

Extraction for

00851 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Metals

Training Checksheet for Total 

Cyanide

00852 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Training Checksheet for Total 

Cyanides for

00853 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Hazardous Wastes Analysis

Task Evaluation for Sulfides in Turbid 00855 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Samples

Task Evaluation for Lachat FIA 

Analysis

00856 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O10 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Task Evaluation for Cyanide Analysis 00857 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Task Evaluation for Cyanide Total for 00858 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Hazardous Wastes

Task Evaluation for Digestion of ICP 

and

00859 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

ICP-MS Analysis

Task Evaluation for Flash Point 

Ignitability

00860 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Task Evaluation for Fluoride Analysis 00861 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Task Evaluation for Mercury Cold 

Vapor 

00862 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Task Evaluation for Nitrate-Nitrite 

Lachat

00863 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Task Evaluation for Nitrite Nitrogen 

Lachat

00864 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Task Evaluation for Orthophosphate 

Lachat

00865 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Analysis

Printed:

Task Evaluation for Sulfate 

Turbidemetric

00866 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Task Evaluation for TKN Lachat 

Analysis

00867 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Task Evaluatiuon for Determination of 00868 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Metals by ICP-MS EPA 200.8

Task Evaluation for Determination of 00869 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Metals by ICP-MS EPA 200.8A

Task Evaluatiuon for Determination of 00870 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O11 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Metals EPA 200.7

Task Evaluation for Mercury-Sludge 

and

00871 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Sediment

Task Evaluation for Ammonia 

Nitrogen by

00872 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat

Task Evaluation for Chloride in Water 

by

00873 1 RICHARD M. AROS Inorganic

Lachat

Task Evaluation for 625 Extractions 00874 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Task Evaluation for Oil, Grease and 00875 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Petroleum Hydrocarbons EPA 1664-A

Task Evaluation for 

Organophosphorus

00876 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Pesticides 8141-A

Task Evaluation for TOC Analysis 00877 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Task Evaluation for VOA's 00878 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Task Evaluation for Volatile Organics 

in

00879 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Groundwater 8260B

Task Evaluation for 625 Pesticides 

and

00880 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

PCB's

Task Evaluation for 8270C Pesticides 

and

00881 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

PCB's

Task Evaluation for Sludge Digester 

Gas

00882 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Analysis

Task Evaluation for sample receiving 00883 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC

Task Evaluation for monthly balance 00884 1 NANCY POWELL QAQC
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O12 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

checks

Employee Orientation Plan 00885 3 JUDITH SCHNEIDER QAQC

Task Evaluation for Settable Solids 00889 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for Total Suspended 

and

00890 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Volatile Solids Analysis MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for 5 Day BOD 

readback

00891 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for 5 Day BOD setup 00892 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for COD Analysis by 

Hach

00893 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Task Evaluation for Conductivity 00894 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for E. Coli and Total 00895 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Coliform by IDEXX Colilert MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for Fecal and Total 

Coliform

00896 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for pH Analysis 00897 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for Sludge Alkalinity 00898 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for Total Dissolved 

Solids 

00899 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Analysis MICHAUD

Task Evaluation for Total Solids and 

Total

00900 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology

Volatile Solids MICHAUD

Task Evaluation Template 00901 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O13 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for 625 625P 01044 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Extractions

Training Checksheet for 625 BNA 01045 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Extractions

Training Checksheet for Oil and 

Grease and

01046 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons

Training Checksheet for Organic 

Glassware

01047 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Washing

Training Checksheet for 01048 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Organophosphorous Pesticides 

Analysis

Training Checksheet for the 

Determination

01049 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

of Semi-Volatile Pesticides-PCB's 

8270C

Training Checksheet for the 

Determination

01050 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

of Semi-Volatile Pesticides-PCB's 

EPA 625

Training Checksheet for Total 

Organic

01051 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Carbon Analysis

Training Checksheet for Volatile 

Organic

01052 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

Acids Analysis

Training Checksheet for Volatile 

Organics

01053 1 JULIAN R. PORTILLO Organic

SW-8466 Method 8260B

Task Evaluation for Total Dissolved 01054 1 SHAWNEEN R. Microbiology
Appendix O List of Forms & Checklists

5-12-12 O14 of 14

CHECKLIST NAME DOC # REV# OWNER LOCATION

Solids 

Analysis MICHAUD

Training Checksheet for 

Thermometer

01556 1 JUDITH K. 

SCHNEIDER

QAQC

Calibration, Use, and Maintenance

Subcontract Lab Data Checksheet QA 18 6 NANCY POWELL QAQC
Appendix P Changes to the QM

5-12-12 P1 of 5

Section 3 Added to “Compliance and Regulatory Affairs (CRAO)” to “The purpose of 

this Quality Manual is to outline the quality system for the Pima County 

RWRD laboratory.

Section 

3.2.1

Changed from “Appendix A - Layout at the Ina Road WRF” to “Appendix A –

WESC CRAO Laboratory Floor Plan”.

Section 

3.2.1

Added “Appendix Q-Arizona Administrative Code for Licensing of 

Environmental Laboratories”.

Section 

3.2.1

Marked Appendix B & C obsolete. Maps for Ina Rd. 

Section 

3.2.2

Removed, “This Quality Manual uses the references from the 2003 NELAC 

Standard, Chapter 5, Appendix, A.” 

“Added “This Quality Manual uses the references included in Modules 1-7 in 

the 2009 TNI Environmental Laboratory Sector Standard – Volume 1 –

Management and Technical Requirements for Laboratories Performing 

Environmental Analysis as well as the references listed in the Arizona 

Administrative Code for Licensing of Environmental Laboratories R9-14-601 

et. seq. (Appendix Q). 

This Quality Manual uses the references from the 2009 TNI Standard. “ 

Section 

3.2.2

Added EPA 821/R-02-013 reference for Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing 

(WETT testing).

Section 

3.2.2.1

Made this section part of 3.2.2.

Section 

3.3

Removed “Appendix A, Chapter 1, 2003 NELAC Standards”

Section 

3.3

Added , “ADHS -Arizona Department of Health”, 

Section 

3.3

Added , “BKD - Breakdown Check Standard, particular to pesticides”

Section 

3.3

Added , “CAL-Calibration Standard”

Section 

3.3

Added, “CCB -Continuing Calibration Blank”

Section 

3.3

Added, “CRL - MRL-Level Calibration Verification”

Section 

3.3

Added, “IBL -Instrument Blank”

Section 

3.3

Added, “ICB - Initial Calibration Blank”

Section 

3.3

Added, “IFA -Interference Check Standard A”

Section 

3.3

Added, “IFB -Interference Check Standard B”

Section 

3.3

Added, “PEM - Performance Evaluation Mixture”
Appendix P Changes to the QM

5-12-12 P2 of 5

Section 

3.3

Added, “SCV - Second Source Calibration Verification”

Section 

3.3

Added, “SRD- Serial Dilution”

Section 

3.3

Added, “TUN - MS Tune”

Section 

3.3

Changed, “WET – Whole Effluent Toxicity” to “WETT – Whole Effluent 

Toxicity Testing” 

Section 4 Changed, “ NELAC” to “TNI”

Section 

4.1

Changed, “Arizona Lab License number AZ0139” to “Arizona Lab License 

number AZO159” 

Section 

4.1

Changed, “Reclamation ’s” to “Reclamation’s”

Section 

4.1

Changed, “The CRAO Laboratory is located in Building 1 and Building 16 at 

7101 N. Casa Grande Hwy. Please reference Appendices A & B for location 

maps and Appendix C for the Organization Chart.” 

to “The CRAO Laboratory is located in the Water & Energy Sustainability 

Center (WESC) at 3035 W El Camino del Cerro, Tucson, Arizona 85745. 

Please reference Appendices A & B for location maps and Appendix C for 

the Organization Chart”.

Section 

4.2

Changed, “Management includes the Compliance And Regulatory Affairs 

Project Manager, Laboratory Supervisor, Inorganic Chemist Specialist, 

Organic Chemist Specialist, Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Chemist 

Specialist, and the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist.”

to “Management includes the Compliance and Regulatory Affairs Project

Manager, Laboratory Supervisor, Inorganic Chemist Specialist, Organic 

Chemist Specialist, Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Chemist Specialist, WETT 

Chemist Specialist, and the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist.”

Section 

4.2

Changed “The CRAO Lab organization consists of the following four areas. 

(See Organizational Chart shown in Appendix C):

1. Inorganic Chemistry Unit

2. Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Unit

3. Organic Chemistry Unit

4. Quality Assurance Unit /Safety/Training/Haz Mat

To “The CRAO Lab organization consists of the following five units. (See 

Organizational Chart shown in Appendix C):

1. Inorganic Chemistry Unit

2. Microbiology/Wet Chemistry Unit

3. Organic Chemistry Unit

4. Quality Assurance Unit /Safety/Training/Haz Mat

5. Whole Effluent Toxicity Testing

Section Changed, “The QAO is responsible for maintaining the laboratory portion of 
Appendix P Changes to the QM

5-12-12 P3 of 5

4.2.3 Intelex and updating the SOPs, Forms, and data in Intelex. The QAO 

reports to the Laboratory Director”

To “The QAO is responsible for updating the SOPs, Forms, and data. The 

QAO reports to the Laboratory Director.”

Section 

4.2.5

Changed, “The unit supervisor is responsible for annually reviewing, 

updating and signing each SOP along with all data forms used by the unit. 

Each supervisor is responsible for ensuring the analysts in their unit are 

properly trained, following accepted methods, and are performing analytical 

procedures in a manner that is safe to themselves and others in the 

laboratory.”

To: “The unit supervisor is responsible for reviewing, updating and signing 

each SOP along with all data forms used by the unit. Each supervisor is 

responsible for ensuring the analysts in their unit are properly trained, 

following accepted methods, and are performing analytical procedures in a 

manner that is safe to themselves and others in the laboratory. SOPs must 

remain current”

Section 

4.2.5-

4.2.7

Changed “4.2.5WW Laboratory Chemist” & “4.2.6 WW Laboratory 

Technician:”

TO: “4.2.6 WW Laboratory Chemist” & ”4.2.7 WW Laboratory Technician:”

Section 

5.1

Changed “The objective of the quality system and the commitment of 

management is to consistently provide our customers with data of known 

and documented quality that meets their requirements. Our policy is to use 

good professional practices, to maintain quality, to uphold the highest 

quality of service, and to comply with the NELAC Standard.”

To “The objective of the quality system and the commitment of management 

is to consistently provide our customers with scientifically valid and 

defensible data of known and documented quality that meets their 

requirements. Our policy is to use good professional practices, to maintain 

quality, to uphold the highest quality of service, and to comply with the TNI 

Standard and ADHS Rules & Statutes.”

Section 

6.1

Changed, “SOPs will be reviewed and approved for use by the Unit chemist 

specialist, the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist, and the Laboratory 

Supervisor prior to issue.”

To “SOPs will be reviewed and approved for use by the Unit chemist 

specialist, if applicable, the Quality Assurance Chemist Specialist, and the 

Laboratory Supervisor prior to issue.”

Section 

6.1 

Procedure

Changed, “Controlled internal documents are registered in Intelex. Copies 

may be entered by Quality Assurance Office, the System Administer, or by 

another User with a Full User Intelex license. Acceptable file types for 

Intelex are PDF, WORD, and EXCEL. Each document has a unique 

number. SOP numbers are listed in Appendix E. Current checklists and 

forms are listed in Appendix O. Each document has a unique number and is 

identified with 1) date of issue, 2) revision identification, 3) page number, 4) 
Appendix P Changes to the QM

5-12-12 P4 of 5

the total number of pages, and 5) the at least electronic approval in Intelex

of the issuing authority (i.e. management).

A master list of controlled internal documents is maintained that includes 

distribution, location, and revision dates is automatically maintained in 

Intelex. A master list of controlled external documents is also maintained 

that includes title, author, copyright date, and date of publication, and 

location. The controlled document list is maintained by Intelex. The 

controlled document list is updated automatically in Intelex. Annually a 

review of the document is initiated and documented in Intelex. Documents 

may be updated more often.”

To, “Controlled internal documents are registered tracked by the QA unit. 

Acceptable file types PDF, WORD, and EXCEL. Each document has a 

unique number. SOP numbers are listed in Appendix E. Each document 

has a unique number and is identified with 1) date of issue, 2) revision 

identification, 3) page number, and 4) the total number of pages.

A master list of controlled internal documents is maintained that includes 

distribution, location, and revision dates is automatically by Quality 

Assurance. The controlled document list is maintained by Quality 

Assurance. It is the Unit Supervisor’s responsibility to update forms and 

documents as needed.”

Section 

6.1

Changed, Policy

Copies of all SOPs are accessible to all personnel. 

To, “Policy

Copies of all SOPs are accessible to all personnel. Electronic signed copies 

are located internally at X:\CRAO\Lab Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab\SOPs. Paper 

copies are distributed to each unit.”

Section 

6.3.1

Added to Policy, “For compliance reporting, the deviation must be an 

allowable method modification per the 40 CFR, Part 136.6 and ADHS rules.”

Section 7 Changed, “Contracts for new work may be formal bids, signed documents, 

verbal, or electronic. The written form for evaluation of requests, tenders 

and contract in available in Intelex, form QA-23.” 

To, “Contracts for new work may be formal bids, signed documents, verbal, 

or electronic. The written form for evaluation of requests, tenders and 

contract in available on the G-drive, form QA-23.”

Section 8

Procedure

Added, “A current list of licensed parameters for any Arizona certified lab is 

accessible on the ADHS website 

https://app.azdhs.gov/BFS/LABS/ELBIS/ArizonaCertifiedLabs/”

Section 9

Procedure

Changed, “All Bid orders are tracked in ORACLE, the county financial 

applications program.”

To, “All Bid orders are tracked in Pima Core, the county financial 

applications program.”

Various Change Laboratory Supervisor to Laboratory Director.

Section 

13

REMOVED (IN STRIKEOUT), “CORRECTIVE ACTION is the action taken to eliminate 

the causes of an existing nonconformity, defect, or other undesirable 
Appendix P Changes to the QM

5-12-12 P5 of 5

situation in order to prevent recurrence (NELAC, 2003). “

Section 

13.1 

Policy

Changed, “Once an exceedence or nonconformance is noted, the first 

action is an investigation to determine the root cause. Records are 

maintained in Intelex of nonconformance requiring corrective action to 

show that the root cause(s) was investigated, and includes the results of the 

investigation.”

To, “Once an exceedence or nonconformance is noted, the first action is an 

investigation to determine the root cause. Records are maintained in Y:\Lab 

Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab\Corrective Action of nonconformance requiring 

corrective action to show that the root cause(s) was investigated, and 

includes the results of the investigation.”

Section 

13.2

Changed, “The Unit Chemist Specialist enters corrective Actions into correct 

file into Intelex. Quality Assurance Personnel or designees will follow-up in 

four to six weeks to ensure corrective action is effective. If the problem still 

exists and was not fixed, the process will start again.”

To, “The Unit Chemist Specialist enters corrective Actions into correct file in 

Y:\Lab Svcs\_Shared Data\Lab\Corrective Action. Quality Assurance 

Personnel or designees will follow-up in four to six weeks to ensure 

corrective action is effective. If the problem still exists and was not fixed, the 

process will start again.”

Various Removed all direct references to Intelex.

Section 

20.3.1

Removed Inspect pump well and pump rollers quarterly.

Appendix 

J

Added dissolved metals
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 1 of 53

ARTICLE 6. LICENSING OF ENVIRONMENTAL LABORATORIES

R9-14-601. Definitions

In addition to the definitions in A.R.S. § 36-495, the following definitions apply in this Article, unless otherwise specified:

1. "Acceptance criteria" means the range of satisfactory test results for a parameter.

2. "ADEQ" means the Arizona Department of Environmental Quality.

3. "Affiliate" means a business organization that:

a. Controls or has the power to control the business organization that owns the laboratory,

b. Is controlled by or could be controlled by the business organization that owns the laboratory, or

c. Could be controlled by a third business organization that could also control the business organization that owns the 

laboratory.

4. "Alternate method" means an analytical test procedure or technique that is not an approved method and for which 

approval is requested under R9-14-610(C).

5. "Analyst" means an individual who performs compliance testing at a laboratory.

6. "Analyte" means the substance or chemical constituent being sought or measured in an analytical procedure.

7. "Applicant" means a person or persons requesting an initial or renewal license under R9-14-603, approval of an alternate 

method or method alteration under R9-14-610(C), or approval of an exemption under R9-14-615(D), and includes, as 

required under A.R.S. § 36-495.03(D), the owner and, if the owner is not the laboratory director, the laboratory 

director.

8. "Approved method" means an analytical test procedure or technique authorized by the Department to test for the presence

of a particular contaminant or characteristic and includes an alternate method approved by the Department under R9-

14-610(C) and an approved method used with a method alteration approved by the Department under R9-14-610(C).

9. "ASTM" means American Society for Testing and Materials.

10. "Blind proficiency testing" means the Department's determination of a laboratory analyst's ability to analyze samples 

correctly, accomplished by submitting samples for testing in such a manner that the laboratory analyst is not aware that 

the proficiency testing is occurring.

11. "Business organization" means an entity such as a sole proprietorship, an unincorporated association, a corporation, a 

limited liability company, a partnership, or a governmental entity.

12. "Calibration curve" means a graphical display of the functional relationship between the instrument or analytical device 

response and the analyte amount.

13. "Calibration model" means a mathematical form for a calibration curve.

14. "CCC" means calibration check compounds.

15. "CCV" means continuing calibration verification standard.

16. "Client" means a person that submits a sample to a laboratory for compliance testing.

17. "Contaminant" means a matter, pollutant, hazardous substance, or other substance for which a sample is being tested.

18. "Contiguous grounds" means real property that can be enclosed by a single unbroken boundary line that does not enclose 

property owned or leased by another.

19. "Critical step" means a task in the testing procedure that is required to be performed within a specified time period by 

regulation, method, standard operating procedure, or quality assurance plan.

20. "Current" means up-to-date and extending to the present time.

21. "Data outlier" means a test result that falls outside of acceptance criteria.

22. "Days" means calendar days, excluding the day of the act, event, or default from which a designated period of time 

begins to run and excluding the last day of the period if it is a Saturday, a Sunday, or a legal holiday, in which event the 

period runs until the end of the next day that is not a Saturday, a Sunday, or a legal holiday.

23. "DBCP" means 1,2-Dibromo-3-chloropropane.

24. "DDT" means dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane.

25. "DOC" means dissolved organic carbon.

26. "ECD" means electron capture detector.

27. "EDB" means 1,2-Dibromoethane.

28. "Effluent" means an outflow, as of a stream that flows out of a facility.

29. "EOX" means extractable organic halides.

30. "EP" means extraction procedure.

31. "EPA" means the United States Environmental Protection Agency.

32. "FID" means flame ionization detector.

33. "FL" means fluorescence.

34. "FT-IR" means Fourier transform infrared.

35. "GC" means gas chromatography.

36. "HEM" means n-Hexane extractable material.

37. "HPLC" means high performance liquid chromatography.

38. "HRGC" means high resolution gas chromatography.

39. "HRMS" means high resolution mass spectrometry.

40. "ICV" means initial calibration verification.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 2 of 53

41. "IDOC" means initial demonstration of capability.

42. "Initial Demonstration of Capability" means a test performed by an analyst, as prescribed by a method, to document the 

analyst's ability to perform the method.

43. "Investigation" means an evaluation of a licensee's or applicant's compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this 

Article conducted by the Department upon its own initiative or upon receipt of a written complaint and may include a 

laboratory inspection.

44. "IPC" means instrument performance check.

45. "Key reference" means a document incorporated by reference in R9-14-610(B).

46. "Laboratory inspection" means the Department's assessment of operations at a laboratory to determine a licensee's 

compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article.

47. "LCS" means laboratory control sample.

48. "Level I license" means an approval issued by the Department authorizing compliance testing of one to nine total 

parameters at a laboratory.

49. "Level II license" means an approval issued by the Department authorizing compliance testing of 10 to 17 total 

parameters at a laboratory.

50. "Level III license" means an approval issued by the Department authorizing compliance testing of more than 17 total 

parameters at a laboratory.

51. "LFB" means laboratory fortified blank.

52. "LFM" means laboratory fortified sample matrix.

53. "Licensee" means a person or persons to whom the Department issues a license to operate a laboratory and includes, as 

required under A.R.S. § 36-495.03(D), the owner and, if the owner is not the laboratory director, the laboratory 

director.

54. "Limit of detection" means an analyte- and matrix-specific estimate of the minimum amount of a substance that an 

analytical process can reliably detect, which may be laboratory dependent and is developed according to R9-14-

615(C)(7).

55. "Limit of quantitation" means the minimum levels, concentrations, or quantities of a target variable such as an analyte 

that can be reported with a specific degree of confidence.

56. "LOQ" means limit of quantitation.

57. "LRMS" means low resolution mass spectrometry.

58. "Method" means an analytical test procedure or technique.

59. "Method alteration" means a change to an established method.

60. "Method reporting limit" means the minimum concentration of a contaminant reported after analyzing a sample in a 

given parameter, determined after corrections have been made for sample dilution and sample weight.

61. "Mobile laboratory" means a non-stationary facility where compliance testing is performed.

62. "MPN" means most probable number.

63. "MRL" means minimum reporting level.

64. "MS" means mass spectrometry.

65. "MSE" means microscale solvent extraction.

66. "NPD" means nitrogen phosphorous detector.

67. "NPDES" means national pollutant discharge elimination system.

68. "NTU" means nephelometric turbidity units.

69. "ONPG-MUG" means ortho-nitrophenyl-ß-D-galactopyranoside-4-methylumbelliferyl-ß-D-glucuronide.

70. "Owner" means a person that has controlling legal or equitable interest in and authority over a laboratory's operations.

71. "PAH" means polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon.

72. "Parameter" means the combination of a particular type of sample with a particular approved method by which the 

sample will be analyzed for a particular analyte or characteristic.

73. "PB" means particle beam.

74. "PCB" means polychlorinated biphenyls.

75. "PCDD" means polychlorinated dibenzodioxins.

76. "PCDF" means polychlorinated dibenzofurans.

77. "PDA" means photodiode array.

78. "PID" means photoionization detection.

79. "POX" means purgeable organic halides.

80. "Precision" means repeatability of measurement data, specifically the similarity of successive independent measurements 

of a single magnitude generated by repeated applications of a process under specified conditions.

81. "Proficiency testing" means a proficiency testing service's determination of a laboratory analyst's ability to analyze 

samples correctly, accomplished by submitting samples to the laboratory for testing and then analyzing the 

acceptability of the results.

82. "Proficiency testing service" means an independent service acceptable to the EPA or, if the EPA has not indicated 

acceptance of a proficiency testing service for a parameter, acceptable to the Department based on recognition from a 

national organization such as the National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program.

83. "Qualified" means explained in documentation.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 3 of 53

84. "Quality assurance plan" means documentation that meets the requirements of R9-14-615(B).

85. "Quality control checks" means the steps taken by laboratory analysts to monitor the accuracy and precision of sample 

analysis.

86. "QCS" means quality control sample.

87. "RDX" means Hexahydro-1,3,5-trinitro-1,3,5-triazine.

88. "Records" means all written, recorded, and electronic documentation necessary to reconstruct all laboratory activities 

that produce data and includes all information relating to the laboratory's equipment, analytical test methods, and 

related activities.

89. "RPD" means relative percent difference.

90. "Ruggedness" means the ability of a method to withstand changes in environmental factors and produce repeatable 

results.

91. "Sample" means a specimen that is a representative part of a whole or a single item from a group.

92. "Single laboratory" means an individual laboratory facility or multiple laboratory facilities located on contiguous 

grounds and having the same owner.

93. "Small business" means a business organization, including its affiliates, that is independently owned and operated, that is 

not dominant in its field, and that employs fewer than 100 full-time employees or had gross annual receipts of less than 

$4 million in its last fiscal year.

94. "SOUR" means specific oxygen uptake rate.

95. "SPE" means solid-phase extraction.

96. "SPLP" means synthetic precipitation leaching procedure.

97. "Standard operating procedure" means a documented process for carrying on business, analysis, or action, with 

instructions for performing routine or repetitive tasks.

98. "Statistical outlier" means an individual data point that has a value far from those of the other data points in a set and that 

has been determined through statistical analysis to have derived from a different population than the other data points.

99. "TCLP" means toxicity characteristics leaching procedure.

100. "TDS" means total dissolved solids.

101. "TE" means thermal extraction.

102. "TNT" means trinitrotoluene.

103. "TOC" means total organic carbon.

104. "TOX" means total organic halides.

105. "Traceability" means the establishment of an unbroken chain of comparisons to the reference of origin.

106. "TS" means thermospray.

107. "TSS" means total suspended solids.

108. "UV" means ultraviolet.

109. "Valid" means that a license, certificate, or other form of authorization is in full force and effect and not suspended.

110. "VOC" means volatile organic compound.

111. "VOST" means volatile organic sampling train.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-601 repealed, new Section R9-14-601 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Amended by final 

rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 

4798, effective December 5, 2006

(Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-602. Exemptions from Applicability

This Article does not apply to:

1. The laboratories exempted by A.R.S. § 36-495.02(A);

2. Compliance testing performed under the Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act, 7 U.S.C. 136-136y; or

3. An out-of-state laboratory at which only microbiology testing of bottled water is performed and for which the owner 

holds a current and valid environmental laboratory license or certificate, issued by another state of the United States, 

that specifically authorizes drinking water testing.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-602 repealed, new Section R9-14-602 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Amended by final 

rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 

4798, effective December 5, 2006

(Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-603. License Application and Process; Transferability

A. To obtain an initial or renewal license to operate a laboratory, an applicant shall submit to the Department, within the time 

prescribed in subsection (C), an application completed using a Department-provided form and including:
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 4 of 53

1. The name of the laboratory;

2. The current Arizona license number for the laboratory, if any;

3. The current EPA certification number for the laboratory, if any;

4. The physical and mailing addresses for the laboratory;

5. The telephone number; fax number; and e-mail address for the laboratory;

6. The name and address of the owner and of each additional person that has an ownership interest in the laboratory;

7. For the owner and each additional business organization with an ownership interest in the laboratory, the name of each 

officer, principal, and statutory agent;

8. The name of the laboratory director;

9. The type of laboratory:

a. Governmental;

b. Company, performing internal work only;

c. Commercial, for profit; or

d. Other, with a description of the type of laboratory operation;

10. The license Level for which the applicant is applying;

11. Whether the applicant is applying to license a single laboratory or multiple laboratories;

12. If the applicant is applying to license a mobile laboratory, the vehicle make, vehicle identification number, and Arizona 

vehicle license number of the mobile laboratory;

13. If the applicant is applying to license a mobile laboratory that is affiliated with a non-mobile laboratory, the name of the 

non-mobile laboratory;

14. The name, title, and educational background of each individual authorized to sign final reports for the laboratory;

15. A list of the parameters for which the applicant is requesting to be licensed or, if an application for a renewal license, an

indication that the applicant desires to be licensed for the same parameters as on the current license;

16. A list of the instruments and equipment to be used at the laboratory for compliance testing or, if an application for a 

renewal license, an indication that the applicant is using the same instruments and equipment as used under the current 

license;

17. A list of the software to be used at the laboratory for instrument control and data reduction interpretation or, if an 

application for a renewal license, an indication that the applicant is using the same software as used under the current 

license;

18. If the applicant is applying for an out-of-state laboratory, whether the applicant wants to receive technical updates at the 

laboratory by fax or through the Internet;

19. If an application for an initial license:

a. A copy of a proficiency testing report, for the current or most recently completed year, for the state in which the 

laboratory is located or, if that state does not require proficiency testing, for another state in which the laboratory 

is licensed or certified, for each of the parameters for which licensure is requested;

b. A list of the states in which the laboratory is licensed or certified and the corresponding license or certificate number 

for each state; and

c. A copy of a current quality assurance plan for the laboratory;

20. If an application for a renewal license:

a. A copy of a current standard operating procedure, limit of detection, and proficiency testing report, if available, for 

each parameter newly requested on the application; and

b. If the applicant desires to make payments in installments as permitted under R9-14-608, an indication of this and the 

monthly, bimonthly, or quarterly schedule for the payments; 

21. Except as provided in subsection (J), the fees required under R9-14-607 and R9-14-608, payable to the Arizona 

Department of Health Services by credit card; certified check; business check; or money order; or, if the owner is an 

Arizona state agency, purchase order;

22. Attestation, made under oath, that the owner and the laboratory director are aware of all applicable requirements in 

A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article and that the information provided in the application, including the 

information in the documents accompanying the application form, is accurate and complete; and

23. The dated and notarized signature of the laboratory director and:

a. If the owner is an individual, the individual;

b. If the owner is a corporation, an officer of the corporation;

c. If the owner is a partnership, one of the partners;

d. If the owner is a limited liability company, a manager or, if the limited liability company does not have a manager, a 

member of the limited liability company;

e. If the owner is an association or cooperative, a member of the governing board of the association or cooperative;

f. If the owner is a joint venture, one of the individuals signing the joint venture agreement;

g. If the owner is a governmental agency, the individual in the senior leadership position with the agency or an 

individual designated in writing by that individual; or

h. If the owner is a business organization type other than those described in subsections (A)(23)(b) through (f), an 

individual who is a member of the business organization.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 5 of 53

B. An application may include an agreement between the applicant and the Department that the Department may submit 

supplemental requests for additional information.

C. An applicant shall submit an application:

1. For an initial license for an in-state laboratory, at least 30 days before the applicant intends to begin operating the in-state 

laboratory;

2. For an initial license for an out-of-state laboratory, at least 60 days before the applicant intends to begin performing 

Arizona compliance testing;

3. For a renewal license for an in-state laboratory, at least 30 days before the expiration date of the current license; and

4. For a renewal license for an out-of-state laboratory, at least 60 days before the expiration date of the current license.

D. The Department may issue a single laboratory license for:

1. A single laboratory;

2. Multiple laboratories that are located on contiguous grounds and have the same owner, if the applicant submits one 

application and combined fees for the laboratories; or

3. Multiple laboratories, including mobile laboratories, that have the same owner but are not located on contiguous grounds, 

if:

a. The applicant submits a separate application and fees for each laboratory,

b. Each non-mobile laboratory is located in Arizona, and

c. Each mobile laboratory has a current and valid Arizona vehicle registration.

E. The Department shall not issue a single laboratory license for multiple laboratories that do not meet the requirements of 

subsection (D)(2) or (3).

F. The Department shall not consider an applicant to be in compliance with the requirements for licensure, as provided under 

A.R.S. § 36-495.09(A)(5), if the applicant does not pay the appropriate fees required under R9-14-607 and R9-14-608.

G. The Department shall process an application as provided in R9-14-621.

H. A laboratory license is valid only for the facility or facilities for which the license is issued and cannot be transferred to 

another facility.

I. A laboratory license is valid only in the name of the persons to whom it is issued and expires upon a change in laboratory 

name, laboratory director, or ownership, unless within 20 business days after the change, the Department receives written 

notice of the change and an application for a new license.

J. The Department shall not charge a fee for a license application submitted under subsection (I) and shall issue a new license 

reflecting the change upon determining continued compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-603 repealed, new Section R9-14-603 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; Section amended 

effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 

(Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-604. Third Party Accreditation

A. A laboratory that holds current and valid accreditation issued by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program 

administered by the National Institute of Standards and Technology is exempt from licensure under this Article, as 

authorized under A.R.S. § 36-495.02, for the term of the accreditation.

B. If a laboratory's accreditation issued by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program expires or is suspended,

revoked, or voluntarily terminated, the laboratory is required to be licensed as provided under A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 

and this Article.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-604 repealed, new Section R9-14-604 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Section R9-

14-604 renumbered to R9-14-605; new Section adopted effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Amended by final 

rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Section repealed; new Section made by final 

rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-605. Compliance Monitoring

A. The Department may conduct a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency testing, or any combination of the three, at 

any time before or during a laboratory's license period.

B. The Department shall conduct at least two laboratory inspections before determining whether to conduct annual laboratory 

inspections as provided under subsection (C).

C. In determining whether to conduct an annual laboratory inspection, the Department shall consider:

1. The Department's findings at the last two laboratory inspections;

2. The licensee's adherence to any corrective action plans created as a result of the last two laboratory inspections;

3. Whether there has been a change in ownership or laboratory director since the last laboratory inspection;

4. The extent to which the compliance testing performed at the laboratory has changed since the last laboratory inspection or

would change as a result of a renewal application; and
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 6 of 53

5. Performance on the most recent proficiency testing completed at the laboratory.

D. For a laboratory at which drinking water compliance testing is performed, the Department shall conduct a laboratory 

inspection at least every three years or as otherwise required by the EPA.

E. The Department shall comply with A.R.S. § 41-1009 in conducting laboratory inspections and investigations that occur at a 

laboratory.

F. If the Department determines based on a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency testing, or any combination of the 

three, that a laboratory owner, officer, agent, or employee has engaged in conduct described under A.R.S. § 36-495.09(A) 

the Department shall request that the licensee or applicant submit to the Department a written corrective action plan, unless 

the Department determines one of the following, in which case the Department may take action under A.R.S. § 36-495.09:

1. That the deficiencies were committed intentionally;

2. That the deficiencies cannot be corrected within a reasonable period of time;

3. That the deficiencies are evidence of a pattern of noncompliance;

4. That the deficiencies are a risk to any person; the public health, safety, or welfare; or the environment; or

5. That there is a reasonable belief, as stated in A.R.S. § 36-495.09(B), that a violation of A.R.S. § 36-495.09(A)(5) has 

occurred and that the life or safety of the public is immediately affected.

G. Within 30 days after receiving a request for a written corrective action plan, a licensee or applicant shall submit to the 

Department a written corrective action plan that includes the following for each identified deficiency:

1. A description of how the deficiency will be corrected, and

2. A date of correction for the deficiency.

H. The Department shall accept a written corrective action plan if the plan:

1. Describes how each identified deficiency will be corrected, and

2. Includes a date for correcting each deficiency as soon as practicable based upon the actions necessary to correct the 

deficiency.

I. If the Department disapproves a corrective action plan, the Department shall send to the licensee or applicant a written notice 

of disapproval requesting that the licensee or applicant submit to the Department a revised corrective action plan for the 

items that the Department disapproves.

1. A licensee or applicant shall submit a revised corrective action plan to the Department within 21 days after the date of a

written notice of disapproval.

2. If a licensee or applicant does not submit a revised corrective action plan within 21 days after the date of a written notice 

of disapproval, the Department may take action under A.R.S. § 36-495.09.

J. A licensee or applicant shall notify the Department when corrective action has been completed.

K. Within 30 days after receiving notice that corrective action has been completed, the Department shall determine whether each 

deficiency has been corrected and whether the corrective action brings the laboratory operations into substantial compliance 

with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article.

L. If the Department determines that a licensee or applicant has not corrected a deficiency or that the licensee or applicant has not 

corrected a deficiency within a reasonable period of time, the Department may take any enforcement action authorized by 

law as a result of the deficiency.

M. Under A.R.S. § 41-1009(G), the Department's decision regarding whether a licensee or applicant may submit a corrective

action plan or whether a deficiency has been corrected or has been corrected within a reasonable period of time is not an 

appealable agency action as defined by A.R.S. § 41-1092.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-605 repealed, new Section R9-14-605 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Section R9-

14-605 renumbered to R9-14-606; new Section R9-14-605 renumbered from R9-14-604 and amended effective June 

20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-605 renumbered to R9-14-606; new Section R9-14-605 adopted by final 

rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 

4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-606. Provisional Licensing

A. The Department may issue a provisional license to a licensee when the Department suspends the licensee's regular license 

because of deficiencies identified in an investigation, laboratory inspection, or proficiency testing, or any combination of the 

three, if the licensee agrees to carry out a plan acceptable to the Department to eliminate the deficiencies.

B. In determining whether to issue a provisional license, the Department shall consider:

1. The nature of the deficiencies upon which the suspension is based;

2. The licensee's history of compliance with A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article;

3. The extent to which the public health and safety may be impacted by the continued operation of the laboratory with a 

provisional license; and

4. The extent to which the public's interests are served by allowing the licensee the opportunity to correct the deficiencies 

and continue operating with a provisional license.

C. The Department shall issue an amended list of parameters for a provisional license.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 7 of 53

D. A licensee shall return its regular license to the Department within 14 days after receiving written notification of license 

suspension.

E. A provisional license is valid for a period established by the Department, not to exceed 12 months.

F. A licensee with a provisional license who desires to obtain a regular license shall apply for an initial license at least 30 days 

before the provisional license expires. 

G. The Department shall issue a regular license as described in subsection (F) only upon determining that a licensee is in full 

compliance with the corrective action plan; A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3; and this Article.

H. The Department shall not issue a provisional license to an applicant for an initial license.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-606 repealed, new Section R9-14-606 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Section R9-

14-606 renumbered to R9-14-607; new Section R9-14-606 renumbered from R9-14-605 and amended effective June 

20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-606 renumbered to R9-14-607; new Section R9-14-606 renumbered from 

R9-14-605 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by 

final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-607. Fees

A. Except as provided in R9-14-608, an applicant shall submit the following fees to the Department with each application for an 

initial or renewal license:

1. The cumulative method and instrumentation fees for each laboratory, as determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in 

Exhibit I;

2. The following application fees:

a. If applying for a single license for a single laboratory, which may include multiple laboratories located on contiguous 

grounds and having the same owner, the following fee:

i. For a Level I license, $1,677;

ii. For a Level II license, $2,130; or

iii. For a Level III license, $2,348; or

b. If applying for a single license for multiple laboratories not located on contiguous grounds, the following fee for 

each laboratory:

i. For a Level I license, $1,442;

ii. For a Level II license, $1,895; and

iii. For a Level III license, $2,130;

3. An administrative fee of $130 for the proficiency testing to occur during the license period; and

4. If applying for an out-of-state laboratory, an annual information update fee of $126.

B. The fees paid to the Department under this Article are nonrefundable, unless A.R.S. § 41-1077 applies.

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-607 repealed, new Section R9-14-607 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; former Section R9-

14-607 renumbered to R9-14-608; new Section R9-14-607 renumbered from R9-14-606 and amended effective June 

20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-607 renumbered to R9-14-609; new Section R9-14-607 renumbered from 

R9-14-606 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by 

final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-608. Installment Payment of Fees by Small Businesses

A. A licensee may, for license renewal, pay the fees calculated under R9-14-607(A)(1), (3), and (4) to the Department in 12 or 

fewer installments if the laboratory owner is a small business.

B. A licensee who desires to make payments in installments as described in subsection (A) shall indicate this on the application 

for license renewal and shall indicate a monthly, bimonthly, or quarterly schedule for the payments, which shall result in full 

payment within 12 or fewer months.

C. A licensee making installment payments shall submit the first installment to the Department along with the application for 

license renewal and the application fee calculated under R9-14-607(A)(2), and each subsequent installment on a monthly, 

bimonthly, or quarterly basis, as indicated on the application, or until the fees are paid in full, whichever comes first.

D. A licensee shall ensure that each installment payment is:

1. Paid by the first day of the month in which it is due; and

2. At least equal to the amount calculated by dividing the total fees due under R9-14-607(A)(1), (3), and (4) by the number 

of payments indicated on the application for license renewal.

E. If a licensee fails to submit an installment within seven days after its due date, the Department shall charge a $50 fee for 

processing the late payment.

F. If a licensee fails to submit an installment within 30 days after its due date, the Department may initiate action under A.R.S. § 

36-495.09.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 8 of 53

Historical Note

Adopted effective August 16, 1985 (Supp. 85-4). Former Section R9-14-608 repealed, new Section R9-14-608 adopted 

effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Section citation corrected in preceding historical note; Section R9-14-608 

renumbered to R9-14-609; new Section R9-14-608 renumbered from R9-14-607 and amended effective June 20, 1997 

(Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-608 renumbered to R9-14-610; new Section R9-14-608 adopted by final 

rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 

4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-609. Proficiency Testing

A. At least once in each 12-month period, and more often if requested by the Department, each licensee or applicant that 

performs drinking water compliance testing shall have at least one laboratory analyst demonstrate proficiency in drinking 

water compliance testing by participating in proficiency testing provided by the Department, the EPA, or a proficiency 

testing service.

B. Each proficiency testing for drinking water compliance testing shall include at least one proficiency testing sample for each 

parameter for which an initial license or renewal license has been issued or requested. If more than one method is used to 

test for an analyte, a different lot shall be used for each method. 

C. At least once in each 12-month period, and more often if requested by the Department, each licensee or applicant that 

performs non-drinking-water compliance testing shall have at least one laboratory analyst demonstrate proficiency in nondrinking-water compliance testing by participating in proficiency testing provided by the Department, the EPA, or a 

proficiency testing service, if proficiency testing is available.

D. Each proficiency testing for non-drinking-water compliance testing shall include at least one proficiency testing sample for 

each parameter for which an initial license or renewal license has been issued or requested and for which proficiency testing

samples are available.

E. To demonstrate proficiency for a parameter, test results reported for the parameter shall be within acceptance limits established 

by:

1. For drinking water inorganic chemistry parameters, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.23; 

2. For drinking water organic chemistry parameters, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.24;

3. For lead or copper in drinking water, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.89;

4. For disinfection byproducts in drinking water, the EPA, as provided in 40 CFR 141.131; and

5. For other parameters, the EPA or the proficiency testing service.

F. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that:

1. Each proficiency testing sample accepted at the licensee's or applicant's laboratory is analyzed at the licensee's or 

applicant's laboratory;

2. Each proficiency testing sample is tested within the holding times required for its parameter, using the same procedures 

and techniques employed for routine sample testing, and calculating the holding time from the time the sample seal is 

broken or as indicated in the instructions accompanying the sample;

3. A proficiency testing service provides proficiency testing results directly to the Department;

4. If proficiency testing is provided by the Department, the licensee or applicant submits to the Department payment for the 

actual costs of the proficiency testing materials; and

5. If proficiency testing is not provided by the Department or the EPA, the licensee or applicant selects a proficiency testing 

service and contracts with and pays the proficiency testing service directly for proficiency testing.

G. The Department may submit blind proficiency testing samples to a licensed laboratory at any time during the license period.

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-609 renumbered to R9-14-610; new Section R9-

14-609 renumbered from R9-14-608 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-609 

renumbered to R9-14-611; new Section R9-14-609 renumbered from R9-14-607 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-610. Approved Methods and References

A. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that compliance testing is performed according to an approved method and may use 

method alterations approved by the Department under subsection (C).

B. The approved methods listed by parameter in Exhibit I, Table 1 are found in the following references, which are incorporated 

by reference with the modifications described below; are on file with the Department; include no future editions or 

amendments, and are available as provided below.

Key Reference

A Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600/4-79-020, Methods for Chemical 

Analysis of Water and Wastes (rev. March 1983), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 9 of 53

A1 Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-94/111, Methods for the 

Determination of Metals in Environmental Samples: Supplement I (May 1994), available at 

http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

A2 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-93/100, Methods for the Determination of 

Inorganic Substances in Environmental Samples (August 1993), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm, modified 

to increase the maximum holding time from 48 hours to 14 days at 4° C for chlorinated, unacidified drinking water samples 

collected for determination of nitrate.

A3 Technicon Industrial Systems, Industrial Method No. 380-75WE, Fluoride in Water and Wastewater (July 1977), available 

from Bran & Luebbe Analyzing Inc., 1025 Busch Parkway, Buffalo Grove, IL 60089.

A4 Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-02-019, Method 1631, Revision E: Mercury in Water by Oxidation, Purge and 

Trap, and Cold Vapor Atomic Fluorescence Spectrometry (August 2002), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/methods/1631.html.

A5 Technicon Industrial Systems, Industrial Method No. 129-71W, Fluoride in Water and Wastewater (December 1972), 

available from Bran & Luebbe Analyzing Inc., 1025 Busch Pkwy., Buffalo Grove, IL 60089.

A6 Herbert P. Wagner et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-B-01-001, Method 317.0: Determination of Inorganic Oxyhalide 

Disinfection By-Products in Drinking Water Using Ion Chromatography with the Addition of a Postcolumn Reagent for 

Trace Bromate Analysis (rev. 2.0 July 2001), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html.

A7 Herbert P. Wagner et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-R-05-007, Method 326.0: Determination of Inorganic Oxyhalide 

Disinfection By-Products in Drinking Water Using Ion Chromatography Incorporating the Addition of a Suppressor 

Acidified Postcolumn Reagent for Trace Bromate Analysis (rev. 1.0 June 2002), available at 

www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html.

A8 Teri A. Dattilio et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-R-05-008, Method 327.0: Determination of Chlorine Dioxide and Chlorite Ion 

in Drinking Water Using Lissamine Green B and Horseradish Peroxidase with Detection by Visible Spectrophotometry (rev. 

1.1 May 2005), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html.

A9 B.B. Potter and J.C. Wimsatt, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-05/055, Method 415.3: Determination of Total Organic Carbon and 

Specific UV Absorbance at 254 nm in Source and Drinking Water (rev. 1.1 February 2005), available at

www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm.

B Herman L. Krieger, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600/4-75-008, Interim Radiochemical Methodology for Drinking Water (March 

1976), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

C American Public Health Association et al., Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (19th ed. 1995), 

available from American Public Health Association, 800 I Street, NW, Washington, DC 20001.

C1 Hach Company, Hach Water Analysis Handbook (3rd ed. 1997), available from Hach Company, P.O. Box 389, Loveland, CO 

80539-0389.

C2 American Public Health Association et al., Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater (20th ed. 1998), 

available from American Public Health Association, 800 I St., NW, Washington, DC 20001, modified to require:

a. For drinking water TOC testing:

i. That inorganic carbon be removed from each TOC sample before analysis,

ii. That each TOC sample not be filtered before analysis,

iii. That the pH of each TOC sample be checked and documented before analysis and that the test result be qualified in 

the final report if the sample pH was >2, and

iv. That each acidified TOC sample be analyzed within 28 days; and

b. For drinking water DOC testing:

i. That each DOC sample be filtered through a 0.45 um pore-diameter filter as soon as practical and no later than 48 

hours after sampling,

ii. That each DOC sample be acidified after filtration to achieve a pH 2 with minimal addition of the acid specified in 

the method or by the instrument manufacturer,

iii. That each acidified DOC sample be analyzed within 28 days after sample collection,

iv. That inorganic carbon be removed from each DOC sample before analysis,

v. That water passed through the filter before filtration of the DOC sample serve as the filtered blank, and

vi. That the filtered blank be analyzed using procedures identical to those used for analysis of the DOC sample and 

have DOC < 0.5 mg/L;

c. For drinking water testing of UV-absorbing organic constituents:

i. That UV absorption be measured at 253.7 nm or 254 nm,

ii. That each UV sample be filtered through a 0.45 um pore-diameter filter before analysis,

iii. That the pH of UV samples not be adjusted, and

iv. That each UV sample be analyzed as soon as practical and no later than 48 hours after sampling; and

d. For drinking water disinfection byproducts testing by micro liquid-liquid extraction/GC-ECD using method 6251B, that 

each sample be extracted within 14 days after sample collection.

D Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4-88/039, Methods for the Determination 

of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water (rev. July 1991), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 10 of 53

D1 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4-90/020, Methods for the 

Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water: Supplement I (July 1990), available at 

http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

D2 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-92/129, Methods for the 

Determination of Organic Compounds in Drinking Water: Supplement II (August 1992), available at 

http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

D3 National Exposure Research Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-95/131, Methods for the Determination of 

Organic Compounds in Drinking Water: Supplement III (August 1995), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

D4 Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water Technical Support Center, EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-R-05-004, Manual for the 

Certification of Laboratories Analyzing Drinking Water: Criteria and Procedures Quality Assurance (5th ed. January 2005), 

available at http://www.epa.gov/ogwdw/labcert/labindex.html).

D5 J.W. Munch and W.J. Bashe, EPA, Method 549.2: Determination of Diquat and Paraquat in Drinking Water by Liquid-Solid 

Extraction and High Performance Liquid Chromatography with Ultraviolet Detection (rev. 1 June 1997), available at 

http://www.nemi.gov.

D6 Anne M. Pawlecki-Vonderheide and David J. Munch, EPA, Method 515.3: Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Drinking 

Water by Liquid-Liquid Extraction, Derivatization and Gas Chromatography with Electron Capture Detection (rev. 1 July 

1996), available at http://www.nemi.gov.

D7 M.V. Bassett et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-B-01-002, Method 531.2: Measurement of N-Methylcarbamoyloximes and NMethylcarbamates in Water by Direct Aqueous Injection HPLC with Postcolumn Derivatization (rev. 1.0 September 2001), 

available at http://www.nemi.gov.

D8 S.C. Wendelken et al., EPA, Method 515.4: Determination of Chlorinated Acids in Drinking Water by Liquid-Liquid 

Microextraction, Derivatization, and Fast Gas Chromatography with Electron Capture Detection (rev. 1.0 April 2000), 

available at http://www.nemi.gov.

D9 Ed K. Price et al., EPA, Pub. No. 815-R-05-005, Method 527: Determination of Selected Pesticides and Flame Retardants in 

Drinking Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) (rev. 

1.0 April 2005), available at http://www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html.

D10 J.W. Munch, EPA, Pub. No. 600/R-05/052, Method 529: Determination of Explosives and Related Compounds in Drinking 

Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography/Mass Spectrometry (GC/MS) (rev. 1.0 

September 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm.

D11 J.A. Shoemaker and M.V. Bassett, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-05/053, Method 535: Measurement of Chloroacetanilide and 

Other Acetamide Herbicide Degradates in Drinking Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Liquid Chromatography/Tandem 

Mass Spectrometry (LC/MS/MS) (version 1.1 April 2005), available at http://www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm.

D12 J.W. Munch and M.V. Bassett, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-05/054, Method 521: Determination of Nitrosamines in Drinking 

Water by Solid Phase Extraction and Capillary Column Gas Chromatography with Large Volume Injection and Chemical 

Ionization Tandem Mass Spectrometry (MS/MS) (version 1.0 September 2004), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/ordmeth.htm.

D13 M.M. Domino et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-B-03-002, Method 552.3: Determination of Haloacetic Acids and Dalapon in 

Drinking Water by Liquid-Liquid Extraction, Derivatization, and Gas Chromatography with Electron Capture Detection 

(rev. 1.0 July 2003), available at www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/sourcalt.html.

E 40 CFR Part 136 app. A (July 2005), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.html).

E1 Office of Water Engineering and Analysis Division, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-93-010-A, Methods for the Determination of 

Nonconventional Pesticides in Municipal and Industrial Wastewater: Volume I (rev. 1 August 1993), available from 

National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

F Office of Solid Waste and Emergency Response, EPA, Pub. No. SW-846, Test Methods for Evaluating Solid Waste, 

Physical/Chemical Methods (3rd ed. 1986), as amended by Update I, July 1992; Update IIA, August 1993; Update II, 

September 1994; Update IIB, January 1995; Update III, December 1996; Update IIIA, June 1999; and Update IIIB, July 

2005, available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161, and at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/main.htm.

F1 Thomas A. Bellar and James J. Lichtenberg, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600/4-81-045, The Determination of Polychlorinated 

Biphenyls in Transformer Fluid and Waste Oils (September 1982), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

F2 EPA, Method 5035A: Closed-System Purge-and-Trap and Extraction for Volatile Organics in Soil and Waste Samples (draft 

rev. 1 July 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F3 EPA, Method 4025: Screening for Polychlorinated Dibenzodioxins and Polychlorinated Dibenzofurans (PCDD/Fs) by 

Immunoassay (rev. 0 October 2002), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F4 EPA, Method 3570: Microscale Solvent Extraction (MSE) (rev. 0 November 2002), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F5 EPA, Method 3511: Organic Compounds in Water by Microextraction (rev. 0 November 2002), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F6 EPA, Method 5030C: Purge-and-Trap for Aqueous Samples (rev. 3 May 2003), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F7 EPA, Method 8015D: Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID (rev. 4 June 2003), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 11 of 53

F8 EPA, Method 5021A: Volatile Organic Compounds in Various Sample Matrices Using Equilibrium Headspace Analysis (rev. 

1 June 2003), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F9 EPA, Method 9015: Metal Cyanide Complexes by Anion Exchange Chromatography and UV Detection (rev. 0 November 

2004), available at http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F10 EPA, Method 9013A: Cyanide Extraction Procedure for Solids and Oils (rev. 1 November 2004), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm.

F11 EPA, Method 7000B: Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry (rev. 2 January 1998), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/up4a.htm#7_series.

F12 EPA, Method 7010: Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry (rev. 0 January 1998), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/up4a.htm#7_series.

G National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Pub. No. 84-100, 

NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods: Volume 1, (3rd ed. February 1984), updated May 1985, August 1987, and May 

1989, available from Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402-9325.

H Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Research Triangle Park, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600/M4-82-020, Interim Method 

for the Determination of Asbestos in Bulk Insulation Samples (December 1982), available at http://www.rti.org/pubs/testmethod.pdf.

H1 Eric J. Chatfield and M. Jane Dillon, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600/4-83-043, Method 100.1: Analytical Method for Determination 

of Asbestos Fibers in Water (September 1983), available at http://www.nemi.gov.

H2 Kim A. Brackett et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-94/134, Method 100.2: Determination of Asbestos Structures over 10 m in 

Length in Drinking Water (June 1994), available at http://www.nemi.gov.

I ASTM, Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Vols. 11.01 and 11.02 (1995), available from ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor 

Dr., P.O. Box C700, W. Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

J U.S. Geological Survey, U.S. Department of the Interior, "Methods for Determination of Inorganic Substances in Water and 

Fluvial Sediments," published in Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the United States Geological Survey at 

bk. 5, ch. A1 (3rd ed. 1989), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 

22161.

J1 L.L. Thatcher et al., U.S. Department of the Interior, "Methods for Determination of Radioactive Substances in Water and 

Fluvial Sediments," published in Techniques of Water-Resources Investigations of the United States Geological Survey at 

bk. 5, ch. A5 (3rd ed. 1989), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 

22161.

K Division of State Laboratory Services, Arizona Department of Health Services, Method No. BLS-188, Ethylene Glycol in 

Waste Water (rev. April 1991); and Bureau of State Laboratory Services, Arizona Department of Health Services, C10 -

C32 Hydrocarbons in Soil - 8015AZ (rev. 1.0 September 1998), available from the Bureau of State Laboratory Services, 250 

N. 17th Ave., Phoenix, AZ 85007, and at www.azdhs.gov/lab/license/tech/bls188.pdf and 

www.azdhs.gov/lab/license/tech/8015azr1.pdf.

K1 Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-98-002, Method 1664, Revision A: N-Hexane Extractable Material (HEM; Oil 

and Grease) and Silica Gel Treated N-Hexane Extractable Material (SGT-HEM; Non-polar Material) by Extraction and 

Gravimetry (February 1999), available at http://www.nemi.gov.

K2 Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-B-98-016, Analytical Methods for the Determination of Pollutants in 

Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Industry Wastewater (July 1998), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/guide/pharm/compend1.pdf.

L Herman L. Krieger and Earl L. Whittaker, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600/4-80-032, Prescribed Procedures for Measurement of

Radioactivity in Drinking Water (August 1980), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal 

Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

M1 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4-90/027F, Methods for Measuring the 

Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms (4th ed. August 1993), available 

from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

N1 Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Cincinnati, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-600-4-91-002, Short-Term Methods for 

Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Water to Freshwater Organisms (3rd ed. July 1994), available at 

http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

O 40 CFR Part 50 (July 2006), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.html).

P EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4-84/013, USEPA Manual of Methods for Virology (rev. June 2001), Chapters 1-12 and 14-16 

available at www.epa.gov/nerlcwww/about.htm and Chapter 13 available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

P1 Jay Vasconcelos and Stephanie Harris, EPA, Pub. No. EPA 910/9-92-029, Consensus Method for Determining Groundwaters 

Under the Direct Influence of Surface Water Using Microscopic Particulate Analysis (MPA) (October 1992), available from 

National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

P2 G. Shay Fout et al., EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/R-95/178, ICR Microbial Laboratory Manual (April 1996), available at 

http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

P3 Charles P. Gerba, University of Arizona, U of A 2000: Ascaris lumbricoides in Water (1999), available from the University of 

Arizona, Microbial Analytical Laboratory, Building No. 90, Rm. 406, Tucson, AZ 85721.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 12 of 53

P4 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-R-05-001, Method 1622: Cryptosporidium in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA (December 2005), 

available at http://www.epa.gov/microbes/, modified to require flow cytometer-counted spiking suspensions for MS samples 

and ongoing precision and recovery samples.

P5 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-R-05-002, Method 1623: Cryptosporidium and Giardia in Water by Filtration/IMS/FA (December 

2005), available at http://www.epa.gov/microbes/, modified to require flow cytometer-counted spiking suspensions for MS 

samples and ongoing precision and recovery samples.

Q 40 CFR Part 60 app. A (July 2006), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.html).

R Office of Air Quality, ADEQ, Arizona Testing Manual for Air Pollutant Emissions (rev. F March 1992), available from the 

Office of Air Quality, ADEQ, 1110 W. Washington St., Phoenix, AZ 85007, and at 

http://www.azdeq.gov/environ/air/compliance/download/manual.pdf.

S 40 CFR Part 61 apps. B and C (July 2006), available at http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/cfr-table-search.html).

S1 EPA, Pub. No. EPA/625/R-96/010b, Compendium of Methods for the Determination of Toxic Organic Compounds in 

Ambient Air (2nd ed. January 1999), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

U Environmental Measurements Laboratory, U.S. Department of Energy, Pub. No. HASL-300, EML Procedures Manual, Vol. I 

(28th ed. February 1997), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 

22161.

V Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility, EPA, Pub. No. EPA 520/5-84-006, Eastern Environmental Radiation Facility 

Radiochemistry Procedures Manual (2nd prtg. 1988), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. 

Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

W Environmental Monitoring and Support Laboratory Las Vegas, EPA, Pub. No. EMSL-LV-0539-17, Radiochemical Analytical 

Procedures for Analysis of Environmental Samples (March 1979), available from National Technical Information Service, 

5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

X Office of Ground Water and Drinking Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/4-91/016, Test Methods for Escherichia Coli in 

Drinking Water: EC Medium with Mug Tube Procedure, Nutrient Agar with Mug Membrane Filter Procedure (July 1991), 

available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleord.htm.

Y Office of Water, EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-99-013, Method OIA-1677: Available Cyanide by Flow Injection, Ligand 

Exchange, and Amperometry (August 1999), available at http://www.epa.gov/waterscience/methods/cyanide/.

Z EPA, Pub. No. EPA 815-R-00-014, Volume 1, Methods for the Determination of Organic and Inorganic Compounds in 

Drinking Water (August 2000), available at http://nepis.epa.gov/pubtitleOW.htm, modified to require the following when 

testing for bromate using method 321.8:

a. That each sample be analyzed within 28 days after sampling, and

b. That the test result be qualified in the final report if the sample was not preserved with 50 mg of ethylenediamine per liter 

of sample at the time of sampling.

Z1 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 821/R/01/034, EPA Method 1605: Aeromonas in Finished Water by Membrane Filtration Using 

Ampicillin-Dextrin Agar with Vancomycin (ADA-V) (October 2001), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/pdfs/met1605.pdf.

Z2 EPA, Pub. No. EPA 821/R-93-010-A, Methods for the Determination of Nonconventional Pesticides in Municipal and 

Industrial Wastewater, Volume I (rev. 1 August 1993), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. 

Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

Z3 EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-02-013, Short-term Methods for Estimating the Chronic Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving 

Waters to Freshwater Organisms (4th ed. October 2002), available at www.epa.gov/ost/wet/disk3/.

Z4 IDEXX Laboratories, Inc., IDEXX SimPlate TM HPC Method for Heterotrophs in Water (November 2000), available from 

IDEXX Laboratories, Inc., One IDEXX Dr., Westbrook, ME 04092.

Z5 William A. Yanko, EPA, Pub. No. EPA/600/1-87/014, Occurrence of Pathogens in Distribution and Marketing Municipal 

Sludges (1987), available from National Technical Information Service, 5285 Prt. Royal Rd., Springfield, VA 22161.

Z6 ASTM, Standard Test Methods for Determining Sediment Concentration in Water Samples (reapproved 2002), available from 

ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbor Dr., P.O. Box C700, W. Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.

Z7 CEM Corporation, Closed Vessel Microwave Digestion of Wastewater Samples for Determination of Metals (April 1992), 

available from CEM Corporation, P.O. Box 200, Matthews, NC 28106-0200.

Z8 EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-02-024, Method 1604: Total Coliforms and Escherichia coli in Water by Membrane Filtration 

Using a Simultaneous Detection Technique (MI Medium) (September 2002), available at 

http://www.epa.gov/safewater/methods/pdfs/met1604.pdf.

Z9 Lachat Instruments, QuikChem Method 10-204-00-1-X, Digestion and Distillation of Total Cyanide in Drinking and 

Wastewaters Using MICRO DIST and Determination of Cyanide by Flow Injection Analysis (rev. 2.1 November 30, 2000), 

available from Lachat Instruments, 6645 W. Mill Rd., Milwaukee, WI 53218.

Z10 OI Analytical/ALPKEM, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Method PAI-DK01 (Block Digestion, Steam Distillation, Titrimetric 

Detection) (rev. December 22, 1994), available from OI Analytical/ALPKEM, P.O. Box 9010, College Station, TX 77842.

Z11 OI Analytical/ALPKEM, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Method PAI-DK02 (Block Digestion, Steam Distillation, Colorimetric 

Detection) (rev. December 22, 1994), available from OI Analytical/ALPKEM, P.O. Box 9010, College Station, TX 77842.

Z12 OI Analytical/ALPKEM, Nitrogen, Total Kjeldahl, Method PAI-DK03 (Block Digestion, Automated FIA Gas Diffusion) 

(rev. December 22, 1994), available from OI Analytical/ALPKEM, P.O. Box 9010, College Station, TX 77842.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 13 of 53

Z13 EPA, Pub. No. EPA-821-R-02-012, Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to 

Freshwater and Marine Organisms (5th ed. October 2002), available at www.epa.gov/waterscience/WET/disk2/.

C. If an approved method is not available for a particular parameter, or a different method or method alteration is required or 

authorized to be used for a particular parameter by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, 

a licensee may request approval of an alternate method or method alteration.

1. For an alternate method or method alteration required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and Drug 

Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, the request shall include:

a. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee submitting the request; 

b. The name, address, and telephone number of the laboratory for which approval of the alternate method or method 

alteration is requested;

c. Identification of the parameter for which approval of the alternate method or method alteration is requested;

d. Reference to the EPA, ADEQ, U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8 requirement or authorization for 

the use of the alternate method or method alteration for which approval is requested; and

e. An alternate method or method alteration approval fee of $50 payable to the Arizona Department of Health Services 

in the form of a certified check, business check, money order, or credit card payment.

2. For an alternate method or method alteration that is not required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food and 

Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, the request shall include:

a. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee submitting the request;

b. The name, address, and telephone number of the laboratory for which approval of the alternate method or method 

alteration is requested;

c. Identification of the parameter for which approval of the alternate method or method alteration is requested; and

d. Written justification for using the alternate method or method alteration for which approval is requested, including 

the following:

i. A detailed description of the alternate method or method alteration;

ii. References to published or other studies confirming the general applicability of the alternate method or method 

alteration to the parameter for which its use is intended;

iii. Reference to the EPA, ADEQ, U.S. Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8 requirement to test the 

parameter; and

iv. Data that demonstrate the performance of the alternate method or method alteration in terms of accuracy, 

precision, reliability, ruggedness, ease of use, and ability to achieve a detection limit appropriate for the 

proposed use of the alternate method or method alteration; and

e. An alternate method or method alteration approval fee of $50 payable to the Arizona Department of Health Services 

in the form of a certified check, business check, money order, or credit card payment.

3. Before approving an alternate method or method alteration that is not required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. 

Food and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8, the Department may require that the alternate method or method 

alteration be performed by a laboratory at a designated by the Department to verify that, using the parameter for which 

its use is intended, the alternate method or method alteration produces data that comply with subsection (C)(2)(d)(iv).

4. The Department may approve an alternate method or method alteration if the Department determines:

a. One of the following:

i. Use of the alternate method or method alteration is required or authorized by the EPA, ADEQ, the U.S. Food 

and Drug Administration, or 9 A.A.C. 8; or

ii. Use of the alternate method or method alteration is justified as described in subsection (C)(2)(d); and

b. If the alternate method or method alteration pertains to drinking water compliance testing, the EPA concurs that the 

alternate method or method alteration may be used.

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-610 renumbered to R9-14-611; new Section R9-

14-610 renumbered from R9-14-609 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-610 

renumbered to R9-14-612; new Section R9-14-610 renumbered from R9-14-608 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 10 A.A.R. 1687, effective 

April 6, 2004 (Supp. 04-2). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-611. Drinking Water Compliance Testing

A licensee for a laboratory at which drinking water compliance testing is performed shall ensure that:

1. The laboratory is operated in compliance with the guidelines in Key Reference D4, excluding the requirements for 

laboratory personnel education and experience;

2. Each drinking water sample for Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved method:

a. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section A, Drinking Water Parameters; or

b. Approved for drinking water compliance testing under R9-14-610(C); and

3. If the licensee desires to be licensed to perform testing for vinyl chloride, the licensee also obtains licensure to perform 

testing for each of the analytes listed in 40 CFR 141.61(a)(2)-(21).
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 14 of 53

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-611 renumbered to R9-14-612; new Section R9-

14-611 renumbered from R9-14-610 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-611 

renumbered to R9-14-613; new Section R9-14-611 renumbered from R9-14-609 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-612. Wastewater Compliance Testing

A licensee for a laboratory at which wastewater compliance testing is performed shall ensure that each wastewater sample for 

Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved method:

1. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section B, Wastewater Parameters; or

2. Approved for wastewater compliance testing under R9-14-610(C).

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-612 renumbered to R9-14-613; new Section R9-

14-612 renumbered from R9-14-611 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-612 

renumbered to R9-14-614; new Section R9-14-612 renumbered from R9-14-610 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-613. Solid Waste Compliance Testing

A. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed shall ensure that each solid waste sample for 

Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved method:

1. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section C, Solid Waste Parameters; or

2. Approved by the Department for solid waste compliance testing under R9-14-610(C).

B. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed using an 8000 series method from Key 

Reference F shall:

1. If the method includes specific quality control requirements, follow the specific quality control requirements in the 

method;

2. If the method does not include specific quality control requirements, follow all requirements in EPA, Method 8000C: 

Determinative Chromatographic Separations (rev. 3 March 2003), incorporated by reference, on file with the 

Department, including no future editions or amendments, and available at

http://www.epa.gov/epaoswer/hazwaste/test/new-meth.htm; and

3. If the method does not include specific sample extraction procedures, follow the procedures in the following from Key 

Reference F, as applicable:

a. Method 3500B,

b. Method 3600C, and

c. Method 5000.

C. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed using a non-8000 series method from Key 

Reference F shall comply with the following from Key Reference F, as applicable according to the requirements of the 

specific method:

1. Method 4000, and

2. Method 7000A.

D. A licensee for a laboratory at which solid waste compliance testing is performed using a method from Key Reference F shall

comply with Chapters 1 through 8 of Key Reference F, as applicable according to the requirements of the specific method.

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-613 renumbered to R9-14-614; new Section R9-

14-613 renumbered from R9-14-612 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-613 

renumbered to R9-14-615; new Section R9-14-613 renumbered from R9-14-611 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-614. Air and Stack Compliance Testing

A licensee for a laboratory at which air or stack compliance testing is performed shall ensure that each air or stack sample for 

Arizona compliance testing is analyzed using an approved method:

1. Listed under Exhibit I, Table 1, Section D, Air and Stack Parameters; or

2. Approved by the Department for air or stack compliance testing under R9-14-610(C).

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-614 renumbered to R9-14-615; new Section R9-

14-614 renumbered from R9-14-613 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-614 

renumbered to R9-14-616; new Section R9-14-614 renumbered from R9-14-612 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 15 of 53

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-615. Quality Assurance

A. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that the analytical data produced at the licensee's or applicant's laboratory are of known 

and acceptable precision and accuracy, as prescribed by the approved method for each analysis or as prescribed by the limits 

described under subsection (C)(9), and are scientifically valid and defensible.

B. A licensee or applicant shall have, implement, and comply with a written quality assurance plan that contains the following 

and is available at the laboratory for Department review:

1. A title page identifying the laboratory and date of review and including the laboratory director's signature of approval;

2. A table of contents;

3. An organization chart or list of the laboratory personnel, including names, line of authority, and identification of principal 

quality assurance personnel;

4. A copy of the current laboratory license and a list of licensed parameters;

5. A statement of quality assurance objectives, including data quality objectives with precision and accuracy goals and the 

criteria for determining the acceptability of each testing;

6. Specifications for:

a. Sample containers,

b. Preparation of sample containers,

c. Preservation of samples, and 

d. Maximum allowable holding times;

7. A procedure for documenting laboratory receipt of samples and tracking of samples during laboratory testing;

8. A procedure for analytical instrument calibration, including frequency of calibration and complying with the requirements 

for calibration in subsection (C);

9. A procedure for compliance testing data reduction and validation and reporting of final results, including the 

identification and treatment of data outliers, the determination of the accuracy of data transcription, and all calculations;

10. A statement of the frequency of all quality control checks;

11. A statement of the acceptance criteria for all quality control checks;

12. Preventive maintenance procedures and schedules;

13. Assessment procedures for data acceptability;

14. Corrective action procedures to be taken when results from analytical quality control checks are unacceptable, including 

steps to demonstrate the presence of any interference if the precision, accuracy, or limit of quantitation the reported 

compliance testing result is affected by the interference; and

15. Procedures for chain-of-custody documentation, including procedures for the documentation and reporting of any 

deviation from the sample handling or preservation requirements listed in this Section.

C. A licensee or applicant shall:

1. Have available at the laboratory all methods, equipment, reagents, and glassware necessary for the compliance testing for 

which the licensee or applicant is licensed or is requesting a license; 

2. Use and document the use of only reagents of a grade equal to or greater than that required by the approved methods;

3. Maintain and require each analyst to comply with a complete and current standard operating procedure for each licensed 

method, which shall include at least:

a. A requirement that the method be performed in compliance with the requirements in the approved method;

b. A description of all procedures to be followed when the method is performed;

c. A list of the concentrations for calibration standards, check standards, and spikes;

d. Requirements for instrumental conditions and set up;

e. A requirement for frequency of calibration;

f. Calculations for the quantitation of the final concentration of samples, with the actual sample dilution factors and the 

calibration algorithm used, which reflect the procedures followed; and

g. Requirements for preventative maintenance;

4. Calibrate each instrument as required by each approved method for which the equipment is used, as follows:

a. If a calibration model is specified in the method, using the specified calibration model or, if another calibration 

model has been approved by the Department as a method alteration, using the calibration model approved as a 

method alteration;

b. If multiple calibration models are included as options in the method, using one of the included calibration models or, 

if another calibration model has been approved by the Department as a method alteration, using the calibration 

model approved as a method alteration; or

c. If the method does not include a calibration model, using the manufacturer's specifications for calibration;

5. Maintain calibration documentation, including documentation that demonstrates the calculations performed using each 

calibration model;

6. Develop, document, and maintain a current limit of detection and limit of quantitation for each compliance parameter for 

each instrument; 

7. Develop each limit of detection using:
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 16 of 53

a. The protocol in the applicable test method;

b. The protocol in the applicable federal regulation; or

c. A process that complies with the guidelines in Section D.1.2 of Chapter 5, Appendix D--Essential Quality Control 

Requirements, in National Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Conference, EPA Pub. No. EPA/600/R04/003, 2003 NELAC Standard (June 5, 2003), including no future editions or amendments, which is incorporated 

by reference, on file with the Department, and available from the National Environmental Laboratory 

Accreditation Conference, US EPA ORD/NERL, Mailcode E243-05, RTP, NC 27711, or at www.epa.gov/nelac/;

8. Maintain all compliance testing equipment in proper operating condition;

9. For each parameter tested at the laboratory for which quality control acceptance criteria are not specified in the approved 

method or by EPA or ADEQ:

a. Use default limits provided in Exhibit II; or

b. Statistically develop limits from historical data by:

i. Determining the mean and standard deviation for a minimum of 20 data points not invalidated for cause, 

excluding statistical outliers;

ii. Setting the limits no more than three standard deviations from the mean and in the detectable range, using as the 

lower end of the detectable range the limit of quantitation or the lowest standard value represented in the 

initial calibration; and

iii. Explaining the origin of the lower end of the detectable range in the laboratory's standard operating procedure;

10. Discard or segregate all expired standards or reagents;

11. Maintain a record showing the traceability of reagents; and

12. Ensure that a calibration model is not used or changed to avoid necessary instrument maintenance.

D. A licensee or applicant may submit a written request to the Department for an exemption from subsection (C)(1) for a specific 

parameter if the licensee or applicant:

1. Documents that the approved method has been performed at the laboratory and that the analytical data generated were 

scientifically valid and defensible and of known and acceptable precision and accuracy; and

2. Documents the licensee's or applicant's ability to obtain the equipment, reagent, or glassware necessary to perform the 

approved method.

E. The written request for an exemption under subsection (D) shall include:

1. The name, address, and main telephone number of the laboratory;

2. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee or applicant submitting the request;

3. Identification of the parameter and the equipment, reagent, or glassware for which the licensee or applicant is requesting 

an exemption; and

4. The documentation described in subsections (D)(1) and (2).

F. The Department may approve a request for an exemption under subsection (D) if it determines:

1. That the approved method has been performed at the laboratory;

2. That the analytical data generated were scientifically valid and defensible and of known and acceptable precision and 

accuracy; and

3. That the license or applicant is able to obtain the equipment, reagent, or glassware necessary to perform the approved 

method.

G. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that a laboratory's written quality assurance plan is a separate document available at the 

laboratory and includes all of the components required in subsection (B), but a licensee or applicant may satisfy the 

components required in subsections (B)(3) through (15) through incorporating by reference provisions in separate 

documents such as standard operating procedures. 

H. A licensee or applicant shall ensure that each laboratory standard operating procedure is a separate document available at the 

laboratory and includes all of the components required in subsection (C)(3), but a licensee or applicant may satisfy the 

components required in subsections (C)(3)(f) and (g) through incorporating by reference provisions in separate documents 

such as other standard operating procedures.

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-615 renumbered to R9-14-616; new Section R9-

14-615 renumbered from R9-14-614 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-615 

renumbered to R9-14-617; new Section R9-14-615 renumbered from R9-14-613 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-616. Operation

A licensee shall ensure that:

1. A compliance testing sample accepted at the licensee's laboratory is analyzed:

a. At the licensee's laboratory,

b. At another laboratory licensed under this Article, or

c. At a laboratory exempted under A.R.S. § 36-495.02(A) or R9-14-602;

2. The facility and utilities required to operate equipment and perform compliance testing are maintained;
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 17 of 53

3. Environmental controls are maintained within the laboratory to ensure that laboratory environmental conditions do not 

affect analytical results beyond quality control limits established for the methods performed at the laboratory;

4. Storage, handling, and disposal of hazardous materials at the laboratory are in accordance with all state and federal 

regulations;

5. The following information is maintained for all supervisory, quality assurance, and analytical personnel:

a. A summary of each individual's education and professional experience;

b. Documentation of each individual's review of the quality assurance plan required under R9-14-615(B) and the 

approved methods and laboratory standard operating procedures for each area of testing performed by the 

individual or for which the individual has supervisory or quality assurance responsibility;

c. Documentation of each analyst's completion of training on the use of equipment and of proper laboratory technique, 

including the name of the analyst, the name of the instructor, the duration of the training, and the date of 

completion of the training;

d. Documentation of each analyst's completion of training classes, continuing education courses, seminars, and 

conferences that relate to the testing procedures used by the analyst for compliance testing;

e. Documentation of each analyst's completion of Initial Demonstration of Capability as required by each approved 

method performed by the analyst, as applicable;

f. Documentation of each analyst's performance of proficiency testing, as applicable;

g. Documentation of each analyst's completion of training related to instrument calibration that includes:

i. Instruction on each calibration model that the analyst will use or for which the analyst will review data;

ii. For each calibration model described in subsection (5)(g)(i), the specific aspects of the calibration model that 

might compromise the data quality, such as detector saturation, lack of detector sensitivity, the calibration 

model's not accurately reflecting the calibration points, inappropriate extension of the calibration range, 

weighting factors, and dropping of mid-level calibration points without justification; and

iii. Instruction that a calibration model shall not be used or changed to avoid necessary instrument maintenance; 

and

h. Documentation of each individual's applicable certifications and specialized training; and

6. The licensee complies with all applicable federal, state, and local occupational safety and health regulations.

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-616 renumbered to R9-14-617; new Section R9-

14-616 renumbered from R9-14-615 effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-616 repealed; new 

Section R9-14-616 renumbered from R9-14-614 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective 

December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 

06-4).

R9-14-617. Laboratory Records and Reports

A licensee or applicant shall ensure that:

1. Each record and report required to be maintained by this Article is available for inspection and copying by the 

Department during normal business hours;

2. The Department is permitted to remove copied records and reports from a laboratory;

3. The licensee or applicant maintains records and reports of compliance testing for at least five years after the date of 

compliance testing, with:

a. All records and reports for at least the most current two years maintained onsite at the laboratory and the remaining 

records and reports stored in a secure storage facility;

b. Each hard copy document containing data either maintained as a hard copy document or scanned into a PDF file or 

another electronic file format that preserves an exact copy of the hard copy data; and

c. All instrument-generated electronic data maintained in a reproducible format from which reports can be produced 

and printed;

4. No portion of a record or report of compliance testing is altered or deleted to hide or misrepresent any part of the data;

5. The licensee or applicant produces all records and reports requested by the Department within 24 hours after the request 

or, if the licensee or applicant requests a period longer than 24 hours, a longer period of time agreed upon by the 

Department;

6. Upon Department request, the licensee or applicant makes available for inspection and copying the requested data from 

non-Arizona compliance samples;

7. A compliance testing record contains:

a. Sample information, including the following:

i. A unique sample identification assigned at the laboratory, 

ii. The location or location code of sample collection, 

iii. The sample collection date and time, 

iv. The type of testing to be performed, and 

v. The name of the individual who collected the sample;

b. The name and address of the client submitting the sample to the laboratory;
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 18 of 53

c. The name of the individual who submitted the sample to the laboratory;

d. The date and time of receipt of the sample at the laboratory;

e. The name of the individual who received the sample at the laboratory;

f. The dates and times of testing, including the date and time of each critical step;

g. The actual results of compliance testing, including all raw data, work sheets, and calculations performed;

h. The actual results of quality control data validating the test results, including the calibration and calculations 

performed;

i. The name of each analyst or who performed the testing; and

j. A copy of the final report;

8. A final report of compliance testing contains:

a. The name, address, and telephone number of the laboratory;

b. The license number assigned to the laboratory by the Department;

c. Actual scientifically valid and defensible results of compliance testing in appropriate units of measure, obtained in 

accordance with an approved method and quality assurance plan;

d. Qualified results of compliance testing not obtained in accordance with an approved method and quality assurance 

plan;

e. A list of each approved method used to obtain the reported results;

f. Sample information, including the following:

i. The unique sample identification assigned at the laboratory, 

ii. The location or location code of sample collection, 

iii. The sample collection date and time, 

iv. The name of the individual who collected the sample, 

v. The name of the client that submitted the sample to the laboratory, and

vi. The name of the individual who submitted the sample to the laboratory;

g. The date of analysis for each parameter reported;

h. The date of the final report; and

i. The laboratory director's or designee's signature.

Historical Note

Adopted effective December 20, 1991 (Supp. 91-4). Former Section R9-14-617 renumbered to R9-14-618; new Section R9-

14-617 renumbered from R9-14-616 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-617

renumbered to R9-14-618; new Section R9-14-617 renumbered from R9-14-615 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-618. Mobile Laboratories

A. An applicant shall obtain a license for each mobile laboratory, unless the applicant chooses the single license option for

multiple laboratories as described in R9-14-603(D).

B. A licensee or applicant for a mobile laboratory shall ensure that the mobile laboratory is operated in compliance with all of the 

requirements of this Article.

C. Upon Department request, a licensee or applicant for a mobile laboratory shall provide to the Department the mobile 

laboratory's location and a list of the parameters for which testing is performed at the mobile laboratory.

Historical Note

R9-14-618 renumbered from R9-14-617 and amended effective June 20, 1997 (Supp. 97-2). Former Section R9-14-618 

renumbered to R9-14-619; new Section R9-14-618 renumbered from R9-14-617 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 

A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-619. Out-of-State Environmental Laboratory Licensing

A. A licensee or applicant for an out-of-state laboratory at which Arizona compliance testing is performed shall comply with the 

requirements of A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3 and this Article.

B. A licensee or applicant for an out-of-state laboratory shall pay all actual expenses incurred by the Department as a result of the 

laboratory's location, including:

1. The estimated costs of each laboratory inspection or investigation at the laboratory;

2. The amount by which the actual costs of each laboratory inspection or investigation at a laboratory exceed the estimated 

costs;

3. Additional expenses incurred by the Department for each investigation at the laboratory; and

4. A zone fee for each Department representative required to appear at the laboratory to perform the laboratory inspection or 

investigation, as follows:

a. For zone 1, including California, Nevada, Utah, Colorado, and New Mexico: $114;

b. For zone 2, including all states west of the Mississippi River not listed in subsection (B)(4)(a): $179;

c. For zone 3, including all states east of the Mississippi River and Alaska and Hawaii: $290; and
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 19 of 53

d. For zone 4, including all countries outside of the United States: $516.

C. The Department shall:

1. Determine the estimated costs and zone fees for a laboratory inspection or investigation after making travel arrangements 

to visit an out-of-state laboratory;

2. Send the licensee or applicant for an out-of-state laboratory a bill for the estimated costs and zone fees, with instructions 

to submit the amount billed to the Department within 20 days after the date that the Department sends the bill; and

3. After a laboratory inspection or investigation is completed, determine the actual costs for the inspection or investigation 

and any additional expenses incurred for an investigation and:

a. If the actual costs and additional expenses exceed the estimated costs and zone fees already paid, send a bill to the 

licensee or applicant for the out-of-state laboratory for the amount by which the actual costs and expenses exceed 

the estimated costs and zone fees paid, with instructions to submit the amount billed to the Department within 20 

days after the date that the Department sends the bill; or

b. If the actual costs and expenses are less than the estimated costs and zone fees already paid, notify the licensee or 

applicant, determine whether the licensee or applicant desires a refund or a credit, and send a refund or issue a 

credit within 45 days after the date that the licensee or applicant specifies the desired form of payment.

Historical Note

New Section R9-14-619 renumbered from R9-14-618 and amended by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective 

December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 

06-4).

R9-14-620. Changes to a License

A. During the term of a license, a licensee may request to have one or more parameters added to the license.

B. To request to have one or more parameters added to a license, a licensee shall submit to the Department:

1. A written request that includes:

a. The name, address, and telephone number of the licensee submitting the request;

b. The name, address, and telephone number of the laboratory for which the addition is requested; and

c. Identification of each parameter requested to be added;

2. The applicable method and instrumentation fees, as determined according to Tables 1 and 2 in Exhibit I, payable to the 

Arizona Department of Health Services by credit card; certified check; business check; or money order; or, if the owner 

is an Arizona state agency, purchase order; 

3. If the addition results in a different Level of license, the difference between the application fee paid with the most recent 

application and the application fee for the new Level of license required under R9-14-607(A)(2), payable to the 

Arizona Department of Health Services as provided in subsection (B)(2); and

4. The following for each parameter requested to be added:

a. The limit of detection, if applicable;

b. A copy of a proficiency testing report; and

c. A copy of the standard operating procedure.

C. The Department may conduct a laboratory inspection during the substantive review period for a request to have one or more 

parameters added to a license.

D. The Department shall process a request to have one or more parameters added to a license as provided in R9-14-621.

E. A licensee may request deletion of parameters at no charge three times during a license period, but shall pay $17 per parameter 

for the fourth and each subsequent deletion requested during a license period.

Historical Note

Former R9-14-620 renumbered to R9-14-621; new R9-14-620 made by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective 

December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

R9-14-621. Time-frames

A. The overall time-frame described in A.R.S. § 41-1072 for each type of approval granted by the Department under this Article 

is set forth in Table 1. 

1. An applicant and the Department may agree in writing to extend the substantive review time-frame and the overall timeframe. 

2. An extension of the substantive review time-frame and the overall time-frame may not exceed 25% of the overall timeframe.

B. The administrative completeness review time-frame described in A.R.S. § 41-1072 for each type of approval granted by the 

Department under this Article is set forth in Table 1 and begins on the date that the Department receives an application or 

request for approval.

1. The Department shall send a notice of administrative completeness or deficiencies to an applicant within the 

administrative completeness review time-frame.

a. A notice of deficiencies shall list each deficiency and the information or items needed to complete the application or 

request for approval.
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 20 of 53

b. The administrative completeness review time-frame and the overall time-frame are suspended from the date that a 

notice of deficiencies is sent until the date that the Department receives all of the missing information or items 

from an applicant.

2. If an applicant fails to submit to the Department all of the information and items listed in a notice of deficiencies within 

60 days after the date that the Department sent the notice of deficiencies, the Department shall consider the application 

or request for approval withdrawn and deny the license or other approval requested.

3. If the Department issues a license or other approval to an applicant during the administrative completeness review timeframe, the Department shall not issue a separate written notice of administrative completeness.

C. The substantive review time-frame described in A.R.S. § 41-1072 is set forth in Table 1 and begins on the date of a notice of 

administrative completeness.

1. As part of the substantive review for an initial license application, the Department may conduct a laboratory inspection, 

investigation, or proficiency testing, or a combination of the three, as described in R9-14-605.

a. The Department shall commence a laboratory inspection, investigation, or proficiency testing, or combination of the 

three, no more than 30 days after notice of administrative completeness has been mailed for an in-state laboratory 

or no more than 60 days after notice of administrative completeness has been mailed for an out-of-state laboratory.

b. The Department and an applicant may mutually agree in writing to schedule a laboratory inspection, proficiency 

testing, or investigation later than the date required under subsection (C)(1)(a).

2. The Department shall send written notification of approval or denial of a license or other approval to an applicant within

the substantive review time-frame.

3. During the substantive review time-frame, the Department may make one comprehensive written request for additional 

information, unless the Department and applicant have agreed in writing to allow the Department to submit 

supplemental requests for information.

4. If the Department issues a comprehensive written request or a supplemental request for information, the substantive 

review time-frame and the overall time-frame are suspended from the date that the Department issues the request until 

the date that the Department receives all of the information requested.

5. If an applicant fails to submit to the Department all of the information and items listed in a comprehensive written request 

or a supplemental request for information within 60 days after the date that the Department sent the comprehensive 

written request or supplemental request for information, the Department shall deny the license or other approval 

requested.

6. The Department shall grant a license or other approval unless:

a. An applicant fails to submit requested information or a requested item as described in subsection (B)(2) or (C)(5);

b. For an initial license application or a regular license renewal application where the regular license is not suspended, 

the Department determines that grounds to deny the license exist under A.R.S. § 36-495.09;

c. For a regular license renewal application where the regular license is suspended, the Department determines that the 

licensee is not in full compliance with the corrective action plan; A.R.S. Title 36, Chapter 4.3; or this Article;

d. For a request for approval of an alternate method or method alteration, the Department determines that the alternate 

method or method alteration does not meet the standard for approval under R9-14-610(C)(4); or

e. For a request for approval of an exemption under R9-14-615(D), the Department determines that the request does not 

meet the standard for approval under R9-14-615(F).

7. If the Department denies a license or other approval, the Department shall send to the applicant a written notice of denial 

setting forth the reasons for denial and all other information required by A.R.S. § 41-1076.

Historical Note

New Section adopted by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Section R9-14-621 

renumbered from R9-14-620 and amended by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 

06-4).

Table 1. Time-frames (in days)

Type of Approval Statutory Authority

Overall 

Timeframe

Administrative

Completeness 

Review Time-frame

Substantive 

Review

Time-frame

Initial License-In-State

Laboratory

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.06, 36-495.07 201 21 180

Initial License-Out-of-State Laboratory A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.06, 36-495.07 231 21 210

Regular License

Renewal-In-State

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.06, 36-495.07 37 14 23
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 21 of 53

Laboratory

Regular License

Renewal-Out-of-State

Laboratory

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.06, 36-495.07, 36-

495.14

67 14 53

Regular License

Renewal-In-State

Laboratory with

Provisional License

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.05, 36-495.06, 36-

495.07

70 21 49

Regular License

Renewal-Out-of-State

Laboratory with

Provisional License

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.05, 36-495.06, 36-

495.07, 36-495.14

100 21 79

Request for Approval of an Alternate 

Method

or Method Alteration-Required or 

Authorized

by EPA/ADEQ

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.06 105 15 90

Request for Approval of an Alternate 

Method

or Method Alteration-Not

Required or Authorized

by EPA/ADEQ

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.06 210 30 180

Request for Approval of an Exemption 

under

R9-14-615(D)

A.R.S. § 36-495.01 60 15 45

Request to Have One or More Parameters 

Added to a License under R9-14-620 - InState Laboratory

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.06, 36-495.07 91 21 70

Request to Have One or More Parameters 

Added to a License under R9-14-620 -Outof-State Laboratory

A.R.S. §§ 36-495.01, 36-495.03, 

36-495.06, 36-495.07 121 21 100

Historical Note

New Table adopted by final rulemaking at 7 A.A.R. 184, effective December 15, 2000 (Supp. 00-4). Amended by final 

rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

EXHIBIT I. APPROVED METHODS; METHOD FEES; INSTRUMENTATION FEES

Table 1. Approved Methods; Method Fees

SECTION A. DRINKING WATER PARAMETERS

1. Microbiology of Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Aeromonas Z1 1605 $228

Coliforms, Fecal

C2

9221E $228

9222D $228

C1 Hach 8001 $228

Coliforms, Total, by Colilert (ONPG-MUG) C2 9223B $152

Coliforms, Total, by Colisure C2 9223B $152

Coliforms, Total, by Membrane Filtration C2

9222B $228

9222C $228

Coliforms, Total and E. coli, by Membrane Filtration Z8 1604 $228
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 22 of 53

Coliforms, Total, by Multiple Tube Fermentation

C2 9221B and C $228

C1 Hach 8001 $228

Coliforms, Total, by Presence/Absence C2 9221D $228

Escherichia coli X

Tube Procedure $228

Membrane Filter Procedure $228

Cryptosporidium P4 1622 $381

Giardia and Cryptosporidium P5 1623 $381

Heterotrophic Plate Count

C2 9215B $152

Z4 SimPlate $152

Microscopic Particulate Analysis P1 910/9-92-029 $228

Viruses P2 600/R-95/178 $381

2. Inorganic Chemistry and Physical Properties of Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Alkalinity C2 2320B $19

Asbestos

H1 100.1 $503

H2 100.2 $503

Bromate

A6 317.0 $76

A7 326.0 $76

Z

300.1 $26

321.8 $152

Bromide

A2 300.0 $26

A6 317.0 $76

A7 326.0 $76

Z 300.1 $26

Calcium

A1 200.7 $10

C

3111B $26

3500-Ca D $76

Carbon, Dissolved Organic

A9 415.3 $76

C2

5310B $39

5310C $39

5310D $39

Carbon, Total Organic

A9 415.3 $76

C2

5310B $39

5310C $39

5310D $39

Chloride

A2 300.0 $26

C2

4500-Cl B $39

4500-Cl D $39

4110B $26

Chloramine C2

4500-Cl D $39

4500-Cl F $39

4500-Cl G $76
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 23 of 53

Chlorine

C2

4500-Cl D $39

4500-Cl E $39

4500-Cl F $39

4500-Cl G $39

4500-Cl H $39

4500-Cl I $39

C1

Hach 8168 $39

Hach 8167 $39

Hach 8370 $39

Hach 8021 $39

Chlorine Dioxide

A8 327.0 $76

C2

4500-ClO2 C $39

4500-ClO2 D $76

4500-ClO2 E $39

Chlorite

A2 300.0 $26

A6 317.0 $76

A7 326.0 $76

A8 327.0 $76

Z 300.1 $26

Color C2 2120B $32

Corrosivity C2 2330B $39

Cyanide

A2 335.4 $76

C2

4500-CN B $7

4500-CN C $13

4500-CN E $76

4500-CN F $76

Z9 QuikChem 10-204-00-1-X $76

Cyanide, Amenable C2 4500-CN G $76

Fluoride

A2 300.0 $26

A3 380-75WE $39

C2

4500-F B $39

4500-F C $26

4500-F D $39

4500-F E $39

4110B $26

C1 Hach 8029 $39

Hardness

A1 200.7, Sum of Ca and Mg as their 

carbonates $10

C2

2340 B, Sum of Ca and Mg as their 

carbonates $10

2340 C $39

Magnesium

A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 24 of 53

Methylene Blue Active Substances C2 5540 C $39

Nitrate

A2

353.2 $76

300.0 $26

C2

4500-NO3 D $39

4500-NO3 E $76

4500-NO3 F $76

4110B $26

Nitrite

A2

353.2 $76

300.0 $26

C2

4500-NO2 B $76

4500-NO3 E $76

4500-NO3 F $76

4110B $26

Odor C2 2150B $32

Orthophosphate

A2

365.1 $76

300.0 $26

C2

4500-P E $76

4500-P F $76

4110B $26

Ozone C 4500-O3 B $39

Perchlorate Z

314.0 $76

314.1 $76

331 $152

332 $152

pH (Hydrogen Ion)

A

150.1 $39

150.2 $39

C2 4500-H B $39

C1 Hach 8156 $39

Residue, Filterable (TDS) C2 2540 C $39

Sediment Concentration Z6 D 3977-979 $13

Silica

A1 200.7 $10

C2

4500-Si C $76

4500-Si D $76

4500-Si E $76

Sodium

A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

Specific Conductance

C2 2510B $39

C1 Hach 8160 $39

Sulfate

A2

300.0 $26

375.2 $76

C2

4500-SO4 C $76

4500-SO4 D $76

4500-SO4 E $76
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 25 of 53

4500-SO4 F $76

4110B $26

Temperature, Degrees Celsius C2 2550 $13

Turbidity, Nephelometric (NTU)

A2 180.1 $39

C2 2130B $39

UV-Absorbing Organic Constituents C2 5910B $76

3. Metals in Drinking Water

a. Sample Preparation for Metals in Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Acid Extractable Metals C 3030C $7

Microwave Assisted Digestion C 3030K $7

Nitric Acid C 3030E $7

Nitric Acid/Hydrochloric Acid C 3030F $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid C 3030H $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid/Hydrofluoric Acid C 3030I $7

Nitric Acid/Sulfuric Acid C 3030G $7

Preliminary Filtration C 3030B $7

b. Methods to Analyze Metals in Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Aluminum

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111D $26

3113B $26

Antimony

A1

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Arsenic

A1

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3113B $26

3114B $76

Barium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C

3111D $26

3113B $26

Beryllium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Cadmium A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 26 of 53

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Chromium, Total

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Copper

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Iron

A1

200.7 $10

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Lead

A1

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3113B $26

Manganese

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Mercury

A 245.2 $52

A1

245.1 $52

200.8 $26

C 3112B $52

Nickel

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Selenium

A1

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3113B $26

3114B $76

Silver

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Strontium

A1 200.7 $10

C 3500-Sr B $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 27 of 53

3500-Sr C $20

3500-Sr D $26

Thallium A1

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

Uranium A1 200.8 $26

Zinc

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C 3111B $26

4. Organic Chemistry of Drinking Water

a. Methods to Comply with National Primary Drinking Water Regulations

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Disinfectant Byproducts, Solvents and Pesticides:

Alachlor

Atrazine

Dibromochloropropane

Endrin

Ethylene dibromide

Heptachlor

Heptachlorepoxide

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane

Methoxychlor

Simazine

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

Trichloroethylene

1,1,1-Trichloroethane

Tetrachloroethylene

Carbontetrachloride

Chloroform

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

Bromoform

Total Trihalomethanes

D3 551.1 (1.0) $116

VOCs by GC:

Benzene

Carbon Tetrachloride

(mono) Chlorobenzene

o-Dichlorobenzene

para-Dichlorobenzene

1,2-Dichloroethane

cis-1,2-Dichloroethylene

Trans-1,2-Dichloroethylene

Dichloromethane

1,2-Dichloropropane

Ethylbenzene

Styrene

Tetrachloroethylene

1,1,1-Trichlorothane

Trichloroethylene

Toluene

1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene

1,1-Dichloroethylene

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

Vinyl chloride

D3 502.2 (2.1) $152
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 28 of 53

Xylenes, Total

Chloroform

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

Bromoform

Total Trihalomethanes

VOCs by GC-MS:

Benzene

Carbon Tetrachloride

(mono) Chlorobenzene

o-Dichlorobenzene

para-Dichlorobenzene

1,2-Dichloroethane

cis-1,2-Dichloroethylene

Trans-1,2-Dichloroethylene

Dichloromethane

1,2-Dichloropropane

Ethylbenzene

Styrene

Tetrachloroethylene

1,1,1-Trichlorothane

Trichloroethylene

Toluene

1,2,4-Trichlorobenzene

1,1 Dichloroethylene

1,1,2-Trichloroethane

Vinyl Chloride

Xylenes, Total

Chloroform

Bromodichloromethane

Dibromochloromethane

Bromoform

Total Trihalomethanes

D3 524.2 (4.1) $152

EDB/DBCP D3 504.1 (1.1) $116

Pesticides and PCBs by GC (Microextraction):

Alachlor

Atrazine

Chlorodane

Endrin

Heptachlor

Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane

Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260

Simazine

Toxaphene

D3 505 (2.1) $152

Phthalate and Adipate Esters by GC-PID:

Di (2-ethylhexyl)adipate

Di (2-ethylhexyl)phthalate

D3 506 (1.1) $116

Pesticides by GC-NPD

Atrazine D3 507 (2.1) $116
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 29 of 53

Alachlor

Simazine

Chlorinated Pesticides by GC-ECD:

Chlordane

Endrin

Heptachlor

Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane

Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260

Toxaphene

D3 508 (3.1) $152

Chlorinated Pesticides, Herbicides,

Organohalides by GC-ECD:

Alachlor

Atrazine

Chlorodane

Endrin

Heptachlor

Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane

Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

Aroclor 1260

Simazine

Toxaphene

D3 508.1(2.0) $152

Organics by GC-MS:

Alachlor

Atrazine

Benzo(a)pyrene

Chlorodane

Di (2-ethylhexyl)adipate

Di (2-ethylhexyl)phthalate

Endrin

Heptachlor

Heptachlor Epoxide

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorocyclopentadiene

Lindane

Methoxychlor

Aroclor 1016

Aroclor 1221

Aroclor 1232

Aroclor 1242

Aroclor 1248

Aroclor 1254

D3 525.2 (2.0) $152
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 30 of 53

Aroclor 1260

Pentachlorophenol

Simazine

Toxaphene

Carbamates by HPLC/Post Column:

Carbofuran

Oxamyl

D3 531.1 (3.1) $116

D7 531.2 $116

Chlorinated Acids and Dalapon by GC-ECD:

2,4-D

Dalapon

Dinoseb

Pentachlorophenol

Picloram

Silvex (2,4,5-TP)

D 515.1 (4.0) $116

D6 515.3 (1.0) $116

D8 515.4 (1.0) $116

Chlorinated Acids By GC-ECD

2,4-D

Dinoseb

Pentachlorophenol

Picloram

Silvex (2,4,5-TP)

D3 515.2 (1.1) $116

PAHs By HPLC/UV/FL:

Benzo(a)pyrene D1

550 $116

550.1 $116

Haloacetic Acids and Dalapon by GC-ECD:

Dalapon

Monochloracetic Acid

Dichloracetic Acid

Trichloroacetic Acid

Monobromoacetic Acid

Dibromoacetic Acid

HAA5

D2 552.1 (1.0) $116

D3 552.2 (1.0) $116

Haloacetic Acids:

Monochloroacetic Acid

Dichloroacetic Acid

Trichloroacetic Acid

Monobromoacetic Acid

Dibromoacetic Acid

HAA5

D13 552.3 $116

Disinfection Byproducts by Micro Liquid-Liquid 

Extraction/GC-ECD C2 6251B $116

Chlorinated Acids By HPLC/PDA/UV:

2,4-D

Dinoseb

Pentachlorophenol

Picloram

Silvex (2,4,5-TP)

D2 555 (1.0) $116

Dioxin E 1613 $258

Diquat D5 549.2 (1.0) $116

Endothall D2 548.1 (1.0) $116

Glyphosate D1 547 $116

PCBs (as decachlorobiphenyl) D 508A (1.0) $152

b. Additional Methods and Compounds Required by Other Programs

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Disinfectant Byproducts, Solvents and D3 551.1 (1.0) $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 31 of 53

Pesticides

VOCs by GC D3 502.2 (2.1) $26

VOCs by GC-MS D3 524.2 (4.1) $26

EDB/DBCP D3 504.1 (1.1) $26

Pesticides and PCBs by GC (Microextraction) D3 505 (2.1) $26

Phthalate and Adipate Esters by GC-PID D3 506 (1.1) $26

Pesticides by GC-NPD D3 507 (2.1) $26

Chlorinated Pesticides by GC-ECD D3 508 (3.1) $26

Chlorinated Pesticides, Herbicides, Organohalides by GCECD D3 508.1(2.0) $26

Organics by GC-MS D3 525.2 (2.0) $26

Carbamates by HPLC/Post Column

D3 531.1 (3.1) $26

D7 531.2 $26

Chlorinated Acids and Dalapon by GC-ECD

D 515.1 (4.0) $26

D6 515.3 (1.0) $26

D8 515.4 (1.0) $26

Chlorinated Acids By GC-ECD D3 515.2 (1.1) $26

PAHs By HPLC/UV/FL D1

550 $26

550.1 $26

Haloacetic Acids and Dalapon by GC-ECD

D2 552.1 (1.0) $26

D3 552.2 (1.0) $26

Chlorinated Acids By HPLC/PDA/UV D2 555 (1.0) $26

Dioxins and Furans E 1613 $65

Diquat and Paraquat D5 549.2 (1.0) $26

Benzidines and Nitrogen Compounds D2 553 (1.1) $116

Carbonyl Compounds D2 554 (1.0) $116

Phenols Z 528 $152

Phenylurea Compounds Z 532 $116

Selected Semivolatiles Z 526 $152

Pesticides and Flame Retardants by GCMS D9 527 $152

Explosives and Related Compounds D10 529 $152

Acetanilide Degradation Products D11 535 (1.1) $194

Acetanilide Parent Compound D3 525.2 (2.0) $26

Nitrosamines by MS/MS D12 521 $194

5. Radiochemistry of Drinking Water

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Cesium

B Cesium-134 $206

C2

7500-Cs B $206

7120 $206

J1

R-1110-76 $206

R-1111-76 $206

L 901 $206
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 32 of 53

901.1 $206

U 4.5.2.3 $206

W Gamma Spectra $206

Gamma Emitting Isotopes

C2

7500-Cs B $206

7500-I B $206

7120 $206

L

901.1 $206

901 $206

902 $206

W Gamma Spectra $206

Gross Alpha

B Gross Alpha $206

C2

7110B $206

7110C $206

J1 R-1120-76 $206

L 900 $206

V

00-01 $206

00-02 $206

W Gross Alpha $206

Gross Beta

B Gross Beta $206

C2 7110B $206

J1 R-1120-76 $206

L 900 $206

V 00-01 $206

W Gross Beta $206

Iodine

B Precipitation Method, Distillation Method $206

C2

7500-I B $206

7500-I C $206

7500-I D $206

7120 $206

L

902 $206

901.1 $206

U 4.5.2.3 $206

W Gamma Spectra $206

Radium 226

B Radon Emanation, Precipitation Method $206

C2

7500-Ra B $206

7500-Ra C $206

J1

R-1140-76 $206

R-1141-76 $206

L

903 $206

903.1 $206

U Ra-05 $206

V

Ra-03 $206

Ra-04 $206
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 33 of 53

W Radium 226 $206

Radium 228

B Radium 228 $206

C2 7500-Ra D $206

J1 R-1142-76 $206

L 904 $206

V Ra-05 $206

W Radium 228 $206

Strontium

B Strontium $206

C2 7500-Sr B $206

J1 R-1160-76 $206

L 905 $206

U

Sr-01 $206

Sr-02 $206

V Sr-04 $206

W Strontium $206

Tritium

B Tritium $206

C2 7500-3H B $206

J1 R-1171-76 $206

L 906 $206

V H-02 $206

W Tritium $206

Uranium

C2 7500-U B $206

I D5174-91 $206

J1

R-1180-76 $206

R-1181-76 $206

R-1182-76 $206

L

908 $206

908.1 $206

U

U-02 $206

U-04 $206

V 00-07 $206

W Uranium $206

SECTION B. WASTEWATER PARAMETERS

1. Microbiology of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Ascaris lumbricoides

C2 10550 $228

P3 UofA2000 $228

Coliforms, Fecal, by Membrane Filter C2 9222D $228

Coliforms, Fecal, by Multiple Tube Fermentation (may be 

used for sludge) C2 9221E $228

Coliforms, Total, by Membrane Filter C2 9222B $228

Coliforms, Total, by Multiple Tube Fermentation C2 9221B $228
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 34 of 53

Entamoeba histolytica

C2 10550 $228

C 9711C $228

Enteric viruses I D4994-89 $381

Escherichia coli (NPDES) by Colilert MPN, in conjunction 

with SM 9221B and 9221C C2 9223B $152

Escherichia coli (NPDES) in conjunction with SM 9221B 

and 9221C C2 9221F $152

Giardia and Cryptosporidium

C2 9711B $381

P2 600/R-95/178 $381

Helminth Ova in sludge Z5 600/1-87-014 $381

Salmonella in sludge C2 9260D $228

Streptococcus, Fecal, by Membrane Filter C2 9230C $194

Streptococcus, Fecal, by Multiple Tube Fermentation C2 9230B $194

Tapeworm, Common C2 10550 $228

Viruses

C2 9510 $381

P Methods for Virology $381

P2 600/R-95/178 $381

2. Wastewater Inorganic Chemistry, Nutrients and Demand

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Acidity

C2 2310B $39

C1 Hach 8010 $39

Alkalinity, Total

A 310.2 $19

C2 2320B $19

Ammonia

A2 350.1 $39

C2

4500-NH3 B $39

4500-NH3 C $39

4500-NH3 D $39

4500-NH3 E $39

4500-NH3 G $39

C1 Hach 8038 $39

Biochemical Oxygen Demand

C2 5210B $152

C1 Hach 8043 $152

Boron

A1 200.7 $10

C2 4500-B B $76

Bromide A2 300.0 $26

Calcium

A1 200.7 $10

C

3111B $26

3500-Ca D $39

C1 Hach 8222 $39

Carbon, Total Organic (TOC) C2

5310 B $39

5310 C $39

5310D $39

Chemical Oxygen Demand A 410.3 $39
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 35 of 53

A2 410.4 $76

C2

5220 C $39

5220 D $76

C1

Hach 8000 $39

Hach 8230 $39

Chloride

A2 300.0 $26

C2

4500-Cl B $39

4500-Cl C $39

4500-Cl E $39

C1 Hach 8225 $39

Chlorine, Free C1 Hach 8021 $39

Chlorine, Total Residual

C2

4500-Cl B $39

4500-Cl C $39

4500-Cl D $39

4500-Cl F $39

4500-Cl G $39

C1

Hach 8167 $39

Hach 8168 $39

Hach 10014 $39

Color C2

2120 B $32

2120 C $32

2120 E $32

Cyanide, Amenable to Chlorination

A 335.1 $76

C2 4500-CN G $76

Cyanide, Available Y OIA-1677 $76

Cyanide, Total

A 335.3 $76

C2

4500-CN B and

either (a) 4500-CN C,

(b) 4500-CN D, or (c) 4500-CN E 

$89

Fluoride

A2 300.0 $26

C2

4500-F B $39

4500-F C $39

4500-F D $39

4500-F E $39

C1 Hach 8029 $39

Hardness

A 130.1 $10

A1 200.7 $10

C2

2340B $39

2340C $39

C1 Hach 8226 $39

Kjeldahl, Total Nitrogen

A

351.1 $76

351.4 $76

A2 351.2 $76
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 36 of 53

C2

Combination of 4500-NH3 B and either 

(a) 4500-Norg B or (b) 4500-N org C $115

4500-NH3 C $39

Z10 PAI-DK01 $76

Z11 PAI-DK02 $76

Z12 PAI-DK03 $76

Methylene Blue Active Substances C2 5540C $39

Nitrate (as N)

A 352.1 $76

A2 300.0 $26

Nitrate-Nitrite (as N)

A2

300.0 $26

353.2 $76

C2

4500-NO3 E $76

4500-NO3 F $76

4500-NO3 H $76

Nitrite (as N)

A 354.1 $76

A2 300.0 $26

C2 4500-NO2 B $76

C1 Hach 8507 $76

Oil and Grease and Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons

C2 5520B $76

K1 1664A $76

Orthophosphate

A 365.3 $76

A2

300.0 $26

365.1 $76

C2

4500-P E $76

4500-P F $76

C1 Hach 8048 $39

Oxygen-consumption Rate (SOUR) C2 2710B $39

Oxygen, Dissolved

C2

4500-O C $26

4500-O G $26

C1 Hach 8229 $26

pH (Hydrogen Ion)

A 150.1 $39

C2 4500-H B $39

C1 Hach 8156 $39

Phenols

A 420.1 $116

C1 Hach 8047 $116

Phosphorus, Total

A

365.3 $76

365.4 $76

A2 365.1 $76

C2

4500-P B $76

4500-P E $76

4500-P F $76

C1 Hach 8190 $76

Potassium A 258.1 $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 37 of 53

A1 200.7 $10

C

3111B $26

3500-K D $26

Residue, Filterable (TDS) C2 2540C $39

Residue, Nonfilterable (TSS)

C2 2540D $39

C1 Hach 8158 $39

Residue, Settleable Solids

A 160.5 $39

C2 2540F $39

Residue, Total

A 160.3 $39

C2 2540B $39

Residue, Volatile A 160.4 $39

Silica, Dissolved

A 370.1 $76

A1 200.7 $10

C 4500-Si D $76

C2 4500-SiO2 C $76

Sodium

A1 200.7 $10

C 3111B $26

Sodium Azide C2 4110C $76

Specific Conductance

A 120.1 $39

C2 2510B $39

C1 Hach 8160 $39

Sulfate

A 375.1 $76

A2 300.0 $26

C2

4500-SO4 C $76

4500-SO4 D $76

C1 Hach 8051 $39

Sulfide (includes total and soluble)

C2

4500-S D $76

4500-S F $39

C1 Hach 8131 $39

Sulfite

C2 4500-SO3 B $76

C1 Hach 8071 $39

Temperature, Degrees Celsius C2 2550B $13

Total, Fixed and Volatile Solids in Solid and Semisolid 

Samples in Sludge C2 2540G $39

Turbidity, NTU

A2 180.1 $39

C2 2130B $39

3. Metals in Wastewater

a. Sample Preparation for Metals in Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Acid Extractable Metals C 3030C $7

Microwave Digestion Z7 CEM Microwave Digestion $7

Nitric Acid C 3030E $7
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 38 of 53

Nitric Acid/Hydrochloric Acid C 3030F $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid C 3030H $7

Nitric Acid/Perchloric Acid/Hydrofluoric Acid C 3030I $7

Nitric Acid/Sulfuric Acid C 3030G $7

Preliminary Filtration C 3030B $7

b. Methods to Analyze Metals in Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Aluminum

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3113B $26

3111D $26

Antimony

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Arsenic

A 206.5 $39

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3113B $26

3500-As C $76

C1 Hach 8013 $39

Barium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C

3111D $26

3113B $26

Beryllium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111D $26

3113B $26

3500-Be D $76

Cadmium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500-Cd D $76

Chromium (VI) Hexavalent A 218.4 $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 39 of 53

C

3500-Cr D $39

3111C $26

C1 Hach 8023 $39

Chromium, Total

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500-Cr D $76

C1 Hach 8023 $39

Cobalt

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

Copper

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500-Cu D $76

C1 Hach 8506 $39

Gold

A 231.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Iridium

A 235.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Iron

A1

200.7 $10

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500-Fe D $76

C1 Hach 8008 $39

Lead

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

3500-Pb D $76
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 40 of 53

C1 Hach 8033 $39

Lithium A1 200.7 $10

Magnesium

A1 200.7 $10

C

3111B $26

3500-Mg D $76

Manganese

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

3500-Mn D $76

C1 Hach 8034 $39

Mercury

A 245.2 $52

A1 245.1 $52

A4 1631E $152

C 3112B $52

Molybdenum

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C

3111D $26

3113B $26

Nickel

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

C1 Hach 8037 $39

Osmium

A 252.2 $26

C 3111D $26

Palladium

A 253.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Platinum

A 255.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Rhodium

A 265.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Ruthenium

A 267.2 $26

C 3111B $26

Selenium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3113B $26

3114B $76

Silver A1 200.7 $10
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 41 of 53

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3113B $26

Strontium

A1 200.7 $10

C

3111B $26

3500-Sr B $26

3500-Sr C $20

3500-Sr D $26

Thallium

A 279.2 $26

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C 3111B $26

Tin

A1

200.7 $10

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3113B $26

Titanium

A 283.2 $26

C 3111D $26

Vanadium

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

C

3111D $26

3500-V D $76

Zinc

A 289.2 $26

A1

200.7 $10

200.8 $26

200.9 $26

C

3111B $26

3111C $26

3500-Zn E $76

3500-Zn F $76

C1 Hach 8009 $39

4. Aquatic Toxicity Bioassay of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Toxicity, Acute

M1 EPA/600/4-90/027F $194

Z13 821-R-02-012 $194

Toxicity, Chronic

N1 EPA/600/4-91/002 $194

Z3 821-R-02-013 $194

5. Organic Chemicals of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 42 of 53

Method

Volatile Organics for Pharmaceuticals D3 524.2 (4.1) $152

Purgeable Hydrocarbons E 601 $76

Purgeable Aromatics E 602 $76

Acrolein and Acrylonitrile E

603 $76

624 (Approved for screening only, not for 

quantification) $152

1624B $152

Phenols E 604 $116

Phthalate ester E 606 $116

Nitrosamines E 607 $116

Organochlorine Pesticides and PCBs E 608 $152

Nitroaromatics and Isophorone E 609 $116

PAHs E 610 $116

Haloethers E 611 $116

Chlorinated Hydrocarbons E 612 $116

2, 3, 7, 8-Tetrachlorodibenzo-p-Dioxin E 613 $457

Carbon-, Hydrogen-, and Oxygen-Containing Pesticides Z2 616 $116

Purgeables E 624 $152

Base/Neutrals and Acids (all analytes excluding pesticides) E 625 $152

Base/Neutrals and Acids (pesticides only) E 625 $152

Tetra- through Octa-Chlorinated Dioxins and Furans E 1613B $258

VOCs by Isotope Dilution GC/MS E 1624B $152

Semivolatile Organic Compounds by Isotope Dilution 

GC/MS E 1625B $152

Organophosphorus Pesticides E 1657 $116

VOCs Specific to the Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Industry 

by Isotope Dilution GC/MS K2 1666 (A) $152

Herbicides C2 6640B $116

Ethylene Glycol K BLS-188 $152

6. Radiochemistry of Wastewater

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Gross Alpha

C2 7110B $206

L 900 $206

Gross Beta

C2 7110B $206

L 900.0 $206

Radium, Total

C2 7500-Ra B $206

L 903.0 $206

Radium 226

C2 7500-Ra C $206

L 903.1 $206

SECTION C. SOLID WASTE PARAMETERS

1. Microbiology of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 43 of 53

Method

Coliforms, Total, by Membrane Filter F 9132 $228

Coliforms, Total, by Multiple Tube Fermentation F 9131 $228

2. Physical Properties Testing of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Corrosive to Steel F 1110A $63

Corrosivity--pH Determination F 9040C $63

EP Toxicity F 1310B $76

Ignitability (Flashpoint Determination) F

1010A $32

1020B $32

Paint Filter Liquids Test F 9095B $19

TCLP F 1311 $303

3. Sample Preparation for Metals in Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Dissolved in Water F 3005A $7

Microwave Assisted Digestions F

3015A $7

3051 $7

3052 $7

Oils, Greases, and Waxes F

3040A $7

3031 $7

Sediments, Sludges, and Soils F 3050B $7

Total Metals F

3010A $7

3020A $7

Total Recoverable in Water F 3005A $7

4. Inorganic Chemistry and Metals of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Aluminum

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

Ammonia A 350.3 $39

Antimony

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

7062 $76

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Arsenic

F

6010B $10

7061A $76

7062 $76

7063 $76

6020 $26

F12 7010 $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 44 of 53

Barium

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Beryllium

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Bomb Preparation Method for Solid Waste F 5050 $7

Boron F 6010B $10

Bromide F

9056 $26

9211 $39

Cadmium

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Calcium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Cation-Exchange Capacity of Soils F

9080 $34

9081 $34

Chloride F

9056 $26

9057 $76

9212 $39

9250 $76

9251 $76

9253 $39

Chlorine, Total, in New and Used Petroleum Products F

9075 $76

9076 $39

9077 $39

Chromium, Hexavalent F

7195 $26

7196A $76

7197 $26

7198 $40

7199 $76

Chromium, Total

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Cobalt

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Compatibility Test for Wastes and Membranes F 9090A $152
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 45 of 53

Liners

Copper

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Cyanide

F

9010C $13

9012B $76

9213 $76

9014 $76

F9 9015 $76

Cyanide Extraction for Solids and Oils F10 9013A $39

Dermal Corrosion F 1120 $63

EP for Oily Wastes F 1330A $76

Flashpoint Determination F 1030 $32

Fluoride F

9056 $26

9214 $39

Iron

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Kjeldahl Total, Nitrogen A 351.4 $76

Lead

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Liquid Release Test Procedure F 9096 $39

Lithium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Magnesium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Manganese

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Mercury F

7470A $52

7471A $52

7472 $152

Molybdenum

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Multiple EP F 1320 $152

Nickel

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 46 of 53

F12 7010 $26

Nitrate F

9210 $39

9056 $26

Nitrite F 9056 $26

Oil and Grease and Petroleum Hydrocarbons K1 1664A $76

O-Phosphate-P F 9056 $26

Osmium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Paint Filter Liquids Test F 9095B $19

Perchlorate Z 314.0 $76

pH (Hydrogen Ion) F

9041A $39

9045D $39

Phosphorus F 6010B $10

Phosphorus, Total A 365.3 $76

Potassium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Saturated Hydraulic and Leachate Conductivity and Intrinsic 

Permeability F 9100 $152

Selenium

F

6010B $10

7741A $26

7742 $76

F12 7010 $26

Silica F 6010B $10

Silver

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Sodium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Sodium Azide C2 4110C $76

Specific Conductance F 9050A $39

SPLP F 1312 $303

Strontium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Sulfate F

9035 $76

9036 $76

9038 $76

9056 $26

Sulfides F

9030B $76

9031 $76

9215 $76

9034 $76

Thallium F 6010B $10
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 47 of 53

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

Tin

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

Titanium F 6010B $10

Vanadium

F 6010B $10

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

White Phosphorus by GC F 7580 $116

Zinc

F

6010B $10

6020 $26

F11 7000B $26

F12 7010 $26

5. Organics Procedures in Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Separatory Funnel Liquid-Liquid Extraction F 3510C $13

Organic Compounds in Water by Microextraction F5 3511 $13

Continuous Liquid-Liquid Extraction F 3520C $13

SPE F 3535 $13

Soxhlet Extraction F 3540C $13

Automated Soxhlet Extraction F 3541 $13

Pressurized Fluid Extraction F 3545 $13

Ultrasonic Extraction F 3550B $13

Supercritical Fluid Extraction of Total Recoverable 

Petroleum Hydrocarbons F 3560 $13

Supercritical Fluid Extraction of PAHs F 3561 $13

MSE F4 3570 $13

Waste Dilution F 3580A $13

Waste Dilution for Volatile Organics F 3585 $13

Alumina Cleanup F 3610B $13

Alumina Column Cleanup and Separation of Petroleum 

Wastes F 3611B $13

Florisil Cleanup F 3620B $13

Silica Gel Cleanup F 3630C $13

Gel-Permeation Cleanup F 3640A $13

Acid-Base Partition Cleanup F 3650B $13

Sulfur Cleanup F 3660B $13

Sulfuric Acid/Permanganate Cleanup F 3665A $13

Screening for Pentachlorophenol by Immunoassay F 4010A $76

Screening for 2,4-Dichlorophenoxyacetic Acid by 

Immunoassay F 4015 $76

Screening for PCBs by Immunoassay F 4020 $76
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 48 of 53

Screening for PCDDs and PCDFs by Immunoassay F3 4025 $76

Soil Screening for Petroleum Hydrocarbons by Immunoassay F 4030 $76

Soil Screening for PAHs by Immunoassay F 4035 $76

Soil Screening for Toxaphene by Immunoassay F 4040 $76

Soil Screening for Chlordane by Immunoassay F 4041 $76

Soil Screening for DDT by Immunoassay F 4042 $76

TNT Explosives in Soil by Immunoassay F 4050 $76

RDX in Soil by Immunoassay F 4051 $76

VOCs in Various Sample Matrices Using Equilibrium 

Headspace Analysis F8 5021A $13

Purge-and-Trap for Aqueous Samples F6 5030C $13

Volatile, Nonpurgeable, Water-Soluble Compounds by 

Azeotropic Distillation F 5031 $13

VOCs by Vacuum Distillation F 5032 $13

Closed-System Purge-and-Trap and Extraction for Volatile 

Organics in Soil and Waste Samples F2 5035A $13

Analysis for Desorption of Sorbent Cartridges from VOST F 5041A $13

EDB and DBCP by Microextraction and GC F 8011 $116

C10 - C32 Hydrocarbons K 8015AZ 1 $116

Nonhalogenated Organics Using GC/FID F7 8015D $116

Aromatic and Halogenated Volatiles by GC Using 

Photoionization and/or Electrolytic Conductivity Detectors F 8021B $152

Acrylonitrile by GC F 8031 $76

Acrylamide by GC F 8032A $76

Acetonitrile by GC with Nitrogen-Phosphorus Detection F 8033 $76

Phenols by GC F 8041 $116

Phthalate Esters by GC/ECD F 8061A $116

Nitrosamines by GC F 8070A $116

Organochlorine Pesticides by GC F 8081A $152

PCBs by GC F 8082 $152

Nitroaromatics and Cyclic Ketones by GC F 8091 $116

PAHs F 8100 $116

Haloethers by GC F 8111 $116

Chlorinated Hydrocarbons by GC: Capillary Column 

Technique F 8121 $116

Aniline and Selected Derivatives by GC F 8131 $116

Organophosphorus Compounds by GC F 8141A $152

Chlorinated Herbicides by GC Using Methylation or 

Pentafluorobenzylation Derivatization F 8151A $152

VOCs by GC/MS F 8260B $152

Semivolatile Organic Compounds by GC/MS F 8270C $152

Semivolatile Organic Compounds (PAHs and PCBs) in 

Soils/Sludges and Solid Wastes Using TE/GC/MS F 8275A $152

8280A: Polychlorinated Dibenzo-p-Dioxins and PCDFs by 

HRGC/LRMS F 8280A $258
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 49 of 53

PCDDs and PCDFs by HRGC/HRMS F 8290 $258

PAHs F 8310 $116

Determination of Carbonyl Compounds by HPLC F 8315A $116

Acrylamide, Acrylonitrile, and Acrolein by HPLC F 8316 $116

N-Methylcarbamates by HPLC F 8318 $116

Solvent-Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by 

HPLC/TS/MS or UV Detection F 8321A $152

Solvent Extractable Nonvolatile Compounds by 

HPLC/PB/MS F 8325 $152

Nitroaromatics and Nitramines by HPLC F 8330 $116

Tetrazene by Reverse Phase HPLC F 8331 $116

Nitroglycerine by HPLC F 8332 $116

GC/FT-IR Spectrometry for Semivolatile Organics: Capillary 

Column F 8410 $116

Analysis of Bis (2-chloroethyl) Ether and Hydrolysis 

Products by Direct Aqueous Injection GC/FT-IR F 8430 $116

Total Recoverable Petroleum Hydrocarbons by Infrared 

Spectrophotometry F 8440 $116

Colorimetric Screening Method for TNT in Soil F 8515 $76

TOX F 9020B $76

POX F 9021 $76

TOX by Neutron Activation Analysis F 9022 $114

EOX in Solids F 9023 $114

TOCs F 9060A $76

Phenolics F

9065 $152

9066 $152

9067 $152

HEM for Aqueous Samples F 9070A $76

HEM for Sludge, Sediment, and Solid Samples F 9071B $76

PCBs in Waste Oil F1 600/4-81-045 $152

6. Bulk Asbestos Analysis of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Bulk Asbestos Analysis

G 9002 $228

H Bulk Asbestos $228

Fiber Counting G

7400 $228

7402 $228

7. Radiochemistry of Solid Waste

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Alpha-Emitting Radium Isotopes F 9315 $206

Gross Alpha and Beta F 9310 $206

Radium-228 F 9320 $206

SECTION D. AIR AND STACK PARAMETERS

1. Ambient Air Primary and Secondary Pollutants
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 50 of 53

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Carbon Monoxide O Appendix C $393

Formaldehyde F 8520 $393

Hydrocarbons O Appendix E $393

Lead O Appendix G $393

Nitrogen Dioxide O Appendix F $393

Ozone O

Appendix D $393

Appendix H $393

Particulate Matter O

Appendix B $393

Appendix J $393

Appendix K $393

Sulfur Oxides O Appendix A $393

2. Stationary and Stack Sources

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Carbon Dioxide, Oxygen, and Excess Air Q Method 3 $393

Carbon Monoxide Q

Method 10 $393

Method 10A $393

Method 10B $393

Carbonyl Sulfide, Hydrogen Sulfide, and Carbon Disulfide Q Method 15 $393

Fluoride Q

Method 13A $393

Method 13B $393

Method 14 $393

Fugitive Emissions Q Method 22 $393

Gaseous Organic Compounds Q

Method 18 $393

Method 25 $393

Method 25A $393

Method 25B $393

Hydrogen Sulfide Q Method 11 $393

Inorganic Lead Q Method 12 $393

Moisture Content Q Method 4 $393

Nitrogen Oxide Q

Method 7 $393

Method 7A $393

Method 7B $393

Method 7C $393

Method 7D $393

Method 7E $393

Method 19 $393

Method 20 $393

Particulate Emissions by Asphalt Processing Q Method 5A $152

Particulate Emissions by Fiberglass Insulation Q Method 5E $152

Particulate Emissions by Nonsulfate Q Method 5F $152
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 51 of 53

Particulate Emissions by Nonsulfuric Acid Q Method 5B $152

Particulate Emissions by Pressure Filters Q Method 5D $152

Particulate Emissions by Stationary Sources Q

Method 5 $152

Method 17 $152

Particulate Emissions by Sulfur Dioxide Q Method 19 $152

Particulate Emissions by Wood Heaters Q

Method 5G $152

Method 5H $152

Petroleum Products, Heat of Combustion I

D240-92 $76

D240-87 $76

Petroleum Products, Hydrometer Method I D287-92 $76

Petroleum Products, Sulfur I D4294-90 $152

Sulfur and Total Reduced Sulfur Q

Method 15A $393

Method 16 $393

Method 16A $393

Method 16B $393

Sulfur Dioxide Q

Method 6 $393

Method 6A $393

Method 6B $393

Method 6C $393

Method 8 $393

Method19 $393

Method 20 $393

Sulfuric Acid Mist Q Method 8 $393

Vapor Tightness, Gasoline Delivery Tank Q Method 27 $393

Volatile Matter Density, Solids and Water Q

Method 24 $393

Method 24A $393

VOCs

Q Method 21 $393

S1 TO-15 $152

Wood Heaters, Certification and Burn Rates Q

Method 28 $393

Method 28A $393

3. ADEQ Emission Test

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Particulate Emissions, Dry Matter R Method A2 $393

Particulate Emissions, Sulfuric Acid Mist/Sulfur Oxides R Method A1 $393

4. National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Arsenic S

Method 108 $393

Method 108A $393

Method 108B $393

Method 108C $393

Beryllium S Method 103 $393
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 52 of 53

Method 104 $393

Mercury S

Method 101 $393

Method 101A $393

Method 102 $393

Method 105 $393

Polonium 210 S Method 111 $393

Vinyl Chloride S

Method 106 $393

Method 107 $393

Method 107A $393

SECTION E. METHODS DIRECTOR APPROVED UNDER R9-14-610(C)

Description Reference Method/s Fee Per 

Method

Chromatographic Method - Any $116

Mass Spectrometric Method - Any $152

Toxicity Method - Any $194

Other Method - Any $75

Table 2. Instrumentation Fees

Description Subtype, if any Fee Per Instrument

Atomic Absorption

Cold Vapor $76

Flame Burner $76

Graphite Furnace $76

Hydride Generator $76

Other $76

Counters for Radioactivity - $76

Gas Chromatograph

Electron Capture $76

Flame Ionization $76

Flame Photometric $76

Halide Specific $76

Nitrogen/Phosphorus $76

Photoionization $76

Other $76

Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer

High Resolution $194

Other than High Resolution $152

High Pressure Liquid Chromatograph

Ultraviolet $76

Fluorescence $76

Other $76

High Pressure Liquid Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer - $152

Inductively Coupled Plasma - $76

Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometer - $152

Ion Chromatograph - $76

Automated Autoanalyzer - $76

Mercury Analyzer - $76
APPENDIX Q TITLE 9. HEALTH SERVICESCHAPTER 14. DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH SERVICES

LABORATORIES

5-15-12 53 of 53

Organic Halide, Total - $76

Transmission Electron Microscope - $396

X-Ray Diffraction Unit - $76

Historical Note

Exhibit I made by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).

EXHIBIT II. ALTERNATE DEFAULT LIMITS

Table 1. Default Limits

QUALITY CONTROL PARAMETERS

WITHOUT ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

SPECIFIED IN THE METHOD

DEFAULT LIMITS

Matrix Spike/LFM (processed or non-processed) LCS/LFB

LCS/LFB (processed or non-processed)/Second source reference standard CCV/continuing IPC

LOQ/MRL (non-processed) CCV/continuing IPC or ± 50%

LOQ/MRL (processed) LCS/LFB or ± 50%

QCS (non-processed) ICV/continuing IPC/manufacturer's limits

QCS (processed) LCS/LFB/manufacturer's limits

IDOC limits LFB/LCS

LFB/LCS/LFM/duplicate RPD IDOC limits/≤20%

Non-CCC compounds CCC limits

ICV/CCV ± 10%

A. For 8000 methods that do not specify the QC limits for Matrix Spike/LCS, a licensee may use the default limit of ±30%.

B. For 500, 600, 1600, and 8000 series methods that do not specify surrogates or acceptance limits for surrogates, a licensee may 

use the default limits of 70-130%.

C. For 500, 600, 1600, and 8000 series methods that do not specify internal standards or acceptance limits for internal standards, 

a licensee may use the default limits of 70-130%.

D. For methods that do not list a precision measurement, a licensee may use 20% RPD.

E. For methods that do not specify the LOQ/MRL, a licensee may use the default limit of ± 50%.

Historical Note

Exhibit II made by final rulemaking at 12 A.A.R. 4798, effective December 5, 2006 (Supp. 06-4).
Attachment L 

PCWRL EQL-0510-191 SOP 










Attachment M 

PCWRL Lead Audit Strip SOP 






Attachment N 

ERG QAPP 2012 
SUPPORT FOR THE EPA NATIONAL 

MONITORING PROGRAMS 

(UATMP, NATTS, CSATAM, PAMS, and NMOC 

Support)

Contract No. EP-D-09-048

2012 

Quality Assurance Project Plan 

Category 1 

Eastern Research Group, Inc. 

601 Keystone Park Drive, Suite 700 

Morrisville, NC 27560

Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page iii of xvi 

DISCLAIMER

This Category 1 Quality Assurance Project Plan has been prepared specifically to address the 

operation and management of the U.S. EPA National Monitoring Programs (UATMP, NATTS, 

CSATAM, PAMS and NMOC). The contents have been prepared in accordance with Level I 

Specifications of the EPA Guidance for Quality Assurance Project Plans, EPA QA/G-5. 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page iv of xvi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section

A PROJECT MANAGEMENT 

1 Project/Task Organization ....................................................................................... 1 of 8 

1.1 Assignment of Program Personnel .............................................................. 1 of 8 

1.1.1 Program Manager ............................................................................ 2 of 8 

1.1.2 Deputy Program Manager ............................................................... 2 of 8 

1.1.3 Program Technical Adviser ............................................................. 3 of 8 

1.1.4 Program QA Coordinator ................................................................ 3 of 8 

1.1.5 Task Leaders ................................................................................... 3 of 8 

1.1.6 Final Data Reviewer ........................................................................ 4 of 8 

2 Problem Definition/Background ............................................................................. 1 of 3 

3 Project/Task Description ....................................................................................... 1 of 15 

3.1 NMOC and SNMOC ................................................................................. 1 of 15 

3.2 UATMP ..................................................................................................... 6 of 15 

3.3 PAMS ...................................................................................................... 10 of 15 

3.4 CSATAM and NATTS ............................................................................ 13 of 15 

3.5 PT Sample Preparation (VOCs, Carbonyls, PAHs, Metals, Hexavalent 

Chromium) .............................................................................................. 14 of 15 

4 Data Quality Objectives and Criteria for Measurement Data ............................... 1 of 19 

5 Special Training Requirements/Certification .......................................................... 1 of 2 

5.1 Field Activities Training Personnel ............................................................ 1 of 2 

5.2 Analytical Laboratory Personnel ................................................................. 2 of 2 

6 Documentation and Records ................................................................................... 1 of 4 

6.1 Information Included in the Reporting Package ......................................... 1 of 4 

6.1.1 Data Management ........................................................................... 1 of 4 

6.1.2 Annual Summary Reports Submitted to EPA ................................. 1 of 4 

6.2 Data Reporting Package Format and Document Control ............................ 2 of 4 

6.2.1 Notebooks ........................................................................................ 3 of 4 

6.2.2 Electronic Data Collection .............................................................. 3 of 4 

6.3 Data Reporting Package Archiving and Retrieval ...................................... 4 of 4 

B MEASUREMENT DATA ACQUISITION 

7 Sampling Process Design ........................................................................................ 1 of 9 

7.1 NMOC and SNMOC Sampling ................................................................... 1 of 9 

7.1.1 Air Toxics Compounds Sampling ................................................... 4 of 9 

7.1.2 Carbonyl Compounds Sampling ..................................................... 4 of 9 

7.2 UATMP Sampling ....................................................................................... 4 of 9 

7.2.1 Carbonyl Compounds Sampling ..................................................... 6 of 9 

7.3 PAMS Sampling .......................................................................................... 8 of 9 

7.4 HAPs Sampling ........................................................................................... 8 of 9 

7.4.1 Hexavalent Chromium .................................................................... 8 of 9 

8 Sampling Method Requirements ............................................................................. 1 of 1 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page v of xvi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

 9 Sample Handling and Custody Requirements ....................................................... 1 of 15 

9.1 NMOC, SNMOC, and UATMP Sample Custody ..................................... 1 of 15 

9.1.1 Canister Sampling Chain of Custody Forms ................................. 1 of 15 

9.1.2 Invalid Canister Sample ................................................................ 5 of 15 

9.1.3 NMOC Sample Analysis Forms .................................................... 6 of 15 

9.1.4 Canister Cleanup Log .................................................................... 8 of 15 

9.1.5 Canister Analytical Routing Schedule .......................................... 8 of 15 

9.2 Carbonyl Sample Custody ......................................................................... 8 of 15 

9.3 HAPs Sample Custody ............................................................................ 11 of 15 

9.4 Analytical Laboratory Data ..................................................................... 11 of 15 

9.5 Sampling Monitoring Data ...................................................................... 15 of 15 

10 Analytical Methods Requirements ........................................................................ 1 of 12 

10.1 Canister Cleanup System .......................................................................... 1 of 12 

10.2 NMOC Analytical Systems ....................................................................... 4 of 12 

10.3 SNMOC Analytical Systems ..................................................................... 4 of 12 

10.4 UATMP and Concurrent Analytical System ............................................. 6 of 12 

10.5 PAMS Analytical Systems ........................................................................ 6 of 12 

10.6 Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons Analytical Systems ........................ 10 of 12 

10.7 Metals Using an Inductively Coupled Argon Plasma Mass 

Spectrometry Analytical System ............................................................. 11 of 12 

10.8 Hexavalent Chromium Analytical System .............................................. 11 of 12 

11 Quality Control Requirements .............................................................................. 1 of 17 

11.1 Sample Canister Cleanup Studies ............................................................. 1 of 17 

11.2 Standard Traceability ................................................................................ 1 of 17 

11.3 Accuracy and Acceptance ......................................................................... 2 of 17 

11.3.1 NMOC Instrument Calibration ...................................................... 2 of 17 

11.3.2 SNMOC Instrument Calibration ................................................... 2 of 17 

11.3.3 UATMP Instrument Calibration .................................................... 3 of 17 

11.3.4 PAMS VOC Analysis .................................................................... 4 of 17 

11.3.5 Carbonyl Compounds Analysis ..................................................... 5 of 17 

11.3.6 Analysis of Semivolatile Organic Compounds (PAHs) Using EPA 

 Compendium TO-13A and ASTM D 6209 ................................... 5 of 17 

11.3.7 Quality Control Measures for Analysis of Airborne Metals 

 Collected on Filter Using EPA Method IO-3.5 ............................. 8 of 17 

11.4 Precision .................................................................................................... 9 of 17 

11.5 Completeness ............................................................................................ 9 of 17 

11.6 Representativeness .................................................................................. 10 of 17 

11.7 Method Detection Limits ........................................................................ 10 of 17 

12 Instrument/Equipment Testing, Inspection, and Maintenance Requirements ........ 1 of 3 

12.1 NMOC ......................................................................................................... 1 of 3 

12.2 SNMOC, UATMP, and PAMS ................................................................... 1 of 3 

12.3 PAMS .......................................................................................................... 3 of 3 

12.4 HAPs ........................................................................................................... 3 of 3 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page vi of xvi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

13 Instrument Calibration and Frequency .................................................................... 1 of 9 

13.1 NMOC Calibration ...................................................................................... 1 of 9 

13.2 SNMOC Calibration .................................................................................... 3 of 9 

13.3 UATMP Calibration .................................................................................... 4 of 9 

13.4 PAMS Calibration ....................................................................................... 6 of 9 

13.5 HAPs Calibration ........................................................................................ 7 of 9 

14 Inspection/Acceptance for Supplies and Consumables ........................................... 1 of 4 

14.1 Purpose ........................................................................................................ 1 of 4 

14.2 Critical Supplies and Consumables ............................................................. 1 of 4 

14.3 Acceptance Criteria ..................................................................................... 1 of 4 

14.4 Tracking and Quality Verification of Supplies and Consumables .............. 3 of 4 

15 Data Management ................................................................................................... 1 of 8 

15.1 Purpose ........................................................................................................ 1 of 8 

15.2 Data Recording ............................................................................................ 3 of 8 

15.3 Data Validation ........................................................................................... 3 of 8 

15.4 Data Transformation ................................................................................... 4 of 8 

15.5 Data Transmittal .......................................................................................... 4 of 8 

15.6 Data Reduction ............................................................................................ 5 of 8 

15.7 Data Summary ............................................................................................. 5 of 8 

15.8 Data Tracking .............................................................................................. 6 of 8 

15.9 Data Storage and Retrieval .......................................................................... 7 of 8 

C ASSESSMENT/OVERSIGHT 

16 Assessments and Response Actions ...................................................................... 1 of 17 

16.1 Assessment Activities and Project Planning ............................................. 1 of 17 

16.1.1 Internal Technical Systems Audits ................................................ 1 of 17 

16.1.2 Technical System Audits ............................................................... 2 of 17 

16.1.3 Performance Audit ........................................................................ 3 of 17 

16.1.4 Data Quality Assessments ............................................................. 3 of 17 

16.1.5 Proficiency Testing ....................................................................... 4 of 17 

16.2 Documentation of Assessments ................................................................ 5 of 17 

 17 Reports to Management .......................................................................................... 1 of 3 

17.1 Frequency, Content, and Distribution of Reports ....................................... 1 of 3 

17.1.1 Annual Report ................................................................................. 1 of 3 

17.1.2 Internal Technical System Audit Reports ....................................... 2 of 3 

17.1.3 Corrective Action Reports ............................................................... 2 of 3 

D DATA VALIDATION AND USABILITY 

18 Data Review, Validation, and Verification Requirements .................................... 1 of 12 

18.1 Data Review Design .................................................................................. 1 of 12 

18.2 Data Verification ....................................................................................... 2 of 12 

18.3 NMOC, SNMOC, UATMP, and NATTS Data Reduction, 

Validation, and Reporting ......................................................................... 3 of 12 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page vii of xvi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

18.4 PAMS Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting .................................. 5 of 12 

18.4.1 VOC Data ...................................................................................... 5 of 12 

18.4.2 Carbonyl Compounds Data ........................................................... 5 of 12 

18.5 HAPs Data Reduction, Validation, and Reporting .................................... 6 of 12 

18.6 Air Quality System .................................................................................... 7 of 12 

18.6.1 AQS Flagging and Reporting ........................................................ 8 of 12 

19 Data Validation, Verification and Analysis ............................................................ 1 of 3 

19.1 Process for Validating and Verifying Data ................................................. 1 of 3 

19.1.1 Verification of Data ......................................................................... 1 of 3 

19.1.2 Validation ........................................................................................ 1 of 3 

19.1.3 Validation of Measurement Values ................................................. 2 of 3 

19.2 Data Analysis .............................................................................................. 2 of 3 

19.2.1 Analytical Tests ............................................................................... 2 of 3 

20 Reconciliation with Data Quality Objectives .......................................................... 1 of 2 

20.1 Conduct Preliminary Data Review .............................................................. 2 of 2 

20.2 Draw Conclusions from the Data ................................................................ 2 of 2 

21 References ............................................................................................................... 1 of 4 

APPENDICES 

A Glossary (terms used throughout the document) 

B 2012 Sampling Schedule 

C ERG Standard Operating Procedures 

ERG-MOR-003 Field Procedure for Collecting Ambient Air Toxics and 

Carbonyl Compounds Samples Using the ERG:AT/C Sampling 

System 

ERG-MOR-005 Standard Operating Procedure for the Concurrent GC/FID/MS 

Analysis of Canister Air Toxic Samples using EPA 

Compendium Method TO-15 and EPA Ozone Precursor 

Method 

ERG-MOR-013 Field Procedure for Collecting Ambient Air Hexavalent 

Chromium Samples Using the ERG:CR6 Sampling System 

ERG-MOR-017 Standard Operating Procedure for Developing, Documenting, 

and Evaluating the Accuracy of Spreadsheet Data 

ERG-MOR-024 Standard Operating Procedure for Preparing, Extracting, and 

Analyzing DNPH Carbonyl Cartridges by Method TO-11A 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page viii of xvi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

ERG-MOR-030 Standard Operating Procedure for Canister Sampling System 

Certification Procedures 

ERG-MOR-039 Standard Operating Procedure for Maintaining Laboratory 

Notebooks 

ERG-MOR-044 Standard Operating Procedure for Method 8270C B GC/MS 

Analysis of Semivolatile Organics 

ERG-MOR-045 Standard Operating Procedure for Sample Receipt at the ERG 

Chemistry Laboratory 

ERG-MOR-046 Field Procedure for Collecting Speciated and/or Total 

Nonmethane Organic Compounds Ambient Air Samples Using 

the ERG:S/NMOC Sampling System 

ERG-MOR-047 Field Procedure for Collecting Ambient Carbonyl Compounds 

Samples Using the ERG:C Sampling System 

ERG-MOR-049 Standard Operating Procedure for analysis of Semivolatile 

Organic Compounds (Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons) 

Using EPA Compendium Method TO-13A & ASTM D 

6209-98 

ERG-MOR-057 Standard Operating Procedure for Project Peer Review 

ERG-MOR-060 Standard Operating Procedure for PDFID Sample Analysis by 

Method TO-12 

ERG-MOR-061 Standard Operating Procedure for Standard Preparation Using 

Dynamic Flow Dilution System 

ERG-MOR-062 Standard Operating Procedure for Sample Canister Cleaning 

ERG-MOR-063 Standard Operating Procedure for the Preparation and Analysis 

of Ambient Air for Hexavalent Chromium by Ion 

Chromatography 

ERG-MOR-079 Standard Operating Procedure for Sample Login to the 

Laboratory Information Management System 

ERG-MOR-084 Standard Operating Procedure for the Preparation and Analysis 

of PM10 or TSP Filters for Metals by ICP-MS 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page ix of xvi 

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued) 

ERG-MOR-085 Standard Operating Procedure for the Preparation and Analysis 

of 47mm Filters for Metals by ICP-MS 

ERG-MOR-097 Standard Operating Procedure for Manual Integration of 

Chromatographic Peaks 

ERG-MOR-098 Standard Operating Procedure for the Preparation of Monitoring 

Data for AQS Upload 

D Subcontractor QAPPs will be added if they are initiated 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page x of xvi 

LIST OF TABLES

Table

1-1 Program Organization ......................................................................................................... 5 of 8 

1-2 QC Responsibilities and Review Functions ........................................................................ 7 of 8 

3-1 SNMOC Target Compounds ............................................................................................. 4 of 15 

3-2 UATMP Compendium Method TO-15 Target Compounds ............................................. 8 of 15 

3-3 PAMS SNMOC Volatile Hydrocarbon Target Compounds ........................................... 12 of 15 

3-4 Carbonyl Target Compounds .......................................................................................... 13 of 15 

3-5 List of Analytical and Support Services .......................................................................... 15 of 15

4-1 Measurement Quality Objectives for the National Program ............................................. 3 of 19 

4-2 Summary of NMOC Quality Control Procedures ............................................................. 5 of 19 

4-3 Summary of SNMOC Quality Control Procedures ........................................................... 6 of 19 

4-4 Summary of Air Toxics TO-15 Quality Control Procedures ............................................ 7 of 19 

4-5 Summary of Carbonyl Quality Control Procedures ........................................................ 10 of 19 

4-6 Summary of Quality Control Procedures for Analysis of Semivolatile Organic 

Samples for PAHs (EPA Compendium Method TO-13A and ASTM D 6209) ............. 14 of 19 

4-7 Summary of Quality Control Procedures for Metals Analysis (Method IO-3.5) ............ 16 of 19 

4-8 Summary of Quality Control Procedures for Hexavalent Chromium (EPA Method) .... 19 of 19 

8-1 EPA Methods and ERG SOPs for each Sampling System .................................................. 1 of 1 

10-1 UATMP GC/FID/MS Operating Conditions ...................................................................... 7 of 12 

11-1 BFB Key Ion Abundance Criteria ...................................................................................... 4 of 17 

11-2 DFTPP Key Ions and Ion Abundance Criteria (EPA Compendium Method TO-13A 

and ASTM D 6209) ............................................................................................................ 6 of 17 

11-3 Relative Response Factor Criteria for Initial Calibration of Common Semivolatile 

Compounds ......................................................................................................................... 7 of 17 

11-4 2012 SNMOC Method Detection Limits .......................................................................... 12 of 17 

11-5 2012 Air Toxics Method Detection Limits ....................................................................... 14 of 17 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xi of xvi 

LIST OF TABLES (Continued) 

Table

11-6 2012 Carbonyl Method Detection Limits (Underivatized Concentration) ....................... 15 of 17 

11-7 2012 PAH Method Detection Limits ................................................................................ 16 of 17

11-8 2012 Metals Method Detection Limit for Spiked Filter Strips ......................................... 17 of 17 

12-1 Preventive Maintenance in ERG Laboratories ..................................................................... 2 of 3 

13-1 HAP Analytical Equipment Calibration Requirements ........................................................ 7 of 9 

14-1 Critical Field and Laboratory Supplies and Consumables ................................................... 2 of 4 

15-1 Report Equations .................................................................................................................. 6 of 8 

15-2 Data Archive Policies ........................................................................................................... 8 of 8 

16-1 Air Toxics TO-15 Quality Control Review Checklist ........................................................ 6 of 17 

16-2 Carbonyl TO-11A Quality Control Review Checklist ....................................................... 8 of 17 

16-3 Semivolatile TO-13A Quality Control Review Checklist ................................................ 11 of 17 

16-4 Metals IO-3.5 Quality Control Review Checklist – 47mm Teflon & 8x10” Quartz 

Filters ................................................................................................................................ 13 of 17 

16-5 Hexavalent Chromium Quality Control Review Checklist .............................................. 15 of 17 

18-1 Summary of Quantitation and Detection Limit Flags and Applications ............................ 9 of 12 

18-2 Laboratory Generated Flags ............................................................................................. 10 of 12 

18-3 Chain of Custody Flags..................................................................................................... 11 of 12 

18-4 Field Operations and Maintenance Flags ......................................................................... 12 of 12 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xii of xvi 

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure

1-1 National Monitoring Programs Organizational Chart ......................................................... 6 of 8 

7-1 NMOC, SNMOC, and 3-Hour Air Toxics Sampling System Components ........................ 2 of 9 

7-2 Example Sampler Training Form ........................................................................................ 3 of 9 

7-3 Carbonyl Sampling System Components ............................................................................ 5 of 9 

7-4 24-Hour Integrated Air Toxics Sampling System Components .......................................... 7 of 9 

7-5 Hexavalent Chromium Sampling System Components ...................................................... 9 of 9 

9-1 Example NMOC Chain of Custody................................................................................... 2 of 15 

9-2 Example Toxics/SNMOC Chain of Custody .................................................................... 3 of 15 

9-3 Example ERG LIMS Login Page ...................................................................................... 4 of 15 

9-4 Canister Tag ...................................................................................................................... 5 of 15 

9-5 NMOC Calibration Form .................................................................................................. 7 of 15 

9-6 Example Canister Cleanup Log ......................................................................................... 9 of 15 

9-7 Example Carbonyl Compounds Chain of Custody ......................................................... 10 of 15 

9-8 Example SVOC Sample Chain of Custody ..................................................................... 12 of 15 

9-9 Example Ambient Hexavalent Chromium Chain of Custody ......................................... 13 of 15 

9-10 Example Metals Chain of Custody .................................................................................. 14 of 15 

10-1 Canister Cleanup System Schematic ................................................................................. 2 of 12 

10-2 NMOC Analytical Systems ............................................................................................... 5 of 12 

10-3 Gas Chromatograph/Mass Spectrometer/FID System ...................................................... 8 of 12 

10-4 HPLC System .................................................................................................................... 9 of 12 

13-1 Dynamic Flow Dilution Apparatus ............................................................................................. 5 of 9 

15-1 Data Management and Sample Flow Diagram.................................................................... 2 of 8 

17-1 ERG Response/Corrective Action Form ............................................................................. 3 of 3
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xiii of xvi 

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS 

AC Area Counts 

AQS Air Quality Subsystem (of the Aerometric Information and Retrieval System) 

BFB 4-Bromofluorobenzene 

BLK Blank 

BS/BSD Blank Spike/Bland Spike Duplicate 

CAR Corrective Action Report 

CCB Continuing calibration blank 

CCV Continuing calibration verification 

CD Compact Disk 

cm Centimeter 

CSATAM Community Scale Air Toxics Ambient Monitoring 

CV Coefficient of Variation, precision 

DFTPP Decafluorotriphenylphosphine 

DL Detection Limit 

DNPH 2,4-Dinitrophenylhydrazine 

DPC Daily Observed Propane Concentration 

DPR Daily Performance Report 

DQA Data Quality Assessment 

DQOs Data Quality Objective(s) 

DUP Duplicate 

DVD Digital Versatile Disk 

EPA U.S. Environmental Protection Agency 

ERG Eastern Research Group, Inc. 

FB Field Blank 

FIDs Flame Ionization Detector 

GC Gas Chromatograph 

GPRA Government Performance and Results Act 

HAPs Hazardous Air Pollutant(s) 

HPLC High Performance Liquid Chromatography

HSV High standard verification 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xiv of xvi 

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (Continued) 

IC Ion Chromatography 

ICB Initial Calibration Blank 

ICPMS Inductively Coupled Plasma/Mass Spectrometer 

ICSA/IFA Interference Check Standard A 

ICSAB/IFB Interference Check Standard B 

ICV Initial calibration verification 

ID Inner Diameter 

ID Identification 

IS Internal Standard 

LCS Laboratory Control Standard 

LIMS Laboratory Inventory Management System 

LRB Laboratory Reagent Blank 

MB Method Blank 

MDL Method Detection Limit 

mL Milliliter 

mm Millimeter 

MQOs Measurement Quality Objective 

MS Mass Spectrometer 

MS/MSD Matrix Spike/Matrix Spike Duplicate 

μg Micrograms 

μL Microliters 

N2 Nitrogen gas 

NAAQS National Ambient Air Quality Standard 

NATTS National Ambient Toxics Trends Station 

NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology 

NIOSH National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health 

nm Nanometer 

NMOC Nonmethane Organic Compounds 

NOx Oxides of Nitrogen 

OAQPS Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xv of xvi 

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (Continued) 

OPR Ongoing Precision and Recovery 

OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration 

P&A Precision & Accuracy 

PAHs Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons 

PAMS Photochemical Assessment Monitoring Stations 

PC Personal computer 

PDFID Preconcentration Direct Flame Ionization Detection 

PDS Post digestion spike 

PE Perkin Elmer 

POC Parameter Occurrence Code 

ppbC Parts per Billion as Carbon 

ppbV Parts per Billion (by volume) 

ppmC Parts per Million as Carbon 

PT Proficiency Testing 

PUF Polyurethane Foam 

QA Quality Assurance 

QAPP Quality Assurance Project Plan 

QC Quality Control 

QL Quantitation Limit 

RB Raw Blank 

RD Raw Data 

RE Relative Error 

RF Response Factor 

RP Raw Precision 

RPD Relative Percent Difference 

RRTs Relative Retention Times 

RSD Relative Standard Deviation 

RT Retention Time 

RTP Research Triangle Park 

SIP State Implementation Plan 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xvi of xvi 

SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS (Continued) 

SOPs Standard Operating Procedure 

SQL Sample Quantitation Limit 

SRD Serial dilution 

SSQC Second Source Quality Control 

STI Sonoma Technology, Inc. 

SVOC Semivolatile Organic Compounds 

TAD Technical Assistance Document. Also a NATTS TAD 

TPC Theoretical Propane Concentration 

TSA Technical System Audits 

UAM Urban Airshed Model 

UATMP Urban Air Toxics Monitoring Program 

UPS United Postal Service of America 

UV Ultraviolet 

VOC Volatile Organic Compound 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. A2 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page xvii of xvi 

DISTRIBUTION LIST 

Copies of this plan and all revisions will be provided to: 

 Margaret Dougherty, Work Assignment Manager, U.S. EPA, C304-02, RTP, NC 

 Michael Jones, Delivery Order Manager, U.S. EPA, C339-02, RTP, NC 

 Dennis Mikel, AT QA Coordinator, U.S. EPA, C339-02, RTP, NC 

U.S. EPA Regional contacts may obtain a copy of the QAPP by contacting the Delivery Order 

Manager. It is the responsibility of each Regional contact to make copies of the plan for appropriate 

State personnel or to refer them to the ERG website: http://www.ergweb2.com/uatmp/index.htm. 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 1 - A4 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 1 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

PROJECT MANAGEMENT 

SECTION 1 

PROJECT/TASK ORGANIZATION 

1.1 Assignment of Program Personnel

Table 1-1 presents the program organization listing the program assignment and 

responsible person for each aspect of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National 

Monitoring Programs. The program organizational chart is presented in Figure 1-1. 

Eastern Research Group’s (ERG) primary support on this contract include Nonmethane 

Organic Compounds (NMOC), Speciated Nonmethane Organic Compound(s) (SNMOC), 

Volatile Organic Compound(s) (VOC), Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons (PAH), Metals, 

Hexavalent Chromium, and other Hazardous Air Pollutants (HAPs). Subcontracting services are 

extended by ChromIan for onsite technical assistance for Photochemical Assessment Monitoring 

Stations (PAMS) analysis, Sonoma Technology, Inc. (STI) for data validation, RTI Laboratories, 

Inc. for VOCs by cartridge, pesticides/PCBs, anions, diisocyanates, and 4,4’-methylenedianiline, 

and RTI International for metals analysis, in the event of a large workload. 

ERG is responsible to the client for the work of the subcontractor, and choosing 

subcontractors that meet the applicable requirements for the methods. The subcontractor should 

meet the DQO requirements for the appropriate method. ERG shall maintain a record of 

subcontractor compliance, including documentation of subcontractor’s MDLs, QAPPs, etc. The 

subcontractor will be overseen by annual PT samples and/or TSAs as they are available through 

OAQPS. If such measures are not available, ERG will request audit reports performed with the 

subcontract lab and will supply PT audits. Samples will not be taken and/or submitted to a 

subcontract until current MDLs and QAPPs are approved for required analyses. Sample analysis 

will not begin with the subcontractor until MDLs, QAPPs, etc., have been approved by the EPA 

and ERG.
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 1 - A4 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 2 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

1.1.1 Program Manager

Ms. Julie Swift, an ERG Senior Program Manager serves as the Program Manager for 

EPA’s National Monitoring Programs. In this role, she has the primary responsibility for 

understanding EPA’s and their clients’ (i.e., State, local, and tribal agencies) needs at the 

program level. Ms. Swift is ultimately accountable for providing timely, cost effective, and high 

quality services that meet the needs of the National Monitoring Program efforts. Her 

responsibility is ensuring the EPA client satisfaction by verifying that all components necessary 

for effective management are in place and active at all times during the contract performance 

period. Ms. Swift coordinates with the ERG Quality Assurance (QA) Officer, and task leaders to 

provide EPA client perspective and communicate technical issues and needs, and to ensure that 

these program staff facilitate management decisions appropriate to their roles on Contract EP-D09-048. She prepares budgetary and schedule information, and prepares all information for 

presentation to EPA at scheduled program meetings. As the Program Manager, Ms. Julie Swift 

is responsible for the technical operation and the quality of the program on a day-to-day basis. 

She leads the analytical tasks and provides technical direction and support. She assists in the 

resolution of technical issues and serves as a resource for Task Leaders regarding any project 

issues. 

1.1.2 Deputy Program Manager

As the Deputy Program Manager, Ms. Laura Van Enwyck assists the Program Manager 

for EPA’s National Monitoring Programs. She assists the Program Manager in all aspects of the 

technical operation and the quality of the program on a day-to-day basis. She assists the 

analytical task leaders and provides technical direction and support. She assists in the resolution 

of technical issues and serves as a resource for Task Leaders regarding project issues. Ms. Van 

Enwyck is also the HAPS support Task Leader. 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 1 - A4 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 3 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

1.1.3 Program Technical Adviser

The Program Technical Adviser, Mr. Dave Dayton, assists in the resolution of technical 

issues. He communicates with ERG management, and the technical staff for discussion of real 

and potential technical problems. He will also peer review all Quality Assurance Project Plans 

(QAPPs), draft and final program report products and provide oversight of efforts to evaluate and 

characterize data. 

1.1.4 Program QA Coordinator

Ms. Donna Tedder, the Program and Laboratory QA Coordinator, is responsible for 

ensuring the overall integrity and quality of project results. Ms. Tedder, or her designee, will do 

a 10 percent QA review for all sample analyses delivered for reporting to the Program Manager. 

In the case of subcontracted work, 20% percent of data from subcontractor will be reviewed. 

The lines of communication between management, the Program QA Officer, and the technical 

staff are formally established and allow for discussion of real and potential problems, preventive 

actions, and corrective procedures. The major Quality Control (QC) responsibilities and QC 

review functions are summarized in Table 1-2. On quality issues, Ms. Tedder reports 

independently to Ms. Mary Willett, ERG’s corporate QA Officer. 

1.1.5 Task Leaders

ERG Task Leaders are responsible for meeting the project objectives, meeting report 

schedules, and directing the technical staff in execution of the technical effort for their respective 

task(s). The Task Leaders will review 100 percent of all sample analyses and will deliver a 

requested 10 percent of all sample analyses to the QA Coordinator for review prior to data 

reporting by the Program Manager. The Task Leaders manage the day-to-day technical activities 

on delivery orders for this program. They assess and report on the project’s progress and results 

(e.g., recordkeeping, data validation procedures, sample turnaround time) and ensure timely, 

high-quality services that meet the requirements in this QAPP. 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 1 - A4 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 4 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

1.1.6 Final Data Reviewer

 ERG Final Data Reviewers are responsible for making sure the data meets the project 

objectives and meets the reporting schedules. The Final Data Reviewer is responsible for the 

data being generated and directs any technical issues with the Task Lead that is responsible for 

that analysis, the Program Manager, and/or the Program QA Coordinator.
Project N

Element NRevision Date Page 

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

Table 1-1 

Program Organization

Program Assignment Program Personnel Assigned Phone Number 

Program Manager Julie Swift (919) 468-7924 julie.sDeputy Program Manager Laura Van Enwyck (919) 468-7930 laura.v

Task Leader - Network Site Coordination Scott Sholar (919) 468-7951 scott.sTask Leader – Shipping and Receiving Chris Kopp (919) 468-7945 chris.kTask Leader - Air Toxics and Hexavalent Chromium Randy Bower (919) 468-7928 randyTask Leader - Carbonyl Analysis Laura Van Enwyck (919) 468-7930 laura.vTask Leader - PAMS Support * Donna Tedder (919) 468-7921 donnaTask Leader - HAPs Support ** Laura Van Enwyck (919) 468-7930 laura.vTask Leader – Metals Jennifer Colby (919) 468-7881 jennifTask Leader - Semivolatiles Scott Sholar (919) 468-7951 scott.sTask Leader - Data Characterization Regi Oommen (919) 468-7829 regi.oTask Leader – Annual Report/AQS Entry Jaime Hauser (919) 468-7813 jaime.

Task Leader - NMOC Analysis Scott Sholar (919) 468-7951 scott.s

Final Data Reviewer - SNMOC Analysis Thomas McKenzie (919) 468-7920 Thom

Program Technical Adviser Dave Dayton (919) 468-7883 dave.dProgram QA Coordinator Donna Tedder (919) 468-7921 donnaProject Administrator Kerry Fountain (919) 468-7962 kerry.

* Subcontracting support when requested from Chromian and Sonoma Technology, Inc. ** Subcontracting support when requested from RTI Laboratories (miscellaneous HAPs). 
Project N

Element NRevision Date Page 

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

EPA Project Officer

Margaret Dougherty

EPA Delivery Order Manager

Michael Jones 

or OAQPS designee

Program Manager

Julie Swift

Project Administrator

Kerry Fountain

Program Technical Advisor

Dave Dayton

Program QA Coordinator

Donna Tedder

Contracts Manager

Linda Taylor

EPA QA Officer

Dennis Mikel

Metals Analysis

Task Lead

Jennifer Colby

Carbonyl Analysis

Task Lead

Laura Van Enwyck

Hexavalent Chromium 

Analysis

Task Lead

Randy Bower Subcontracted

HAPS & Metals

Task Lead

Laura Van Enwyck

Subcontractors

RTI International

RTI Laboratories

Sanoma Technologies

SNMOC Data Analysis

Final Data Reviewer

Thomas McKenzie

Air Toxics Analysis

Task Lead

Randy Bower

Semivolatile (PAH) Analysis

Task Lead

Scott Sholar

Subcontractors

Chromian

Sonoma Technologies, Inc.

QA Audit & 

PAMS Support

Task Lead

Donna Tedder 

NMOC Analysis

Final Data Reviewer

Scott Sholar

Deputy Program Manager

Laura Van Enwyck

Data Characterization

Task Lead

Regi Oommen

Figure 1-1. National Monitoring Programs Organizational Chart 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 1 - A4 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 7 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

Table 1-2

QC Responsibilities and Review Functions 

Responsible Person Major Responsibilities

Ms. Julie Swift, Program 

Manager 

 Ensure overall timely performance of high quality technical services 

 Communicate technical issues and needs 

 Assist in the resolution of technical problems 

 Track all management systems and tools 

 Track deliverables and budget performance 

 Ensure appropriate level of staffing and committed resources exist to perform 

work 

 Communicate daily with the EPA/State/local/tribal agencies 

 Ensure data quality 

 Check information completeness 

 Review data completeness and quality before reporting to client 

 Review all reports 

 Report project performance (budget and deliverables) to EPA at scheduled 

meetings and in monthly progress reports 

 Day-to-day management of task leaders 

Ms. Laura Van Enwyck, 

Deputy Program 

Manager 

 Ensure overall timely performance of high quality technical services 

 Communicate technical issues and needs 

 Assist in the resolution of technical problems 

 Ensure appropriate level of staffing and committed resources exist to perform 

work 

 Communicate with the EPA/State/local/tribal agencies 

 Ensure data quality 

 Check information completeness 

 Review data completeness and quality before reporting to client 

 Day-to-day management of task leaders 

 Task Leader on HAPS support 

Mr. Dave Dayton, 

Program Technical 

Adviser 

 Assist in the resolution of technical problems 

 Communicate potential technical issues and needs 

Ms. Donna Tedder, 

Program QA Coordinator 

 Make QA recommendations 

 Write and/or review QAPP 

 Audit laboratory 

 Review QA reports 

 Evaluate the effect of technical issues on data quality 

 Review 10% of all QC data for monthly reports 

 Review documentation (data, reports, etc.) 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 1 - A4 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 8 of 8

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect1 12.docx 

Table 1-2

QC Responsibilities and Review Functions Continued 

Responsible Person Major Responsibilities

Task Leader, listed in 

Table 1-1 

 Review documentation 

 Develop analytical procedures 

 Propose procedural changes 

 Review and validate data 

 Train and supervise analysts 

 Meet task report schedules 

 Manage day-to-day technical activities 

 Check information completeness 

 Review instrument and maintenance log books 

 Review calibration factor drift 

 Perform preventive maintenance 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 2 - A5 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 1 of 3

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect2 12.docx 

SECTION 2 

PROBLEM DEFINITION/BACKGROUND

The Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 required the EPA’s Office of Air Quality 

Planning and Standards (OAQPS) to set National Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) for 

the “criteria” pollutant, ozone. In areas of the country where the NAAQS for ozone is being 

exceeded, additional measurements of the ambient NMOC(1) concentration are needed to assist 

the affected States in developing revised ozone control strategies. Measurements of ambient 

NMOC are important to the control of VOCs that are precursors to atmospheric ozone. Because 

of previous difficulty in obtaining accurate NMOC concentration measurements, EPA started a 

monitoring and analytical program in 1984 to provide support to the States. ERG has 

continuously supported EPA for the NMOC programs since 1984. 

Studies indicate that a potential for elevated cancer risk is associated with certain toxic 

compounds often found in ambient urban air.(2) In 1987, EPA developed the Urban Air Toxics 

Monitoring Program (UATMP) to help State, local and tribal air monitoring agencies 

characterize the nature and extent of potentially toxic air pollution in urban areas. Since 1987, 

several State and local agencies have participated in the UATMP by implementing ambient air 

monitoring programs. These efforts have helped to identify the toxic compounds most prevalent 

in the ambient air and indicate emissions sources that are likely to be contributing to elevated 

concentrations. As a screening program the UATMP also provides data input for models used by 

EPA, State, local and risk assessment personnel to assess risks posed by the presence of toxic 

compounds in urban areas. The UATMP program is a year-round sampling program, collecting 

24-hour integrated ambient air samples at urban sites in the contiguous United States every six or 

12 days, and is also supported by ERG. 

The SNMOC program was initiated in 1991 in response to requests by State agencies for 

more detailed speciated hydrocarbon data for use in ozone control strategies and Urban Airshed 

Model (UAM) input. 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 2 - A5 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 2 of 3

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect2 12.docx 

Title I, Section 182 of the Clean Air Act Amendments of 1990 requires States to establish 

PAMS as part of their State implementation plan (SIP) for ozone nonattainment areas. The rule 

revises the ambient air quality surveillance regulations to include enhanced monitoring of ozone 

and its precursors. The regulations promulgated in 1993 require monitoring of ozone, oxides of 

nitrogen (NOx), selected carbonyl compounds, and VOCs. The required monitoring is complex 

and requires considerable lead time for the agencies to acquire the equipment and expertise to 

implement their PAMS network. Under the PAMS program, each site may require a different 

level of support with respect to sampling frequency, sampling equipment, analyses, and report 

preparation. Presampling, sampling, and analytical activities are performed according to the 

guidance provided in the Technical Assistance Document (TAD)(3), for Sampling and Analysis 

of Ozone Precursors, 1998 revision. The specific methodology applicable to the PAMS program 

will be discussed in this QAPP. 

In 1999, the EPA expanded this program to provide for the measurement of additional 

Clean Air Act HAPs to support the Government Performance and Results Act (GPRA). As 

required under the GPRA, the EPA developed a Strategic Plan that includes a goal for Clean Air. 

Under this goal, there is an objective to improve air quality and reduce air toxics emissions to 

levels 75 percent below 1993 levels by 2010 in order to reduce the risk to Americans of cancer 

and other serious adverse health effects caused by airborne toxics. 

In 2001 the United States EPA designed a national network for monitoring air toxics 

compounds present in ambient air entitled the National Ambient Toxics Trends Station 

(NATTS). The intent of this network is to develop an extensive air toxics database from actual 

field measurements (rather than calculated emission rates) in order to detect selected air toxics 

compounds and track the trends in the concentrations with the ultimate goal of assessing specific 

related health risks. 

The data obtained by following this QAPP will be used by EPA, State, local, and risk 

assessment personnel to determine prevalent ozone precursors and air toxics in the urban air. 

The data collected from the continuous yearly sites gives data analyst consistent analytical 
Project No. 0269.00 

Element No. Section 2 - A5 

Revision No. 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 3 of 3

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect2 12.docx 

results. Sampling and analytical uncertainties are determined through this program by 

performing 10% sampling duplicate (or collocated) and analytical replicate samples for each of 

the urban air sites. 

This combined QAPP defines the preparation, sampling, laboratory analyses and QA/QC 

procedures conducted by ERG for the EPA National Monitoring Programs to deliver data of 

sufficient quality to meet the program’s objectives. Many of these procedures described in this 

QAPP are based on experiences obtained during previous National Program Studies. 

 
Project No. 0260.00 

Element No. Section 3 - A6 

Revision 2 

Date January 2012 

Page 1 of 15 

L:\LABPROJ\269\QAPP 2012\Sect3 12.docx 

SECTION 3 

PROJECT/TASK DESCRIPTION

This section describes the activities performed under each of the major EPA National 

Monitoring Programs components (NMOC, SNMOC, UATMP, PAMS, Community Scale Air 

Toxics Ambient Monitoring (CSATAM), and NATTS). ERG dedicates passivated canisters, 

sampling equipment and provides expendable sampling media to the program to maintain known 

quality of the sample collection that meets the program objectives. Sampling and analysis 

schedules are prepared in the project instructions when the delivery orders are provided by EPA. 

3.1 NMOC and SNMOC

The NMOC and SNMOC programs require several activities for a successful monitoring 

program. The monitoring program begins with activities prior to sample collection. The NMOC 

and SNMOC sample collection systems are designed to collect ambient air samples in 

SUMMA®-treated stainless steel canisters over a 3-hour period. This sample collection period 

occurs from 6:00 - 9:00 a.m. local time to capture mobile source pollutants during the morning 

“rush hour” simultaneously with sunrise, which provides the energy necessary for many 

photochemical reactions. Weekday sampling will be the responsibility of the individual States 

involved in this program. ERG provides the sampler, training, and any technical assistance 

needed throughout the monitoring program. 

A selected number of canisters from State- and EPA-directed sites are analyzed for 

additional air toxics compounds; these sites and canisters are identified at the beginning of the 

program to ensure sample completeness. Some sites also collect carbonyl samples for analysis. 

The analytical methods and procedures are discussed later in the UATMP and PAMS project 

descriptions (Section 10).